Episode 249: 4 Ways To Find Clients – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who need to generate leads and grow your list.

Summary:

You need a constant flow of new leads coming into your business, but marketing can be overwhelming and time consuming. Entrepreneurs spin their wheels all the time, wondering what to do, where to post and how to find their perfect clients. In this show we’re simplifying the process of marketing, but breaking up the 4 way to find clients. The greatest news is that you only need to nail one of these ways to build a thriving expert, coaching or consulting business.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the 4 ways to find clients
  2. Have powerful clarity in which is the best for your company
  3. Level up your marketing and strategy in a simple way that works

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

Episode 248: How To Create An Audio Only Coaching Program – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for introverted coaches and consultants, who want to build a group program, but don’t love being on video.

Summary:

In this show we’re breaking down a new structure of offering a coaching program via audio only. There are many traditional coaching program models that include video, live streaming or in person face to face. But not all great coaches want to be on video and that’s okay. Today I’m dropping the framework to create an audio-only based coaching program that delivers great results. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Discover an audio-based coaching model
  2. Tech recipe for this type of offer
  3. Know how to create an audio-only offer utilizing clubhouse, Kajabi and marketing with Instagram

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hey guys, and welcome back to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, and I’m super stoked to be talking to you yet another week here on the show, delivering you business coaching and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

And so we love giving you step-by-step processes and orders of operation and frameworks, and literally strategies that you can totally take to the bank right away in your business. All of the show notes and everything that we’re talking about, or if you frankly just want to check out more about this Sweetlife company and how we work with experts and coaches and consultants to build your business,

you can do so by visiting Sweetlife co.com, it’s the best place to find all of the resources, including the show notes for this podcast. This is episode number 248. And all of the details of what we’re talking about will be found there as well. So let me give you the behind the scenes story about why I decided to do a podcast episode on this particular topic.

So I was hosting another one of the whiteboard strategy sessions that we do within our community and a woman came in and she’s a coach. She’s a health coach. And she was really honest. She said, you know, I just really don’t love being on video. And I appreciated her honesty because in this whiteboard strategy session, we were talking about the importance of creating programs and offers that really highlight your strengths and that you love to deliver.

And just because everybody says, and I I’m holding like air quotes, while I’m saying this, everybody says you should be doing video and you need to be on live. That actually is not necessarily the perfect fit for you. So I want to have a conversation with the rest of you guys about how to build your coaching programs that are totally audio only based because I am a firm believer that we can engineer anything that you want when it comes to your offers.

We can take a look at how you want your life to be and how you want the cadence to function as far as how you meet with people in what model, what mode of delivery does that actually look like for you that you’re going to love. And of course, that’s going to give your, your clients, your people transformational results. And so it was a really cool conversation we had in this whiteboard session that I wanted to bring to you in this episode.

So if that sounds good to you, that’s what we’re going to go ahead and dive into for those of you guys that are new to the show and like to tag the episodes with a phase of business that you were in. So this particular episode is for you in really any of the launch and scale phases of business, if you are not sure what business phase you’re in,

just cruise over to our website@sweetlifeco.com forward slash quiz. And you can take a little mini quiz finding out exactly what stage of business you’re at and a whole entire checklist of what you should be working on based on your business phase. So this is for those of you guys who are either just launching your first coaching program, or maybe you’ve had like a ton of programs before,

and you want to shore up what you have. You want to clean up what you have and really launch what I call your signature program or offer. This is really, really good for you guys for also introverts who don’t want to be on video. And you might hesitate to even be on Instagram because you don’t want to put yourself out there, but you really want and need to connect with your people.

That video just might not be the right way for you to do that. And what’s cool about what we’re going to unpack in today’s show is video might not be the right way for your clients to receive information from you as well. So those are the things that we can dive into. At the end of this episode, you can expect to discover the audio based coaching model.

You can also discover that I’m going to unpack for you, the tech recipe for this type of offer. I’m going to give you specific software that we believe could be a great fit for you as you were building out this type of offer. And you’re going to know how to actually structure not only the offer part of it, but I’m also giving you tips and recommendations on how you can lead people into your audio offer in a way that really aligns with an audio only type coaching program.

So again, this is episode number 248, and let’s go ahead and dive in Okay, you guys, in this show, I’m going to totally break down for you. This new structure of offering a coaching program. That is audio only here is why this is so important. There are so many people out there that are launching traditional coaching models that include video include live streaming include face-to-face.

I love those things. So I do those things, but I totally get and appreciate that. You may not. So what we’re going to unpack is this different structure of a coaching program that is audio only based because not all great coaches want to be on video and it’s totally okay. And so the framework of how we create an audio only coaching program is what we’re going to talk about.

It can still deliver amazing results to your people. And so let’s kind of unpack some of the considerations. If you were thinking about whether or not this is a good fit for you. So when we are creating your coaching programs, your offers, it’s really, really important that your offers highlight your strengths. So if you are ready, don’t want to be on video,

but you’re really good at what you do. You’re a really great coach or a consultant in video. It just might even actually take away from what a great expert you are. Because if you get nervous on video, if you just don’t really feel comfortable on video, then we don’t want that to take away from the expertise that you do bring to the table.

And if your trepidation, or if you’re just lack of comfort with video, is that big of a deal. Then that is actually a really important conversation. I think that we should have. And I know that there are so many people out there that’ll tell you, oh, you just have to get over it. Oh, you just have to practice a bunch of times.

Now, let me say that is totally true. There are very few people that just come out the gate super confident on video. All right, there is a learning curve to video. And I do promise you that the more you do it, the more comfortable you’ll get, and then you’ll just rock it. I promise you that. But if you just don’t want to do video flat out,

you only want to work on it. It’s just not even what you’re thinking. It’s not on your scope anywhere. Then this is a great conversation to have, because we need to highlight your strengths. When we do something that takes away from your expertise that you deliver to people, because you might build forced into a certain way of doing it. It can really cause problems.

It can cause sales problems. It can cause connection problems with your audience when you just really aren’t being authentic and true to you. So I am just a huge advocate of engineering offers and programs that are really, really good for you. And so I think in that process, we always not only think we do in this process as a team, when we’re working with clients,

have a conversation, just really unpacking what actually feels good to you. And so that’s why I’m really excited to dive into this. And when we’re talking about video, let’s also talk not only about you let’s talk about your clients. If the clients you are serving might not also feel comfortable on video. Let’s say you don’t feel comfortable on video and you launch a coaching program where everybody has to come in on video and see each other’s faces.

If the clients you’re serving are of a personality, which is a little bit more private introverted, they might actually not want to go on video to learn from you. And so it’s important to not only highlight your strengths, but also to understand psychologically where your clients are as well. And so this is another great reason to talk about an audio program. And then even if you love video,

even if your clients love video, right video, video video, it’s a big party of our video. Even if that’s the case, having a conversation about an audio only coaching program is really, really important because we are in an audio era and we’ve been in a video area in that era, and that will continue. But we’re also in an audio area with the introduction of apps like clubhouse in so many more people getting into podcasting.

And the reason why they love these things is because they can learn and implement and function while they’re on the go. So I love just having the conversation about an audio only coaching program, even if video, isn’t a problem, just to talk about disrupting the way things are done to find a better way. I think it’s a great idea and it doesn’t have to be just because you don’t like video.

So those are all the things I want to dive into today. So first of all, let’s dive into the first part of this. How on earth, you know, as you’re saying, how on earth April, do I deliver an audio only coaching program? So obviously the prerequisite to this is to make sure that your whole entire content for your program is laid out.

So we’re not even going to talk about that on today’s show. That’s what we teach in my signature offer master class. Those are the things we break apart with you on numerous other podcast episodes. If you’re a struggling to create the actual content of your signature offer, just cruise over to our website and you can literally search our podcast website, just type in the words,

signature offer. And it will populate all of the podcast episodes that I have talked about that and taught about that. So obviously I want to make sure that you’re not missing that piece of it, but saying that that prerequisite is met. Let’s say you’ve engineered the content that goes in your offer, and you now need to build it out into a model to distribute it,

to infuse the content into your people. And so when we’re talking about delivering the coaching program and audio only here are some software suggestions so that you can look into that, see what works best for you. These are only suggestions. Some of these we do endorse and use as a company and others. I haven’t even tried, but I’ve heard great things about them.

So I’m going to give you a couple of different ways here, where you can actually deliver the audio side of your coaching business. So the first thing is Kajabi. You know, we work really closely with Kajabi. We do endorse Kajabi is a matter of fact, and I haven’t really even talked about it on the podcast. We now have a completely separate division of my consulting business called Sweetlife digital.

And in Sweetlife digital, all we do is build out websites and online courses and coaching programs for Kajabi. So we are in, and our sleeves are rolled up and then Kajabi. We really like these guys and all of our systems have been built with Kajabi since 2013, 2014. We’re actually founding partners with them. One of the things that Kajabi does really well is helps you to deliver audio content and they did it way back in the beginning.

And honestly, they took it away for a little while. And that was a bummer where you couldn’t really upload audio. Well, they’ve just put that back. And so you can actually create a complete online course as you would. And if you don’t want to do this slide and you don’t want to be in video don’t, you can just record an audio file,

just like I am recording this audio file to in a podcast form. And you can upload the audio of your coaching as modules inside Kajabi. And this is a really, really cool idea. And you can even design it and have obviously graphic design in there because we need to have some sort of design in the back end of that program, but you don’t have to do video.

And it’s really important. I want you to know that, that there actually is a structure in place that’s done really well in a software that you don’t have to do any video at all. So that is tech option. Number one, number two, you can actually do a paid podcast. So I don’t know if you guys have ever thought about this before,

but there are podcasts that are free. Like this one that’s available to everybody, but you can actually do a paid only podcast where people subscribe and they pay to hear your coaching or hear your teaching. And in this case, we’re talking about just a coaching program where you could deliver your whole entire coaching program, but not in a platform like an online courses platform.

You could deliver it in a private law, locked down podcast. And one of the software that we like, so this is tech option. Number three is my friend, Carla white. I met her on clubhouse and I’ve been able to meet her in person. A couple of times, she actually has an amazing software called hero FM and hero FM, I will say in full transparency,

I’ve never tested it. I’ve never used it, but I like her as a person. She’s super cool. You guys, and I know the heart behind what she’s creating and she’s worked very hard to develop this software and I’ll make sure a link to this is in the show notes for you guys. And so you can go check this out, but hero FM is a platform specifically for paid podcasts only so that you can lock down and you can protect your intellectual property behind a paywall.

And so it’s a very, very cool idea. And her software is built specifically just for that. And then the fourth option I want to give you. And I know this sounds very old school. Okay? So don’t laugh at me when I’m going to say this, but this works all right. If you are considering doing an audio only coaching program,

you got a problem with me. You aren’t gonna laugh when I tell you this, because you’re gonna think I totally went back to the eighties, but here’s the deal. What about doing phone calls, phone calls only you guys. This is the way we used to deliver group coaching back in like the two thousands sounds so funny when I say that. So like in the nineties,

1990s, and I swear I’m not that old, I’ve just been coaching for a long time. And in the two thousands, we would bring in a software like free conference call.com and people would dial in and they would dial into our group coaching. There is no reason why you can’t do live group coaching program by calling to people and talking to them on the phone in depending on who you’re serving.

So let’s just say you have an audience that’s over 50 years old in that’s your ideal target. Like you’re a serving midlifers and that is exactly who you want to deliver your content to. I guarantee you, those people want to hear from you on a phone call, much more than trying to navigate techie software. Now there are a ton of techie people in midlife,

but just really depending on your audience, they may love it. And just because it’s the way we deliver coaching 20 years ago, doesn’t mean that you can’t still build an amazing coaching program around phone calls. And having people call in, you can even build a new structure where they can submit their questions ahead of time. And you can answer questions in the group call that have been submitted ahead of time,

so everybody can hear. And so I just really want to encourage you that just because there are so many things on a technical side that are advancing, it doesn’t mean that they have to. So really I promise you not like to tell me you wouldn’t, you wouldn’t laugh at me when I said that, but actually just think about it. Or if you have another coaching program,

if you’re listening to this and you actually have a traditional course or a traditional coaching program, there is nothing wrong with going back to these call in coaching programs. So you’re not making people log into zoom and you’re not making them log into something else. You’re just getting them on the phone. As a matter of fact, I have an amazing client. She is a very well-known author.

She is a coach. She is a speaker. Actually. She teaches very special high-end programs at Tony Robbins masterminds, and she has this incredible program. She still has people call in on their group coaching help sessions to a 800 number. Okay. And so I just want to tell you that even though nobody talks about it doesn’t mean it can’t still be done and it isn’t still being done.

So I just want to encourage you in that. And then the very last thing that I want to share with you as a tool we use all, all the time behind the scenes in that is Voxer. I know many of you guys are, you know, about box or you, you use Voxer, but there are a lot of people who’ve never heard of it before.

And Foxer is a really great way to connect with your clients and to connect with groups where you can leave audio messages like a walkie talkie. It’s a great opportunity. You don’t have to show up there physically in like show your face. You can post some videos and Voxer a little bit shorter, but it’s really designed to be an audio platform. And so that is another way to deliver great content or even ongoing group coaching,

where you don’t want to have to ask people to show up in your zoom rooms or show up to a live stream in a Facebook group. And you just really want to meet them where they are. So talking about a tech stack of where to build your coaching programs. We talked about Kajabi audio. We about paid podcast just across the board, including they gave you the example of hero F M and we talked about old school phone calls and Voxer.

These are great ways to deliver amazing coaching programs if they work for you. And of course they need to work for your clients and your students as well. And so the next thing and the really the last thing I want to unpack for you here, while hopefully your wheels are spinning on what you already have, or what you might want to create in this sense is what I call like the mode of transportation,

transportation, to get people into your program. So what is the funnel? What is the pipeline? There’s always different reviews. You know, the sales strategy, the sales pipeline, the funnel, what is that? To get people into an audio only coaching program. This is often not talked about, but I want to make sure that I say this here.

I share it on clubhouse a lot. And I just want to make sure I’m really, really clear your pipeline. Your funnel that leads into your program should play very well with how you deliver the actual signature program itself. So if you’re a signature program is an audio only coaching program, whether it’s live audio or on demand, then how we get people into your program should also give them part,

at least part of the experience of what it’s going to be like to be in your programs. It’s the prerequisite, it’s the warmup. We want to start conditioning people to understand what it’s like to work with you so they can make a decision to jump into your coaching programs. If you do a funnel and you start connecting with people and you’re on video and it’s just big and huge and all these things,

right? And you have a green screen behind you, and it’s great. And to get into your coaching program, and they’re only hearing your voice, there is going to be a problem. People are going to be like, wait, wait, wait, what, where did she go? What, where does she go? She just told me this great program and she’s no around,

I just hear her voice. And so the point I’m making is that it’s really, really important that the pipeline that leads into your program is also cohesive with how you deliver your program. So a couple of great places to fill up your signature program. If it’s an audio program is number one, clubhouse. Clubhouse is amazing. I know for those of you like me,

that we’ve been on clubhouse for almost a year. Now it’s not the same as it was in the beginning days, but based on your coaching business, it’s still an incredibly powerful place to build relationships with clients and talk about what you do and bring them off of clubhouse. Especially if you have an audio only program talking about your audio coaching program and bringing them off clubhouse into another audio coaching program,

those type of models are directly the same. They speak to the same people. So you already know your people are there because they already enjoy listening to audio. So that is a very great place to work on building a pipeline in a funnel, your program. And I do have other podcast episodes on how to do that in clubhouse. So make sure you were looking those up because I’ve broken down all those steps for you in previous podcast episodes in the beginning of 2021.

So that’s the first thing. The second option for you is to launch a mini podcast. It’s like this little teeny micro podcast. I heard somebody call it like a capsule podcast. I don’t even know exactly what that means to me. It’s like a mini podcast and it ends, and that is a podcast. It’s only a couple of episodes. And you work from like three to seven episodes in you’re priming people for moving into your paid podcast.

So we use it like a lead magnet. You can drop it in, it stays there. It’s evergreen content, which means people can always jump into it. And we can actually run ads to people to listen to your mini free podcast. And then at the end of your mini free podcasts, you ask them to upgrade, to join your paid podcast,

see how that works. So it’s flowing all together and you already know your audience likes that you already know your audience connects with that. So it just totally make sense to keep offering that business model in your next level coaching. And then one of the things I also wanted to share with just, just one last tip is when we’re talking about social media,

I totally get that there is so much pressure to be on video. And I appreciate that if this isn’t you, if this isn’t who you are, then that’s okay. And I, I want us to actually lean into who we’re not just as much as who we think we should become. You know, you see that quote, gosh, I’ve even quoted at myself on Instagram all the time that says like,

in order to be who you’re supposed to be, you have to like, basically like become somebody else. That is not the context that I want to make sure that like when we share that, that, that is, I don’t want you to think that you need to change because I believe that we are made how we are supposed to be made. We always need to be upgraded.

We always need to be doing things that what I call a challenge lifestyle, where you we’re constantly challenging ourselves to be better, to push out the barriers that are around us and grow more and do things that scare us. I think that’s a very powerful and an important part of who we are as leaders, business leaders, just frankly as human beings. But I also want to value how you were perfectly created.

And if that is to not show up with your face on video all the time, we can do other things. So challenge you and get you outside of your box, but build a program and build a business and build an offer that really is in line with who you are as a person. So taking that awareness, let’s talk about Instagram. There are ways that you can just post audio on Instagram,

even if don’t want to show your face. Now, I do think it’s important to show your face. If you’re a coach or a consultant, or at least something behind the scenes, because people really do need to know you and trust you. But when we take podcasting into account, people have heard my voice for years, and there is a certain sense of just hearing my voice makes them feel like they know me.

I’ve actually had people come up to me who I’ve never seen before. One lady at funnel hacking live. It made me feel so special. I was like, oh my gosh, she’s so sweet. Like I was literally in a bathroom. She’s like your April beach. I know your voice. And it really, I was like, wow, okay,

this is, this is kind of cool. I’m going to go tell my kids. You know, it was really, really sweet, right? And so people can connect with your voice. It doesn’t always have to be a video. I do want you to be sharing your face and a bit of behind the scenes as much as possible, because that certainly helps build the relationships as well.

But when we’re talking about Instagram, you can just post audio on Instagram, use a software like headliner, where you can take your audio and you can overlay it on top of a beautiful picture or your logo or something that tells a story, even a solid background in just drop audio on your Instagram feed, just upload audio clips to your Instagram stories. There’s no reason why you can’t do that.

As a matter of fact, I really kind of loved doing stuff that nobody else is doing just to test it out and see how it goes, if that is who you are and that’s how you deliver your programs. It totally makes sense to me that we would at least take certain aspects of that and bring that into your marketing and to share that inside the ecosystem of what you do,

that everything you do is audio in what we’re doing in that process is we’re getting clients to pre qualify and disqualify themselves to identify whether or not they can learn from this audio setting. And so we always want to make sure that we do that in part of the way we do that is through your marketing strategy and it’s through the funnel and all of those things aligned with the way your program is delivered.

So those are the things I wanted to share with you on today’s show. I just hope your wheels are spinning, whether you’re a new coach or you’re an established coach, kosha, how we can again, disrupt the status quo and create something that might be great for you and excellent for your clients as well. And perhaps, maybe that is an audio only coaching program.

And so if you’ve never thought about this before, DM me on Instagram at April beach life, I would love to hear about your thoughts on this. This could be for your huge signature offer that you might build. It could be for a smaller, simple signature offer that you build. It can be for anything. And I just love having this conversation because I think there are a lot of people out there that just don’t want to do things the way that everybody is quote unquote,

telling them they should post to do it. And I’m a big advocate for disrupting. And just saying that just because everybody else is doing something doesn’t mean that’s the great way for you to do it. So hopefully you found this show helpful. Hopefully you found this audio only coaching program structure is something to get your wheels spinning. And I would love to hear about what you do with this information.

Thank you so much for tuning into the show again, to learn more about what we do in our team and how we work with experts, coaches, and consultants, cruise over to sweet life co.com. And I would love to get to know you more. All right, you guys have an amazing night. It’s always so great to have an opportunity to speak to you.

Thanks so much.

Episode 247: Finding Your Minimum Viable Coaching Offer – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Down the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who deliver big results, but struggle to dumb-down what you do.

Summary:

So you’re a genius. You can do many things and deliver a variety of results to your clients, but sometimes what you do is so big, people can’t wrap their heads around it. They can’t see it. It’s too far away – a mirage or pipe dream. In this week’s show we’re helping you create an easy entry point that clients understand, so they can enter your ego system and move into more. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand why you need a small entry
  2. Understand how to choose your entry point
  3. Have a plan to create an entry offer that you can live with

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hi guys. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 247 and I’m April. And so lad to talk to you today. Thanks for joining me. We are diving into a topic that I actually just got out of a very cool mastermind session with an amazing group of people.

And I was saying, gosh, I’m just about to go record a podcast episode, and I really want to deliver something that is pertinent right now. And every single one of ’em was like, this is what we were talking about in this space tonight. And you should totally unpack everything we talked about behind the scenes in this whiteboard session that I hosted live on the podcast.

And so I laid out my notes for you. I have structured tonight’s training and it’s going to be a bit of an extension of some of the live conversation. I was just having with a handful of clients. I was guiding through this same process. So welcome to behind the scenes of working with me as if you were in a private client, micro mastermind with me,

but then also to the strategies that you need to apply to your own business. This is the suite life entrepreneur podcast. And I’m so glad that you have joined me. If you have never listened to the show before, thank you so much for checking us out. We really, really pride ourselves on being known for the podcast that delivers you business coaching that is vetted and proven that you can bank on.

That is so good. It’s coaching that other coaches will charge you thousands of dollars for in their own business. In every single one of our shows is a step-by-step business training. You’re going to play a right away and you can bank on what we’re talking about here on the show. So welcome all of the show notes. All of the things that we deliver to you can also be found by visiting sweet life co.com

as well as the business coaching programs that we offer to entrepreneurs like yourself. You can go to Sweetlife co.com to check it out. And we would certainly love to hear your story and get to know you and the business that you’re in the process of growing more. So today we’re going to talk about what is your minimum viable coaching niche. We’re going to dive into a few really important things,

especially extracting from this micro mastermind that I was hosting. And we’re going to talk about the fact that you have a lot of things you can do in your business. And because you can do a million things doesn’t mean that people can fully wrap their head around that. So I totally get in here that you are a genius. You’ve done a lot of things.

Most clients, when they come to us have had offers many services, even books that have been written there, they have a lot of things that they have done, but they’re struggling to put it into a blueprint that all fits together. That’s going to line up with the life they want in the future and their profit plan. And so just because we can do a lot of things when we turn around and we try to sell that to somebody that might not be as familiar with,

you might not know how great you are. They might not have been following you for the last couple of years. Sometimes it’s hard for them to fully wrap their head around all that you can and do deliver to your clients. And so on today’s show, we’re talking about what is a minimum viable coaching offer and a niche. So I’m going to give you the strategies to go and extract out of all of your assets.

The one thing that we want to sell so that somebody totally aligns and understands what it is that you do. And they’re ready to take that first step into what I call your business ecosystem. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right. So this show is great for those of you guys who deliver a lot of big,

huge Results, be you struggle to kind of dumb it down to people that you’re talking to in the beginning, you may speak to them and it’s like this deer in the headlights look, and they’re thinking, wow, you do so much. I can’t even identify where I would start working with you. So I get it. I totally get it. And I’m going to share some stories and how I’ve struggled with this and today’s show and the solutions that we put in place and how we fix this.

It was not easy. I will tell you that it was an ongoing struggle for a long period of time. And I know that it might be for you also, because you’re basically a genius and there are a lot of things you can do. There are a lot of things you’ve done. There are a lot of things you want to do, but just because you deliver a variety of things,

your clients doesn’t mean that they fully can see it. They can’t wrap their head around it. And so if they can’t see it, then it’s like too far away for them. It’s a Mirage. It’s like this pipe dream. It seems so big. And so far away for them to accomplish all of the things in which you can help them with.

So today we’re really breaking this down and helping you create an easy entry point or an easy offer in your coaching or consulting business. A clients can totally understand so that you can have them enter your ecosystem and then move forward with you more. We’re going to talk about understanding why you need this entry point. We’re going to dive into helping you choose this entry point and helping you have a plan of how to put this into action.

The truth of the matter is, is we have to simplify your offers. You guys know I’m the signature offer engineering framework girl, right? Like that is our jam. That is what we’re known for is helping entrepreneurs develop your intellectual property into transformational signature offers and programs. And when you hear that word signature offer, you probably think it’s so big and so huge,

but it doesn’t have to be. And so sometimes when you, what you do is so big and so huge, we want to take a little piece of that and we want to extract it out. We want to simplify it because the problem is, is again, just because there’s a lot you can do. There’s a lot that you do do for your clients.

It’s just too big. They can’t even see past this emergency that they’re having right now in their business. And so the solution is to create this easy entry point. And so what that means is you are going to sell what the people know they need right now, so that you can have an opportunity to then teach them and help them overcome what they don’t know is coming down the road.

So let me say that again. We sell them what they know they need right now in order to bring them into your ecosystem of all the other things that you can do so that you can solve their tomorrow problems, because they can’t even see those big trial problems. You can see it cause you’re an expert. You can see it because you’re so close to what you do and you see it.

So in depth, in the intricacies of all of the solutions and all of the different angles that you want people to be thinking about, but they can’t even get there. They cannot get there in their mind. And so we have to meet them where they are right now. And we have to solve their first pain problem, not like all their pain problems,

but we just have to solve the closest one to where they are now, the closest one that they know. And they understand that they are talking about on a daily basis because when you provide a longer term solution in what you do, so you’re listening to this, you’re probably an expert of some kind or a coach or consultant, or you provide a service.

So when, what you do is rolled out over an extended period of time and they might not get like this instant result, but, you know, in order to get the big life-changing or business changing Results, they have to do the work, right. So if it doesn’t happen overnight, people just can’t see it. They’re just far away from it.

And it just seems so big. And so this is something I struggled with for years, you guys. So what I really do is I help entrepreneurs, blueprint and engineered their entire business. I help entrepreneurs map your entire business based on exactly how you want your life to look. If you want to be in a hut over crystal, clear water and Tahiti,

I will help you blueprint that if you want to travel around your kids, lacrosse games and, and be on the road, traveling with your family five months a year, like I do, I will help you blueprint that. Okay. But it’s so huge, right? So I say that, and even as I’m saying it, you’re like, oh yeah,

in your mind, you’re like, oh yeah, sure, whatever. Like teaching me how to build a business and blueprint in my offers so that, you know, I know for a fact I’m going to be in this great hat over, you know, dangling my toes in the crystal, clear water and Tahiti. It just seems so big. Right.

But that is what I do. I’ve done it for 25 years and I’ve done it for a lifetime of entrepreneurship for myself. I literally have a lifetime of proven experience doing that for myself and clients all over the world, but it’s too big. So when I say that and I used to say this all the time, and I used to go back and forth with my teams and I used to say,

well, why can’t we just put out on there that, you know, I do, you know, lifestyle, business, design, lifestyle, business engineering. And my team would come back to me and they would just say, April, it is so far away. People think you’re full of shit, basically. You know what I mean? Like they just can’t even get there because right now in their business,

they need to land their first 10 plants. Or right now in their business, they need to hit consistent 10 or 20 K months, or right now in their business, they need to hire their first team member or a podcast producer. Like that is all they can see when I’m like out there saying, Hey, listen, but guess what don’t you want to be here and Tahiti with your toasting clean in the water with me.

Sure. Yeah, of course that resonates, but it doesn’t hit home because after this podcast is over, you would hang up and you would leave and you would turn this thing off. And then that immediate problem would still be in front of your face. So I want you to take that scenario in your business. You deliver so much more than what you do.

I know that you know, that your expertise, your ideas and your thoughts is so much bigger than your audience is capable of wrapping their head around. Right. But the problem is when we approach them with that big picture thing, they’re going to bounce right off of you because you seem too good to be true, because it seems kind of fake because it’s not solving their immediate problems.

And this is something that I struggled with for ever like 12 years seriously in my team is finally like no, April. We really have to lead in with the first micro solution that we deliver to clients, which is engineering and structuring their intellectual property into a signature offer. Because the truth of the matter is, is without that one thing, without your signature offer,

we can blueprint it all out. But you’re not going to get to Tahiti, sitting on a pier with your toes, dangling in the water, unless you have a world-class signature coaching program that changes people’s lives. And so I had to start with saying, okay, I really want to talk about all of it because it makes me so excited. And I literally had to live it every single day,

but where my people are is the fact that they don’t have a signature course or a second draw for a signature program. And so I want you to be thinking about, although you can do all the things, where are your people right now and what are they saying to themselves right now in relation to one piece of the big picture that you solve. So when you commit to put your client’s biggest fire out,

and I’m not saying it’s like the biggest one in truth, but in their eyes, what is it? Truth is in the eyes of the beholder or whatever it is, right? Like this is how they see it. This is a very big problem for them. So based on what they see from their perspective, it’s a big fire that needs to be put out.

And so by solving this immediate problem to them in what we call a foundational signature offer, then it gives you the privilege and the opportunity to build a relationship of trust with them, and then open the doors to them, to the rest of your, the wonder land that you can solve to the rest of this amazing mindblowing world of all these different levels they can go through with you.

But if you lead with all the big, huge weakness, and you don’t already have a big, huge audience, it is going to be very, very difficult for you to bring people into your ecosystem, to expose them to the overall client journey that you can bring them to. And so, one of the terms that is used is called the minimum viable offer.

Okay. And we use this often. Okay. So minimum viable offer a minimum viable product is a one thing that you can sell that you know, that you can sustain your business and you can prove your audience by having this minimum viable offer. This is what I want you to think of. And I seriously don’t even care if you have been in business for 10 years and you’re rolling in the dough.

If you’re struggling with bringing people in and you haven’t pinpointed that entry point, by the way, side note, you would be surprised at how many businesses that I’m connected with that are making 30 and $40,000 a month. That still struggle with basic things like ideal client messaging and offer creation. So I’m just going to take a little sidebar here, just you and I talking on the side,

these things come up again and again, and again, it’s really important. We nail these things in the beginning of the business because they will continue to haunt you as your business grows. They won’t always inhibit you from making a ton of money, but they will be a problem. So our little sidebar is done there, going back to our offer. When we’re talking about how to have people enter your big program,

your big year long, whatever you do, or like it could be years long, whatever your signature program is. We have to talk about this minimum viable offer minimum viable program. And so when you do a lot of things and you want to change somebody’s life and you want to change some of these business, I understand that you’re so close to it,

that you do it so well that you live it and you breathe it. And we have to then dumb it down. I mean, I don’t even know what a better word to say other than that is besides simplify, dumb it down and not to insult your audience, not to insult my audience, but we have to meet them in a place where they’re already having these conversations with themselves.

And so here are some ways you can go through, if you have a lot of things that you do offer for your clients, and you can kind of pick what this one, a minimum entry point is going to be for your clients. So if you have a ton of things, the first thing I want you to do is I want you to lay out all of the things that you actually are good at getting results for your clients.

So I want you to lay out, you know, these are the things I do. These are the services we provide. These are the different areas of consulting you may do. And I want you to look at all of them. And then number two, I want you to put them in an order of operations, what is the best order of operations that somebody would proceed through the journey of working with you?

First of all, don’t structure your business like this, having all these little teeny offers, it’s a hot mess. And that is not the ideal way. We’re just doing this for organizing your ideas right now in your head. So lay out the different things that you can offer them. I’m not saying that I recommend you do all these little teeny offers.

Let me just make that clear. Okay. And when you’re laying that out in that line, that timeline, if you will, of all the different Results, then I want you to just get really real. I want you to ask yourself what part of what you do do you absolutely love the best because I’m really a firm believer that we have to really love what we do otherwise.

It would be really difficult to continue when you’re tired, when things get hard, do you have to totally love what you do? Here’s another little sidebar. Can I tell you a secret? I am recording this podcast episode at 11:56 PM. Is this how I usually roll? No. We usually batch our, our podcast and it’s all structured and perfect, but the last three weeks have been crazy because I’ve been traveling so much and I’ve had sick kids.

That’s the reality. Okay. If I didn’t love what I do, if I did not love talking to you about finding your minimum viable coaching product, then there is no way I would be up right now at 1156 recording this episode. You know what I would’ve done. I would have taken an old episode because I have five years of podcast episodes. And I would have just told my producer to repurpose it,

but I’m getting on a plane tomorrow to go visit my son at college. I can’t record it over the weekend. I have a deadline with my producer and I just had this awesome conversation with this cool group of entrepreneurs in a whiteboard mastermind session that I was hosting. And I wanted to come share it with you. There’s no way I would have done that if I didn’t totally love what I do.

And that’s what I want for you to love. When we’re talking about extracting out your minimum viable offer, I want you to love it so much that when it’s like 1157 at night and you are tired and you got to get on a plane the next day, and you could have just taken an old episode and repurposed it. Cause it’s been so many darn years,

but no, you want to share with your audience a thing you want to share. Okay? And that’s what I’m doing here. I absolutely love coaching entrepreneurs and seeing their minds just explode with their own genius. When it comes to life, there is nothing more rewarding than the business world to me than that. So what is the one thing in all the things that you do in the layout of your coaching that you totally love?

So that’s number one. And then here’s where the hard part comes in, though. Okay. What is the part of that? That is the center of their daily thoughts. So just because of what you love is what you love. Doesn’t mean that’s going to be the thing that they are thinking about every day. And we really need to create a minimum viable offer or a foundational signature offer based on the thing that they are thinking about every single day.

And that’s keeping them up at night. If there is a combination between it happens to be what you love and it happens to be what you need or what they need. And they’re thinking about, well, then look no further, but if you’re like most people and you’re like, well, shoot, really don’t love this entry level offer, but people are having this conversation and I need to meet them where they are.

And this is what we strategizing about. And this is what I was working with my clients about in this mastermind session. The deal is, is that you might not necessarily love that foundational offer. We do need you to love the entire signature offer part of it. But what I am an advocate for, and I do have to say, you really,

really have to, is you have to love and the way in which you are delivering it, at least. So the content itself may not like floats your boat, but you’re really, really good at it. You can get people really fantastic results from it. And therefore we want to build it into a model that you do love doing. How do you love working with people?

How do you love interacting with people? Do you love seeing their expressions? Do you want to do something live? Do you want to do something in small groups? So if you don’t necessarily love the content that you’re delivering in this minimum viable product or this minimum viable program or offer, I want you to love the model in which you’re delivering it. And that will keep you going,

because if you love the way you’re doing that, and you’re seeing people get results that is fuel for your fire, if you are a, and then again, it opens a door to bring people into the entire ecosystem and all of the stuff that you really, really, really do love. So make sure you love the model, make sure you’re, you know,

that you love delivering the model and the way it is first, because that’s going to keep it sustainable, working with your life and finding that sweet spot of what your clients are thinking about on a daily basis. And one piece of the huge picture that you deliver to your clients long-term then you are going to have that entry point. It is going to be that minimum buyable entry point or product that is strategically designed to lead to the signature offer the next big thing,

or your entire suite of offers that you deliver for your clients. Okay. Don’t just pick up randomly. And one more thing before I end, there is a conversation. We have a lot in our communities with our clients, and that is a difference between now money and tomorrow money. And let’s keep it really real, right? Most people need now money,

right? You want to build and design a tomorrow business. We need to make sure the work you’re doing now is going to get you where you want to be in the future. And again, this is like the whole big picture thing that I coach people on that it’s hard to understand where I need to meet you, where you are right now is I totally get the fact that you might be like listening to this.

And you’re like, I have got to hit a 10 K a month for the next three months, or I have to hit my first freaking client. You know, everybody’s at a different place, right? So I identify that having a conversation around now money and tomorrow money are very, very important things. And I want to make sure that whether you’re working with us to do it,

or you have a mastermind that you’re connecting with, that you’re any place where you can come up with a strategy to make sure that you are nailing the now money so that you have an opportunity to build out your business for the tomorrow money. This minimum viable program offer that we’re talking about on this show. This should also fill the spot of your now money.

Okay? So this should fill your financial need for the immediate fast. I’m snapping my fingers back here. You can probably hear that on my mic fast now money. And so it’s an entry level point into your business. It gives people great results. It opens them up to all the rest of the ecosystem and it’s solving a financial issue for you right now in a,

hopefully we can keep putting it on autopilot and scaling it so it can continue to consistently bring in new leads into your business, giving these new leads, amazing results, and then moving them into your next level signature offer program. So I just wanted to say that I hear you. And I know that probably 70% of you listening to this show are dealing with a now money issue.

And you want to be dealing with a tomorrow money issue and you should be dealing with both of them at the same time, strategic business design mapping, everything out mapping your business needs to take into consideration, making sure you’re building your tomorrow business model, but it’s reverse engineered. Even if your now many is something that you might just need to do for only two or three months.

That’s fine. I’m fine with that. But I identify that you might need to have some now money and this strategy of creating this minimum viable offer this minimum viable program that you have also fills that need for those of you that need now money just wanted to say that. Okay. So I am losing my voice. I have been coaching whiteboard sessions all week long.

My signature offer masterclass, that’s called a, your signature offer opens this week. And so we have these amazing conversations with people, both clients and new clients to us in these whiteboard sessions, leading up to it. And my voice is totally shot. And I’m about to go cheer for my son’s college lacrosse game this weekend. So who knows what’s going to happen to my voice after this,

but anyway, wanted to get this episode out to you guys. And, and I just felt like these conversations. So we have in our community, these are the ones that we really want to put out on the podcast. It might not be something that’s planned six weeks down the road in my overall 2022 content strategy. But I would much rather be here with you now at 12:04 AM recording this show and dropping it to you because I believe this is something that’s going to benefit you.

Something in here we talked about, hopefully we’ll hit an immediate problem that you have and give you an immediate idea or a thought process for a solution. And I love hearing about how you guys are applying this and your business. So hit me up on Instagram, send me a DM. I love getting your guys’ DMS. I’m at April beach life. And if you do want to learn about joining our mastermind,

our coaching programs, our masterclasses to lay out your business for both the now many in the future money, definitely cruise over to sweet life co.com. I would love to work with you. I’d love to get to know you more, make sure that you qualify to work with us and just really hear your story. Thanks for being here. You guys hope you have a fabulous day.

I hope you’re listening to this in the middle of the day, not in the middle of the night, and I will talk to you next week on episode number 248. Can’t wait to see you then.

Episode 246: Simple Ways To Plan And Win Every Week – with April Beach

SweetLife Enterpreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show if you’re an entrepreneur in any phase of business who sets out to accomplish a lot, and leave every week feeling like a failure.

Summary:

You have a lot to do in a short period of time. Add the fact that much of the work you need to complete as an entrepreneur requires training to complete, feeling accomplished evades you. I get it! I’m a pro at planning more than I’m capable and in this show I am giving you the framework I needed to create for myself, so that you can win your week’s too. This is a short episode with simple but big takeaways that can work for all entrepreneurs, even those who struggle to stay focused. I also share my favorite tools for staying focused and how to push through when my mind wanders. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Hack my simple plan to do more in a week than ever before
  2. Know how to pre-plan for failure so it never happens
  3. Free up one whole day

Resources Mentioned:

 

Sand Timers on Etsy Brain.fm Flora – Green Focus App


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach Hey there. And welcome to this week’s episode. This is number 246 and I’m April beach. It’s so good to talk to you again. Forgive my cracky voice. I just got back from funnel hacking live in Florida and just had a million amazing conversations and my voices hurting just a little bit here.

So I hope it’s not too scratchy as we go through today’s episode, because this is really important. I’m so excited to talk to you about simple ways to plan. And when your week, this is going to be a shorter episode with a lot of information and is jam packed for you. And this is important because of a couple of reasons. First of all,

I know you have so many ideas and so many things going on and you want to win every single week, right? You want to go into that week. You want to feel like you just nailed it, right? When is the last time you actually had a week that it was a Friday night or even a Sunday night? And you’re like, man,

I did awesome that week. It usually actually doesn’t happen as often as we’d like or worst case. If it does happen, you’re always one of those overachievers like me, where we never actually stopped to realize we won the week. We’re just looking to the next week. And so I’m talking to those of you who really truly want to win every single week.

And you want to feel good about that and you want to stay focused. So all of the show notes and everything we’re talking about can be found at episode 246 on our website. And our website is Sweetlife po.com. And if you’re new here, it’s so good to meet you. I’m April beach, I’m a business coach and strategist, an online business architect and an offer engineer.

And I work with experts and coaches and consultants. And I have done this for over 25 years. I help you turn your ideas and your thoughts and your assets into high profit, deep impact business reality. And everything we talk about on this show are tidbits of amazing strategies that our clients get when they work with us. And this show is known for giving business coaching that other two coaches charge thousands for.

So I’m so glad to connect with you. Again, everything can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. So let’s lay the groundwork of exactly what you can expect at the end of the show. You can expect that I’m actually going to break down our hyper focused weekly worksheet with you here on the show. I’m going to take you through the steps and really break down how that worksheet is laid out.

This is a worksheet that we save for our clients. Only. We actually go through this process, our clients getting them ready and nailing every single week. And you’re talking clients that make multiple, multiple six figures up to seven figures all the way down to starting entrepreneurs that haven’t even launched. Our first product. These strategies are really important for everybody, regardless of where you are in your business.

And we’re going to go through that process and I’m going to share it with you on today’s show. You’re also going to know how to plan for failure and how to overcome that. And it’s a really simple way as soon as I explain it to you, you’re going to be like, oh yeah, totally. I got it. I’m going to break that down for you.

And then at the end of this show, a very special bonus. I’m even giving you all of the tools that I use. Now. These are physical tools. You guys like tools that you can get off Amazon to help you stay focused. And so that you can keep moving forward and sharing with you. Some of my very favorite apps as well,

so that you can totally win every single week. So again, all the show notes are found@twohundredandfortysixonsweetlifecode.com. And if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into this week show. Okay. You guys were talking about simple ways to plan and win every single week. Now, let me give you a little bit of a backstory. I am highly confident that I have undiagnosed ADHD and I probably have my whole life.

I actually love the way my brain works and I love the way that God made me, but I will say it is a bit challenging to stay focused. If you follow me on Instagram, sometimes you’ll see me. We’re all right, posts that sometimes I will literally just find myself that my brain is so full or the work I’m doing is so hard.

I will just wander around in my home. I have a home office and just start looking out different windows. And so winning the week is really, really hard for me. And so I’ve had to come up with a strategy that could kind of bring me back to earth when I start to float away in my mind during the day. And I own for those of you guys that don’t know me,

I actually own five companies. Two of them are my own and three of them are my husband’s. And so we constantly have a million things going on. The only way we can do this and be very profitable and successful in what we do is to win every single week. And so I’m sharing with you that this is a huge struggle for me. And to be really honest,

let’s keep it really real. I don’t win every single week, but this is a proven strategy that I’ve used in that we coach our clients on to come pretty damn close. And so I want to download you on this this week. I totally get the fact that you have so much work that you need to do and complete as an entrepreneur. And here is what is even harder about being an entrepreneur is that most of you are in that first five years of business.

So in order to complete much of the work you have to do, you’re probably also learning how to do that. So you’re not just having to nail the task at hand. You’re having to figure out how to nail the task at hand and why to nail the task at hand. So when we’re talking about accomplishing one thing, there usually are 20 steps to learn how to accomplish that one thing,

which by the way, this is a perfect reason why you should be in our business coaching programs, because we just give you all the steps and the SOP and the template. So you don’t have to go through that. But most people do go through those processes to do all the learning upfront before the executing. And I understand that it might be a slower process for you.

This is why people tend to start out with in the beginning of the week, all these things that you might want to do, and then you get to the end of the week and you don’t feel as accomplished as frankly, you should, because the reality is is you probably did a ton of stuff. So I’m going to show you and break down our framework that I really needed to create for myself.

And now that we use with our clients so that you can win your week too. So let’s first start with my hyper-focused weekly worksheet. Okay? So this is literally one piece of paper that our clients get every single week. And then they get to meet with Kyle Taylor in our other business dream team, expert coaches that are super killer, awesome people at keeping them focused.

And I’m going to unpack this for you here, but literally as you’re listening to this show, I just want you to imagine one piece of paper. And on this piece of paper, there are just three very simple columns. That’s it? It’s not fancy because if we make this paper fancy, then all of a sudden this paper is going to become a task to complete instead of a tool to help you complete the tasks at hand.

So the very first thing that we do in our hyper focus to week weekly worksheet in our meetups is choosing the number one most important task. Now it’s not rocket science, but the reality is, is what task you choose will affect the whole rest of your week. And so let me give you some tips on how to choose that task. And we like to talk about taking a task that by choosing that task,

it makes everything else easier or obsolete. And that really comes from the strategies, taught in a book called the one thing, which we love and recommend for our clients to read. And so it’s really figuring out what is that one thing that I need to do to make EV that makes everything else easier or obsolete. But now let’s go ahead and take it a step a little bit deeper for you.

Okay. Usually now hear me out, raise your hand. I don’t care where you are. If this is you, usually clients have some really immediate fires to put out and then they have some longer-term business blueprints that they’re building out. So we kind of have these two different categories, like the fire and the blueprint, or for most of our clients,

it’s like money. They need to bring in immediately right now, like their kid’s college payment is due or they have to pay their team or, you know, whatever else they just want to make more money. You know, like in this quarter they haven’t had their quarterly budget yet that they wanted to hit. So there’s immediate tasks and there are farther out tasks.

I don’t care which one you choose in your week, as long as it aligns with the cycle of work that you’re currently doing in your business. Okay. But you need to pick one and only one. All right. So number one, if you’re listening to this right now, just say to yourself out loud, what is the number one most important thing that I need to do or nail or complete or build or whatever the verbiage is this week in my business.

And write that down. Number two, you are going to take a second and you’re going to list out the first three to five action steps to complete that task. So the first three to five things you have to do in order to start the process of completing your number one task, and it could be making a decision on software. It could be signing in and checking my email and cleaning out my email inbox.

It doesn’t matter how small it is. As a matter of fact, the smaller, the better when we’re really getting down to the nitty-gritty of how to complete a task. But I want you to list out the top three to five action steps that complete that task. And there could certainly be more than that, but just list out the first three to five.

And then here’s really where it gets important. Step number three is determining what can get in your way or stop you from completing this task. So ask yourself what is one thing that can totally derail me? What is some reason why I might not be able to complete it? Maybe it’s you don’t know how to use the software that you have to make a decision on.

Maybe it’s that you don’t have somebody to help you learn how to run a Facebook ad. Maybe it’s that you’re afraid and you are your problem. You are your block because you’re having to put yourself out there in a way you never have before, but I want you to really figure out what is that brick wall that is going to come up this week and stand in the way of you being successful at nailing this number one task.

And after you’ve identified your brick wall, I want you to list out a plan that you are going to enact when that happens to overcome it. So you need to determine what can get in your way, and you need to make a plan before it even happens to crush that, and that is step number three. And step number four is blocking out the times or one day on your calendar to focus on this one task.

You can take all of the steps in the world, but if you don’t then plug it into your calendar and designate a time that you are going to plug this in, in actually get it done. There’s a really good chance you’ll procrastinate it. And it won’t get done because in most cases, we still even underestimate the amount of time. It takes us to complete something.

One of my very favorite special business mentors, Carrie Wilkerson says, don’t wait until Friday or Thursday, even to start working on your number one task of the week, do it on Monday, Tuesday or Wednesday, because inevitably something’s going to happen. Some kid is going to get sick, or the dog has to go to the vet or you have to catch a flight somewhere you weren’t expecting,

or a client needs you for extra help, whatever it may be that is going to happen until we want you to start it earlier in the week and the first three days of the week so that you can win your week. And so let me recap those steps for you really quickly. This is how we complete the hyper-focus weekly worksheet with our clients. Number one is choosing your most important task.

Number two is listing the first three to five action steps to complete that task. Number three is determine what can get in the way and make a plan to get over that. And number four is to block out the time in your calendar in which you will work to complete this task. Very, very simple. And after you’ve done this for your most important task,

then you have permission to go on and follow these same four steps for task number two, and for task number three in each week, but make sure you do the work for each one, starting with number one and make sure that you complete number one before you start moving on to tasks. Number two and three. All right. So now I promised you,

I would share with you some of the tools that we use behind the scenes and some of the things I’ve learned to use over the years just to keep me focused. So these are literally physical tools and some of them are apps and you’re probably going to laugh at me, but they helped me. And so I thought maybe if they helped me that they might help you as well.

The first one is actually a technique and it’s called a Pomodoro technique and Pomodoros were created by Francisco Cirillo. And I’m sure I’m butchering his name because he’s Italian and I don’t speak very great Italian in the Pomodoro technique as a time management method. And it was developed by Francisco in the 18, excuse me, in the 1980s. So it isn’t that old in the word.

Pomodoro actually comes from the word tomato named after like a tomato kitchen timer. I know sounds really silly, but this is how it goes. These are the in order to complete a Pomodoro, basically it’s a way to stay focused. And I will tell you, I have taught this to my teenage boys when they have so much homework and they have trouble staying focused.

If you do Pomodoros, and if you teach your kids Pomodoros, their homework will become so much easier. It’s a very, very simple thing. So the original way to complete a Pomodoro is in six different steps. So, number one, you decide on what you want to do, the task that you want to complete. We’ve already done that with your hyper-focused weekly worksheet,

right? So you have your task at hand. Number two, you set a timer and it could be a tomato timer in the kitchen or an egg timer I use. And this is one of the tools I was going to share with you. I use a sand timer. I have this old sand hour glass with this beautiful blue colored sand in it.

And you can buy sand timers anywhere. You can buy them from local artists in your area. I love supporting local, like glassblowers and local artists in your town, or you can buy them off Amazon, you know, and you can buy them in different time increments. So Pomodoros usually start out in 25 minute increments. If you’re teaching this to your kids,

or if you’re doing this for your first time, yourself started out at a smaller increment of time, like 25 minutes. When I first started doing Pomodoros, I only could do them for 25 minutes. Now my Pomodoros run 45 minutes, but typically set it for around 25 minutes to start. And during that 25 minutes of time, you’re going to work on that task.

Okay. And you are a hundred, a hundred percent focused on that task. Don’t pick up your phone, you know, try not to even get up to go potty. I mean like that is your time you’re in there a hundred percent. And then when that timer goes off, when that timer ends, even when your work is not done, you have to get up and take a short break.

Typical breaks on the normal Pomodoro routine are five to 10 minutes. So you’re technically taking a five to 10 minute break every 25 minutes. Okay. So you can run these. If you’re only taking a five minute break, then you can run two Tom Pomodoro cycles in a one hour period of time. If you have less than three Pomodoros, you know,

in an hour, if you’re getting things done faster than you can group together, work to complete within a Pomodoro and try to run this cycle of Pomodoros at least three times in a row. So try to do Pomodoro cycle maybe in the morning before lunchtime, or maybe another one in the afternoon, after three cycles of Pomodoros, you need to get up and you need to take a bowl 20 to 30 minute break.

So that’s how we run Pomodoros. It’s literally a time chunking and time blocking way to stay focused. But the only way it works is if you make yourself get up, when that timer goes off, regardless of whether or not your work is completed, otherwise subconsciously in your mind, if you just blow through that timer, you’re never going to be able to train your mind to stay focused because subconsciously your mind is thinking,

yeah, she’s not really sticking with the timer and I’m going to be stuck here working on this a lot longer. So that’s why we use Pomodoros. And like I said, it’s a great technique for your teenagers as well. All right. And then the other tool I want to share with you is that Sam timer, or just a regular kitchen timer,

believe me, it is so helpful to you. You can also set a timer on your phone, you know, but it’s just not quite as fun to me. I like looking at my sand timer and actually kind of makes me work faster. When I see this and stripping in there. Number three is the flora green focus app. First of all,

there are tons of focus apps. There’s tons of apps you can download on your phone in order to stay focused and complete the task at hand. One of my problems is that I automatically pick up my phone and literally like my teenage boys. Okay. I’ll just automatically find myself just picking it up out of habit. It has become a habit that I’ll pick up my phone.

So I either have to leave my phone in another room of the house, or I literally it’ll love these little apps where you can grow trees on your phone. So the flora green focus timer, I’ll put a link in the show notes. It’s a free app on apple and iOS device. And there’s other ones similar for Android. And it literally grows a garden.

And the more that you don’t touch your phone, the more your garden grows. And there are also opportunities with this app to actually plant physical trees and to do a lot of give back, which I really love companies that do that. So grab something like that. If you need that, if you’re like me and you constantly are picking up your phone,

don’t use your phone as your Pomodoro focus, timer, use something else like that and use a regular clock or set a timer on your kitchen stove. Or like we talked about use the sand timer or, or an electric timer of some kind. And then the last tool I wanted to share with you is a tool called brain FM. I have shared this tool before on the podcast.

I absolutely love brain FM brain FM is an app that you can play on your phone, or you can play on your desktop computer. And it literally plays, focus, music, relaxing music, sleep music, and the rhythms and the beats within the music are scientifically proven to give the outcome based on what you chose. So when you’re doing creative flow work,

you can literally play music that makes your brain creatively flow more based on tapping into brain FM. You can say, oh, this is a creative flow work time. Or this is a focused work time, or this is a steady time. And they have different types of sounds and rhythms and nature sounds and drums. And it’s absolutely fantastic. Everything from piano to guitar.

It’s my favorite app in the whole entire world. You guys, I will tell you, and I use it all the time. I always have brain FM on. And so those are my tools I wanted to share with you just keeping it real here, sharing with you that I do as well, struggle with staying focused. And I think honestly, every one of us does.

And so I wanted to share with you the hyper weekly worksheet, even though you can’t see it, it’s a part of the process that we roll up our sleeves with our clients every single week, and then share with you the process in order to complete that identify your most important task of the week and how to make sure that you have a plan to always overcome that.

Then nothing’s ever going to catch you by surprise. And then I want to share with you those really practical tools that we use that our team uses. And some of them are silly and funny, but you know what? They totally work. And if something works, we’re going to dive into it and we’re going to share it with you because every single one of us needs to be able to have the leg up that you deserve in your business.

It was really, really funny. I’ll I’ll end with this. I had the privilege of being able to spend about six hours last Saturday with Tony Robbins. And he was speaking live at funnel hacking live, and he was only supposed to speak for a shorter period of time, but he ended up staying with those of us in this room. And it was a really small space,

especially for a Tony Robbins event. He ended up staying with us for almost double the time he was supposed to be there and really went off course of things. He usually teaches to the masses. It was a very special opportunity. And one of the things he said, I found very, very striking. He said, entrepreneurship is the most dangerous sport around because of the fact that if you don’t make it out,

you die. And it was really like, wow, you are right. This is like do or die. Can you try it again? Can you get another life like a video game of your first, second, third, fourth business. Doesn’t make it. Yes, but it’s true. You either sink or swim and you can kind of doggy paddle through this in anything like a silly sand timer or an app on your phone that grows trees.

It has little hot pink and Flores and green birdies. If that’s going to help you, you go with it because you deserve all the support in the world because you are doing something that almost nobody does. You’re building your dreams and you’re helping other people do the same and keeping you focused and keeping you moving forward is how we get that done. So thank you so much for tuning into the show.

I love connecting with you again, apologies for my scratchy voice. Hopefully it will be back before we record the next episode you guys be awesome. And seriously, thank you for sharing the show with friends and connecting with us for so many years. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 246. All right.

Talk to you soon. Bye-bye.

Episode 245: How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business – With April Beach

 SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who believe in your offer, program and service and you’re ready to grow.

Summary:

Disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth. This concept comes from the idea that concentrating your sales and marketing on only the most qualified leads is a more successful way to increase sales. But how do you disqualify clients and find the perfect people you’re called to serve? That’s what we’re covering in today’s show. 
 
This is not a training on “ideal client avatars” or niche coaching topics – these are the questions no one is telling you to raise, but they must be asked for your happiness and financial success, and that of your clients. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know what topics to qualify and disqualify clients on
  2. Have a list of questions to workshop for yourself to get clear 
  3. Gain confidence in developing a disqualification mindset in your business 
  4. Leave this episode looking at the current clients you have and immediately being able to see who is the perfect fit and who is not.

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hi, you guys. Welcome back to the show. This is week and episode number 245 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneurial business podcast. And I’m April beach host of this show. And I’m so glad to talk to you.

We are coming up on our fifth year podcast anniversary just in a couple of months, and we just really appreciate all of you guys. Who’ve listened to the show for so many years. And those of you who share it with your friends, we do not intentionally accept any advertising on this show. I literally get pitched all the time, every single week from companies that want to advertise in the show.

And I just think that screws up with the flow of the show and our connection and how we really hang out together here. And it’s like, you and I are sitting across the table from each other or having a cup of coffee. And we intentionally work hard to give you business trainings and coaching that other coaches charge thousands for totally free here on the show.

So thank you so much for continuing to tune in. As you know, if you’ve been here before all of the show notes and everything we’re going to talk about today can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 245. So let’s get into what you can expect from hanging out with me here for a few minutes on today’s show today,

we’re talking about why disqualifying clients actually helps your business grow. And this is for those of you guys who are in particularly in phase three of business. So this is the scale up phase of your business. But I will say that I understand that I want you to apply this in the launch phase. There is just a little bit more of a psychological barrier to disqualifying clients.

When frankly, you may not have ever served any before this show really aligns with those of you who have served clients, you know, how great your offer your program your solution is. And you’re really looking to scale up your business. And one of the best ways we do that is by actually disqualifying or firing clients. So this is what you can expect.

This is a great show for those of you guys who believe in your offer, your program and your service. And you know that you know that you know, that it gives people transformational, predictable results. So if that’s you, if you know what you do is amazing, and there is no question whatsoever and how great you are at delivering people, those results then continue listening to this show if you aren’t really sure,

then that means that you should probably check out my, your signature offer masterclass. And that’s a totally separate thing to talk about. We have literally numerous podcast episodes about how to create a predictable signature program. But right now, if you are not really sure about the confidence of your program, your course, your membership community, your mastermind go to signature,

offer.com and there’s a lot of information there to get you started. So for those of you who do know that, like you’re the bomb, right? Like, you know that what you deliver is amazing, then let’s continue on to what we’re talking about today. We’re talking about the fact that disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth. And I get that this concept seems counterproductive to sales and marketing,

and here is why it isn’t when you concentrate your sales and marketing on only the most qualified in the best fit leads for your business, then your sales become more productive and the success from your program increases. And that’s a really important part of what we’re talking about today. And we’re talking about how to go about the process of disqualifying clients and finding the perfect clients that are really the right fit for what it is that you do.

So this is not let me preface this. This is not an ideal client avatar or a niche business coaching podcast training at all. We’re not talking about ICA development or client profiling. Instead, we’re talking about the questions that nobody tells you, that you really should be asking yourself about who you really want to work with, who you really want your clients to be.

And they have to be asked and they have to be asked for number one, your own happiness, number two, your client’s happiness, because when you have a great working relationship with your clients, then it’s going to be much more successful for both of you and therefore for the financial success of both your clients and your company. At the end of this episode,

you’re going to know what topics or different areas you should be looking at to qualify and disqualify clients on. You’re going to have a list of questions to workshop for yourself. These are tough questions that I’m going to give you in today’s show and just run through them in your mind, ask them in the air or when you’re on the treadmill or wherever you are,

ask yourself these questions and come up with the answers to these and get some solid clarity. Okay, you’re going to be able to gain confidence in developing your disqualification mindset in your business. And you’re going to leave this episode, looking at your current clients and you are going to have an immediate understanding of who’s really a perfect client for you and who might’ve been.

Somebody that might not have been the right fit for your program. Okay. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s shop Okay. Why does qualifying clients helps your business grow? So I totally get this may sound counterintuitive, but disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth. I know it sounds scary for those of you guys who are still working to become profitable.

This concept comes from the idea that concentrating your sales and your marketing, and only the most qualified and best fit leads is actually more suitable to help your business grow. And so the deal is, first of all, like in most things, it starts with your mindset. So let’s first start there. If you want to serve everybody, you’re going to serve nobody.

And here is why you’ve probably heard that statement a million times over again from tons of business coaching it’s because in order to deliver a top-notch result, you need to curate and customize your programs. So let me say that again, in order to deliver a top notch result for your clients, you need to properly curate and customize your program or your solution and customized solutions don’t serve everybody,

right. Or they wouldn’t be customized. So the first thing that we need to realize that is in order to be really great at what you do, you have to customize it for a certain group of people, not for everybody, because it’s not going to give them amazing results. And then from a marketing standpoint, if you don’t speak to a certain specific audience,

your message is just going to be so broad. It’s going to be lost in all the noise of, of online marketing and nobody’s going to resonate with it. So let’s get those things out of the way. First, those like negative thoughts out of the way first, if, if you might’ve been having those, and let’s actually dive into the deeper conversation that I want to have today,

which is the point of this show. So we’re talking about disqualifying clients. When you disqualify clients, you make more money because the qualified clients, you do accept. Number one, have better results with your program. And number two, they have a deeper commitment to their own success. And maybe I should have flipped those around the other way. It really should be.

They have a deeper commitment to their own success and therefore they have better results in your program. So it all starts with a process of determining who wins with your coaching and who actually doesn’t. Now don’t forget the prerequisite to applying this strategy is having a proven signature program that delivers a transformation. So everything we’re talking about today is with the understanding that you’ve already met,

the prerequisite of understanding that your solution you deliver is full-blown top notch, like the best guaranteed transformation for your people. Okay? So it all starts with determining who wins and who doesn’t with that program you’ve already created. All right. So if you’re thinking this ideal client avatar, that’s totally not what I’m talking about. What I’m asking you is this, do you know where the line in the sand is between the people who are all in for your coaching and service and those who have one foot in and one foot out and taking it a step further understanding and accepting that only the best clients that are going to get the best results are the ones who are all in on your program is what we need to talk about getting to the root of today.

And here’s why knowing where your clients are psychologically in the belief of themselves and of your services will affect the results they get with you. Okay? So how your clients are mentally entering your service business, your coaching business is totally going to affect how great of results they get, regardless of how great your program is. So even if you have this amazing program,

in course, and service and in coaching, and you have gone through all the steps that we’re talking about to lay out an industry leading signature program or offer, when it comes down to it, you still have to be able to identify who psychologically is a great fit and who is not a great fit. So here’s an example. Let me give you an example of this.

You’ve gone through all the work. You have this amazing signature offer, this amazing program or course or whatever it is that you lead that your business model within your, in your company, right? So if time or financial commitment is a barrier or a hesitation in somebody who’s having a conversation about working with you, then you have already started out by putting herself in a bad position that you’re going to have to hand hold them.

So if time or finances or even questioning their own ability to be successful is something they’re already bringing up in the beginning. And these are big red flags. Then you’re already starting out by having a struggle to get them results. So these are some of the things that may happen to you. If you’re in a relationship with a client like that, you may feel like you need to show up every single day,

proving yourself again and again, as to why, you know what the heck you’re doing, you could feel like you’re walking on eggshells. You could have to hold their hand every single day and reassure them how great they are on top of the strategy coaching that you deliver instead of being the expert and coach that they really need a hundred percent, if you are having to show up and in reconvince,

and it’s almost like reselling them on what you do every single day within the process, after they’ve already bought that is a red flag, that they are not going to get great results in your program. And frankly, it has nothing to do with you. It’s the mindset that they had coming into it. So here are six questions to ask yourself, to determine who really wins with your coaching question.

Number one is how committed do they need to be? How committed to themselves, according to your area of expertise and what you teach on, do they need to be, to be successful? Some of you guys might have a program where you’re building up their self-confidence and if that’s the case, then probably not very committed because that’s your area of expertise. If that’s your area of expertise,

then it’s going to be a different degree of commitment than somebody who may need their clients to show up fully in and vetted already. Okay? So this totally is dependent on you and what you deliver and the solution you provide within your offers and programs. So question number two is how committed do they need to be? Excuse me, question number one is how committed do they need to be?

Question number two is what time allotment do they need to have? If they’re already struggling to find the time to be successful in your program right now might not be the time for them to join your program. And you should be really honest with them and say, Hey, look at, this is exactly how many hours you need to put into this each,

each week. And when you put in this many hours, these are the results you can expect. Those are things you should be able to answer about your signature offer. Okay? And so then you can ask yourself what time allotment does somebody need to have in order to be super duper successful within the programs that I provide, number three, what ads to do do they need to show up with?

So according again to you and your expertise and what you do, what is the ideal attitude slash mindset of the person who is going to get the very best results with your coaching? Number four, what might they need to leave behind? This is a really big deal. So a lot of people, specially people who have bought a ton of courses, they’ve spent literally thousands of dollars on coaches in the past.

I hear this all the time. You guys, people come to us and they’re like, oh my gosh, you don’t have any idea. I’ve spent $50,000 on coaches. I still don’t have a result. Right? Well, that really sucks for them. And that’s really devastating. And it shows why you really need to question who you’re receiving coaching from.

Again, that’s a totally another podcast. We should do an episode on that, right? But if they’re coming to you with that background, you need to make sure that you’re having a conversation with them about why you’re different, why your solutions are proven, why your transformation and working with you is vetted again and again and again. So what might they need to leave behind in past experiences or bad experiences or good experiences,

what preconceived notions or things that don’t serve them might they need to leave behind when they come to work with you, number five, what should they be ready for? Some of you guys deliver insane results within your program. Some results are so good that people are like, oh my gosh, shit. I can’t believe this is, this is so amazing,

right? If that’s you and you know, you deliver an insane result, what do your clients really need to be ready for in working with you in what other things do they need to have in place to be ready for that, that is a really big deal. That is definitely something that we vet clients before they come in. Are your signature offer masterclass,

are they ready for this? And you ask yourself, like, are people actually really ready for what I’m about to give them for this awesome sauce that I’m bringing to the table that I’ve worked so hard to curate for them? Are they actually ready for it? What do they need to do to get ready for this? And then number six, what personality best fits with your program?

This is particularly important for those of you guys that have a community within your program. If somebody is like a total BITC H and you have this amazing community of these sweet people that are in there, I’m telling you what, like that one bad apple can spoil the bunch, right? And so your onboarding process, your onboarding pre-sale pre client acceptance process should include somebody talking and vetting and disqualifying people whose vibe and flow just might not align with the rest of your community.

And that’s totally okay, but just be honest with yourself about what personality best fits within your program. So those are six questions, hard questions that you should know the answers to in order to disqualify. And then let’s flip that around. Pre-qualify the perfect people for your program, your service, your solution, and your superpower. And so here’s some of the exercises that we can go through to look a little bit deeper to actually make this job of asking yourself these questions a little bit easier for you.

Number one, what was the mindset we’re talking about past clients now? What was the mindset of past clients and what was their personality of those that got the best results? So in looking at those people, who’ve already been clients in the past, what was their mindset and what was their personality like of the fricking winners, the, a gamer. So once it did everything and they came and they saw it and they kicked ass,

and then they took names and then they went and they were just absolutely incredible. Shouting from the mountain tops about how amazing your program is, right? What was their mindset and their personality. Also looking at your past clients, who did you love working with? Who was like the best person that when you got on those zoom calls, or when you saw this person on your calendar,

you’re like, yay. I get to talk to so-and-so today. And what was it about them that you loved working with them? Number three, who contributed to others in your course or your community? Again, for those of you guys that have a community base, who was the one that was always cheering, other people on who was the one that was always lifting other people up,

who was like that conversation starter, who is that cheerleader in? What was it about them that made it so amazing when they contributed to that space? Number four, who did the work without question like who, no matter what happened. And we all know stuff happens all the time in our life, that’s going to get in the way of some of the things that we’re working on.

Right. But who did the work? Even when all the things got in the way who pushed through, who was super tenacious, who were the fighters who refused to quit, number five, who always needed coddling, who always showed up. And they’re like, oh, well, I don’t know. I don’t know how I am today. What do you think?

Like who needed that? Is that something that you want to help with that would not fly so well in some of the programs that I have, let’s just be honest. Right? You can probably tell you, he listen to my podcasts. Like if somebody showed up every day and they were like having major excuses to why they couldn’t do it, I’d be like,

you’re right. You can’t, because that’s how you’re showing up here. You know? I mean, are you the same way as I am? Or is your program a safe place for people to show up who do need your support, who everything you do is to just to pour into them. And you’re the reminder of how amazing they are because they forgot it.

Or they never were told it in the first place, whatever it is, whatever the degree is, this with your past clients who showed up needing that level of support, number six, who complained about the work, the time or the money. All right. So who complained if at all, I hope this has never happened to you. I’ve never had this happen to me,

but I’m sure this has happened before. Like who was like, oh my gosh, you know, this takes so much time to do that probably means that you didn’t do a good job explaining the commitment in the beginning, if that is the case. So certainly look at the structure of your program and in how you are selling your program. But after you did that,

let’s just say like, you totally nailed that. Who still came complaining about the work, the time and the, or the money, number seven, who questioned your processes. Okay. If you are in a space where you deliver a system, a method or a framework, like most of our clients do, do you have people who’ve showed up, who’ve always kind of questioned what you do.

If that is the case, then take a look at their personality. And I’m guessing that that is not the perfect person for your program. Right? Right. And again, this is saying that you’ve gone through the process to develop your signature program in method and framework. That being aside, we’ve established that prerequisite, if people still showed up and they’re like,

really, are you sure? Do you really think that’s the way to do it? And they just constantly have a back and forth. I’m guessing that they are not the perfect fit for you. And then number eight, who left in told all of their friends about how amazing you are, who is like, let me give you testimonies. I can’t wait to tell the whole entire world,

man, alive 95. This was the best money I ever spent. Those people. Those are the people we want to go after. Those are the people that are perfect fit for your program. So if they are not like those past clients that were doing all this stuff like that in like making a banner, because they love you so much, then they probably need to be considered for disqualification.

So after this episode, I’m about to give you some action steps here and how to apply all this. But after this, then as you move forward and know that you deserve to be praised for the hard work and the time that you have put in strategically developing a solution for people’s problems. And let’s make sure that you are disqualifying the people that aren’t the perfect recipient of your solution.

Because when you do this, you’re going to be able to focus all of your attention, all of your relationship, building all of your actions on those perfect personality mindset, people that are the right fit for your program. And when they are successful, you are successful. Your client’s success. My client success is a direct reflection, a direct correlation to my success,

to your success. So we want to pick the people there, the, a gamers, right? We want to pick the ones that we know are coming to the table mentally and physically prepared for what it is that you are going to give them solutions in for your solution. And these are just some of the questions that when we talk about like ideal client avatar and client profiling and customer targeting,

nobody’s saying to ask these questions. And so I really felt like it was important to talk about this. We actually, I actually had this conversation a few weeks ago with a couple of women in our business, client, family, and this has really come up and I think it’s an important conversation to have. And so here is your action plan, moving forward.

Number one, look at your sales copy and see if it clearly disqualifies the wrong people. All right. So after you’ve gone through the questions above now, let’s like, put it into action, right? We’re going to say, and how do we do this? We’re going to take it from high level, the high level. Number one, look at your sales copy,

copy. Look at your marketing copy and make sure that you’re clearly disqualifying the people that are not the perfect right fit for you or your service or your program. Number two, add questions to your sales call process, to filter those who are not the perfect fit. So if you use sales calls to qualify or disqualify clients, make sure you’re adding questions in there that correlate with the answers you’re looking for to either qualify or disqualify clients,

make sure you add those into your sales process. Don’t be afraid to ask the tough questions where in this sales call, they might be like, oh wow. Yeah. You know what? That’s not me. And that is a great for you to say, you know what? I am so glad we have this conversation, because guess what, what I have is not the right fit for you.

And I don’t want you spending another XYZ amount of money on a program. That’s not going to be the right fit for you. But I have a great friend I can refer you to. That might be a better fit, right? These are important things to do in your sales call. You don’t want this person as a client. If they do not fit into what you need to deliver the great solutions within your program.

And so don’t be afraid to disqualify them right there in the triage, call in the sales call and send them somewhere else. Just bless them to go somewhere else. But you have to make sure you’re adding questions into your sales call process that can give you the answers to that. And number three, talk to your team. This is for those of you guys,

would teams that manage your marketing. Some of you, you know, have people that help you do your sales call, help you do your coaching. Talk to them about the importance of positioning, your solution and your service as the prize. It’s very, very important that once you have done the work to create a leading signature program or course or offer it is the prize.

It is the painkiller. As one of my clients calls it. It’s like the perfect language. Oh yes. It’s a painkiller. Okay. Make sure that you hold it close to your own confidence level that you worked your booty off to make sure it was a perfect painkiller for them. And that is the prize. And this quote is like one of the best quotes I’ve ever heard from Angela Lauria.

She said the prize never chases. Let me say that again. The prize never chases. And so here are some final thoughts I want to leave you with. I totally get that. The thought of disqualifying, somebody that comes your way, that isn’t the right fit. Sounds really scary, especially when you haven’t hit consistent 10 K months or 20 K months,

30 K months, especially when you’re first starting out. And that’s why at the beginning of this episode, I said, if you’re in the launch phase and you haven’t served a ton of clients yet, I get and understand that it’s important for us to go through the process, to test your solution on different clients, making sure that you are going through the testing and the traction to find the right fit after of course doing market research.

So I understand that if you’re listening to this and you’re in the launch phase, definitely take this with a grain of salt. I’m keeping it real, but never, ever, ever sell your program to somebody that you don’t believe a hundred percent, that you can give them Results. That is for sure, I don’t care what business phase you’re in. That is aligned.

We don’t ever cross. If somebody is not a good fit, do not sell to them. Right? But for the rest of you, don’t be afraid to say no to the money. Because when you say to something, you’re opening up your capacity to say yes to more things, and you don’t want to be stuck with clients that take a ton of extra time in order to get them results,

because they didn’t show up with the mindset and the prerequisites in place to get the best results with the service you provide. So the truth is you should be disqualifying clients to work with you. If they don’t come wanting the results you deliver in full force, if their personality won’t jive with others in your community, if they consistently need affirmation that you know what the heck you’re doing,

although please make sure that you know what the heck you’re doing. And if they’re only partially committed to their own transformation in one last thing, I’m going to leave you with today. Stop wondering if you’re good enough and taking clients that don’t fit the whole bill of what you deliver. When you go through the process to diligently develop your signature offer, stop taking clients that don’t fit the bill for the solution you provide,

because we know that you can lead a horse to water, but you cannot make him drink. And I really, really, really want to remind you to only work with clients that are super duper thirsty. Okay? Okay. This was episode number 245 here at the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. You can find the show notes and all of the other amazing info that our guests drop in here for free by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

And if you are struggling, if you do not know how to turn your ideas into a leading industry, leading signature course offer program mastermind coaching event or retreat, then go to signature. offer.com are your signature offer. Masterclass is reopening in October. We only opened this masterclass twice a year. That’s it only twice a year. Can you get into this masterclass?

And it is opening in October, 2021. So depending on when you listen to this, that’s an important date to note for your calendar in the event that you’re not listening to this live. You can also go to signature offer.com at any time and be notified when this masterclass opens up again. All right, you guys go grab all the show notes. Thank you so much for staying tuned to this show.

I hope you’re having an amazing day and I truly appreciate your listenership. And just being a supporter of this show, have a great way.

Episode 244: Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Follow April Beach on Instagram

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs in launch, scale and amplify phases. 

Summary:

Whiteboard sessions are a great conversion tool to convert leads to buyers. If you’re a coach, consultant or niche skill provider, you’re always looking for great ways to deepen your relationships with your followers and position yourself as the ideal solution. In this show I unpack how to use “whiteboard” sessions to further connect with your audience and increase sales. This show details the exact steps to fill and deliver your next white board session. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Have the exact process to fill and deliver whiteboard client conversion sessions
  2. Know how to plan your next whiteboard session into your launch

Resources Mentioned:

 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hey, you guys, on this week’s show, we are talking about a very cool conversion tool in order to turn those people on your list to buyers that fervently follow every single thing that you do.

This is episode number 244 at this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, which means that all of the show notes can be found by visiting our website, which is Sweetlife co.com simply clicking on the podcast. And this is episode number 244. I’m April beach, the host here at the show, and we are known for delivering proven business trainings that you can absolutely bank on that other coaches will charge you thousands for you.

Get them all here, free advertisement free on this show because this podcast is an extension of the outreach that we do as a company. So welcome to the show. If you’re a new listener, I’m super glad to be connected with you. So this is what you can expect from today’s episode. First of all, this episode is great for businesses and phases.

Two, three, or four of my business growth roadmap. If you are not sure what business phase you’re in, please visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. Or you can simply text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. And you can take a very short self-assessment, which will give you a complete breakdown of all the phases of business growth long-term and tell you exactly what you should be focusing on based on the phase of business that you are in right now.

So this show is great for people in phases, two, three, or four, and it’s really great for those of you guys who want a conversion tool that moves your leads into buyers. So if you’re a coach or a consultant or a niche skill provider, you’re always looking for great ways to position yourself as the perfect solution to those people that you’re in connection with.

And whiteboard sessions are a great way to do that. And that’s what we’re going to talk about here on today’s show. I’m going to unpack how to use whiteboard sessions to further connect with your list and increase your sales. And I’m going to detail out the eight steps that we use as a company, and literally giving you our steps of how we plan and host our whiteboard sessions.

And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know our exact process, and you’re going to be able to plan for your own whiteboard sessions to turn your leads into buyers. All right. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show First of all, let’s go ahead and answer the question. What is a whiteboard session?

So a whiteboard session is like a live webinar where you work with your leads. You help them to solve a specific problem, thereby gaining trust and positioning you as the ultimate solution that they were looking for. You can host it in zoom. You can host it in another live streaming platform, but overall it’s very similar to the webinars of bold, but you’re doing it live.

It’s not pre recorded and where you actually have people show up and you literally literally get to work their problem with them. And they are an amazing conversion tool. So let’s kind of talk about that terminology as well. A conversion tool is what we refer to as an event or a way to turn your leads into buyers. So we’re using these whiteboard sessions to turn leads that are already familiar with you into faithful buyers,

selling them into your higher ticket programs. Now you can totally use whiteboard sessions to generate new leads as well. We, in the past, as a company have primarily used them to take our existing leads or warm leads and turn them into buyers. But I would love for you to go and test these to cold leads as well, because I’m sure that would actually convert very high as well because very few people are doing this.

So I’m going to break down the eight steps to host these whiteboard sessions and really just pull back the curtains on what we do as a company and give you this step-by-step process. So let’s go ahead and get started. If you’re taking notes, this is a great episode to take notes, to save it. You can replay it later. So step number one,

I need you to choose a specific problem that you’re solving in your session. So one specific problem that you are going to address in your whiteboard session, your whiteboard session, shouldn’t be, you know, let’s go ahead and solve the whole world’s, you know, hunger issue. It should be. Let’s talk about one specific problem and let’s go ahead and whiteboard out some potential solutions to that.

And here’s a pro tip for those of you that are really interested in being strategic about your business. I want you to make your whiteboard session a piece of the problem that you solve in your signature offer. So hopefully you caught what I just said. All right. So number one, you’re going to choose one specific problem that you will solve in your whiteboard session.

And one only, number two, send out a warmup email to your list, letting them know that you’re aware of the problem that they’re facing. And you’re planning something really special for them. It’s like dangling the carrot in front of them, say, Hey, listen, you guys, I know that you’re struggling with this. I know that this has been a common issue for many of you.

And I just wanted to let you know, I’m planning something really special to help you solve that. So stay tuned because I’m going to tell you what that special thing is that you can be a part of very, very soon. So step number two is get your list excited about what is to come step. Number three is to schedule your session out.

Now here’s the deal. I recommend you pick two different times to host your whiteboard session. Usually within the same week, try to do them possibly even in the same day, one in the morning, one in the evening, depending on when your clients are most available, when your audiences is most working on the problem that you solve, picking two different sessions,

gives them an opportunity to say, Hey, yes, I want to come to session number one or session number two, but make sure that you schedule this in advance. And then step number four is to send out an invite to this session. And when you send that second email invite out, and you’re saying, okay, here it is. This is what I’m doing.

Call it a whiteboard session. I’m hosing this whiteboard session and it’s going to be amazing, but here’s the deal. There are limited seats. Now, one of the things that we are not only addressing here right now in this show, but if you’re a faithful listener to this podcast for the last four and a half years, you know that you will see these trends,

right? Where we have gone from these mass programs to boutique very personalized events and programs and signature offers. People don’t want to be part of the cattle herd. They don’t want to be in a cookie cutter thing. So when you offer something that’s limited seats, that’s really exclusive. Those are the things that people are craving right now at the recording of this in 2021.

So just be mindful, mindful for that. So sending out your invitation and say, Hey, listen, you know, there are limited seats to this FYI, make sure you RSVP for your seat right now. Step number five, get your tech set up. Ready? Okay. So when we say a whiteboard session, I actually mean a whiteboard session.

So that is usually a combination between an iPad or something that you can cast sketch on and cast it into zoom. There are so many different tools that you can do this. We use iPad. We used to use iPad with Notability, but that kind of broke a little bit. So now some of the solutions that we dive into are E cam mixed with stream yard.

There are a bunch of different technology setups that you can actually do in order to host and cast your iPad, live into a zoom. So people can see you actually sketching your whiteboard session, because this is a true web word session that isn’t like a marketing thing. You’re actually going to host a whiteboard session and schedule their results, which I’ll dive into here in just a few minutes.

Okay? So you need to get your tech set up, right? So, so far you’ve chosen the specific problem. You’ve sent out an email to your list saying, Hey, listen, I know you’re, you’re having this problem. Something special is coming. You’ve scheduled your session in your own planning. And then you sent out the email to your list saying,

Hey, it’s scheduled now get on the list right now. You’re filling those seats. Meanwhile, while the seats are filling to your event, get your technology set up, practice it and get it ready. And that was step number five. Okay. Step number six is to send reminders out to your list to make sure they fill up those seats. Because just because people sign up doesn’t mean they show up.

So we need to send reminders and DMS. You want to blanket those people. Who’ve registered, letting them know, Hey, you got one of these exclusive seats to this really special whiteboard event. Don’t lose it. Like don’t miss it. Don’t miss your seat. This is really, really special. Getting them excited about it. Reiterate how exclusive it is and send them tons of reminders.

So we’re increasing the show up rate for your event. And then step number seven is to host this event. And now I’m going to break it down into six steps under the hosting your event. So this is why if you’re taking notes as a great episode to take notes, do so as you’re hosting your event, I recommend you only do a one hour event.

Okay? So you’re going to deliver a lot of value in a very, very short period of time. So you want people wanting more. All right. So in the steps to host your event, step number one is start by sharing. Like you were philosophical genius well-rooted view on the problem that you are solving. So start by sharing here is a problem.

Here’s why I know this as a problem. Here’s why I’m so well rooted in part of the solution to this problem in load your view, load your intro with T studies of how you’ve helped other people solve the problem that you’re helping this group of people whiteboard about. So you open it up, you position yourself as I’m aware of this problem. I’m part of the solution to this problem.

This is what other clients do that we have helped them work through this problem. And Hey, now I’m here to work with you. So you’re fully positioning yourself as being completely aware, being an expert in this space and having helped other people. And that’s how I want you to open up this strategy session. This whiteboard strategy session. Step number two is then you open the floor for others to share about their issue with whatever problem it is that you’re solving in,

why they’re still facing it. What is the problem? What is the struggle? Why are they still here? Why have they not moved forward? What are the other things they’ve tried? And if you’re a marketer right now in your brain, you’re realizing that these whiteboard sessions are super gold for doing, you know, figuring out what the problem is and doing market research as well.

Okay. So later we can talk about transcribing this in turning the, the voices and the issues people are saying into marketing copy. But right now you’re hearing you’re present in this event. And I want you to open up the floor to others to explain those things. This is my problem. This is why I’m still here. This is my frustration. This is what I’ve tried and open the floor to those people that you’re helping in this whiteboard session to share sharing quickly,

because we want to keep the session moving. We want to keep it fresh. We want to, we want to keep everybody engaged and we really do want to give them a chance to talk, or at least a chance to post into the chat, depending on how many people you’ve allowed in your session. And then step number three, you’re going to use your whiteboard to visually represent solutions,

demonstrating what people have said in documenting their comments and collecting their frustrations. So part of your white boarding can be just writing down on the whiteboard, the words people are using, or a list of the problems, which by the way, you already know their problems, but writing down a list. So each time somebody says, oh, this is a problem.

Or this is a problem. You can be starting to use your whiteboard and listing out all of those problems. And so you’re going to document the things that they are saying, and you’re going to collect it all in this whiteboard session based on what they’re sharing with you. And then step number four, you’re going to summarize all of their pains collectively. And you’re going to say,

Hey, listen, I get it. This is what all you guys are saying. And so what we’ve done there in this whiteboard sessions, we’ve created community. We’ve created a comradery amongst the people who’ve been there. They don’t feel like they’re alone anymore. They’re in a place where other people are experiencing the same pain and guess what you are the king or queen that leads them out of this pain.

And so step number six is after you summarize their collective pains, then you start white boarding solutions for them. And this white boarding is going to look totally different. It’s literally a sketch drawing of how you can take people from one place to one place, or maybe in your white boarding session, based on your area of expertise. You can list out key words or common solutions.

You’re literally going to whiteboard out and draw and draft solutions based on the collective community’s problems in your event. And if you have time, depending on how many people showed up, I want you to pull a few specific people out and ask them if they would like to have their specific problem solved for them right there in detail in the white boarding session. And what that is just done is it’s helped this one person,

but it’s also shown everybody else your skills and what an amazing coach that you are and how amazing the results that you can get people in a very short period of time. And then at the end of your session, you’re going to restate why this problem exists and why it’s so hard for them to solve it on their own. And so what you’ve done in this session is you’ve positioned yourself as the perfect painkiller that leads them out of it,

letting them know you fully understand what they’re dealing with and sharing case studies of how you have to help the other clients. You’re going to open the floor for them to share their collective pains and problems. And then you’re going to use your whiteboard to visually collectively gather together all of their pains and document their comments. The next step is you’re going to use your whiteboards to start sketching out solutions collectively for the group sharing solutions and doing a short teaching.

And then if you have time based on how many people show up, you can pick one or two people from your audience and you can actually go through their very hyper niche, specific problems. And at the end of it, you’re going to restate why the problem is big, why it exists. And you’re going to position yourself as the solution for that,

which you’ve already done at this point in time. You’ve already Billy established yourself as being not only capable, but the perfect solution to their problem. And so how we end these whiteboard sessions is then you make an offer for your next step to work with you, whatever that looks like you could use a whiteboard session as a perfect conversion tool into one of your primary offers.

One of your signature offers or your whiteboard session could put them into another funnel that warms them up for maybe a live virtual event, warms them up to maybe have them apply to work for you, work with you. Maybe your program is application-based. And so it’s continuing to be exclusive to work with you. And so your alive whiteboard session could perhaps position them just to apply to work with you or even sell right into your program,

whatever works for you. And that is how we use whiteboard sessions. And it’s very, very similar actually to kind of how we use clubhouse rooms, but not as visual. And it doesn’t create such an exclusive community with your group of people that are there. Because when we do this in a whiteboard session, you can see people’s faces. You can really get to know them and you can help them on the next level,

because you’re not only having a conversation with them. You are giving them the results right there that they can visually see, and they don’t have to just envision whiteboard sessions are a powerful, powerful way to turn your list into buyers, very faithful buyers. And I’m so surprised that more people don’t do them. We’ve been doing them for years, and I’m so happy to teach you how to do it here on this show.

And inside our masterminds, who work with our clients very closely to create their whiteboard sessions and really pick out the problem they’re solving and them and how to convert their leads into buyers. And so I want you to dive into this, feel free to put this podcast on replay, share this podcast with your friends and make sure you’re taking notes. Because if you follow the steps that we’ve laid out here,

you will have the same results that we have in our whiteboard sessions. And they’re hugely successful in order to help people build a closer relationship with us, which then in turn, of course increase our sales because we’ve done a great job establishing you and establishing ourselves has the perfect solution to their problem, which in the coaching consulting space, that is always our number one goal when it comes to marketing.

So I hope you found this episode helpful. I feel like I’m losing my voice a little bit here at the end, and I’m so sorry about that. So hope my scratchy voice doesn’t get in the way of your understanding the steps, because I really would love for you to apply them in your business. And when you do tag me on Instagram, show me say,

Hey, Ebro, I am using this whiteboard session strategy. I’m so excited to do it. Here’s what’s happening tag me at April beach life because I always love seeing how you guys are applying the business trainings that we give you here on this show, and we’re here to make you more money. And of course help you build predictably, the business and life of your dreams.

Thank you so much for tuning in sharing the show with your friends and being faithful listeners here of the suite life entrepreneur and business podcast. Again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and clicking on podcast. And if you’re interested in applying to work with us and have us roll up our sleeves with you and your business and get very personalized business,

blueprinting, architecture, and engineering of your signature offers and your entire long-term business plan, you can find us@sweetlifeco.com. That is our superpower, and that is what we love doing. Have a great day. I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 243: How To Make The Most Of Your Time On Clubhouse – with April Beach and Annabelle Bayhan

Annabelle Bayhan SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Annabelle’s FREE Clubhouse Productivity Planner!

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs with limited time, who are looking to grow a warm audience with Clubhouse. 

Summary:

Clubhouse is an amazing platform to grow your audience, but most of our listeners have limited time and you want to be strategic about how you spend it. So, in this week’s episode, we dive in with Annabelle Bayhan, Clubhouse marketing expert, to clarify 3 strategic objectives that can save you time and make you money while using the app. We also pull back the curtains on our Clubhouse to Masterclass sales funnel, and tell you exactly how to increase sales with decreased time.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the 3 money making activities on Clubhouse
  2. Know the 3 secondary strategies that will lead to money down the road
  3. See our complete Clubhouse sales funnel

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hi guys. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 243, and I am April beach host here and founder of the Sweetlife company, where we help coaches, consultants and niche experts,

launch and scale your company online through proven strategies with decades of business success. And here on this podcast, it’s our extension where you can get business trainings that you can bank on. So welcome to the show today. We’re talking about how to make the most of your time on clubhouse. Now, this is a really important topic because if you’ve been listening to the show for a while,

you know that I am a big clubhouse fan. We dove in headfirst into clubhouse last December, and it’s been a really great special platform to build relationships. And for us to grow our list as a business, we’ve had multiple clubhouse episodes that we’ve recorded. You are welcome to search those on how to get started on clubhouse and how to grow your club.

But today we’re talking about kind of the elephant in the room here in that is how to make the most of your time on clubhouse, because we like many people dove in to clubhouse, but we have also taken the last three months off of the app for the summertime for us to travel in. So have the majority of leaders that we moderate rooms with,

they have taken time off the app as well, but as seasons change, everybody’s diving back into clubhouse. Now, as we go into September and October and the end of 2021. And so the real question is how do you make the most of your time? What are the activities that you can be doing in order to make money in a limited amount of time and be really strategic about what you’re doing on clubhouse in a way that really aligns with your business.

And so this particular episode is great for those of you guys who do have a limited time, and you’re looking to grow your warm audience and increase sales using clubhouse. This is also great for you guys in any phase of my lifestyle, entrepreneur business roadmap, if you are not sure what phase of business you’re in, you can go take a little quiz and I’ll tell you exactly where you are and what stage of business and give you a checklist of what you should be focusing on to grow your business to the next profit stage.

You can grab that anytime by going to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. So now let’s go ahead and talk about what you can expect from hanging out with us here today. This is the deal, you know, clubhouse is an amazing platform to grow your audience, but most of you guys have really limited time and you want to be strategic about how you spend it.

So in today’s episode, we’re going to dive in with Annabel by hand. Now she is a friend I met on clubhouse. She’s one of the many amazing business friends that I have met on the app. And she’s a clubhouse marketing expert in today’s show. We’re going to talk about three different strategic objectives that can save you time and make you money while using the app.

We’re also talking about three other secondary activities that are also great to do on the app, based on your goals, that you are setting your strategic objectives for the time that you spend there. And then at the end of this show, I actually pull back the curtain and you can totally hack our funnel. I lay out our entire clubhouse list, growth to sales funnel into our,

your signature offer masterclass, how we did it at the beginning of this year and how we’re actually about to start it again right now. So I just give you everything and I lay it out there for you, so you can see how we’re doing it because it works really well. And when things are working really well, we want you to be able to apply those strategies in your business too.

So at the end of this episode, you’re going to know the three moneymaking activities to do on clubhouse. You’re going to know the three secondary strategies. You can also do that lead to money, just not immediate money in your pocket, but there are also good activities to do on the app. And you are going to understand and know our complete clubhouse sales funnel and that’s ours at the Sweetlife life company.

So I frankly just give you all of that. I try to give you so much here on the show and just lay it all out there for you. So let’s talk about our expert and our guests. So first of all, I met Anabel on clubhouse. And when you spend any time on clubhouse, you can just tell the people you want to hang out with and the people that you want to get to know more.

And she’s really one of those people where I had my eye on her in the beginning, and she kind of shares her story about how she has risen as a clubhouse marketing expert, which that in itself is a really amazing lesson about just diving in, even when people around you think that maybe that’s not such a great idea. And so you’ll get to hear her story.

And she is the founder of clubhouse for bosses in the business and digital marketing strategists for coaches and consultants who want to increase their influence income and impact using clubhouse prior to becoming a business and marketing coach Annabel worked with digital marketing for over a decade. And you can learn more about Anabel by visiting Annabel bay han.com. And of course, we will go ahead and link to that in this show.

She also gives you her whole entire clubhouse productivity strategy workbook. And so you’re really getting a ton out of this episode. So I hope you stick with us if you want to grow your business on clubhouse and you have very limited time. Like I do, like Annabelle does, like most of our clients do. Then this is a really important episode for you to listen to in order to get all of the loaded and free things that Annabel has for you and all the notes for this show,

you can visit Sweetlife co.com simply click on the podcast button. And this is episode number 243, and Annabel will be live with us because we are just kicking off our wave makers, mastermind rooms again on Tuesday night after our three months off. We’re so excited. We had a room this evening in there and it was just so great to see so many faces and people we haven’t spoken to in a long time.

So we hope that you join us Annabel. We’ll be live in clubhouse with us in the wave makers club, talking about the same things we’re talking about here on the podcast and taking your questions. So make sure you’re following Annabel. You’re following me at April beach on clubhouse so that we can connect with you and help you grow your business further through clubhouse and other proven online business strategies.

Okay, let’s go ahead and dive by then. All right. Hi, you guys. We are so excited to be talking again today about clubhouse. Yes. My new favorite. I have my friend Annabel here with us today and I asked her to come because of the fact that she has really become the clubhouse guru when it comes to building your business on clubhouse.

And whereas I totally went Mia and took three months off of clubhouse this summer. You have people like Anabel who have been consistently on this app, understanding the ins and the outs and the strategies of business, and really being faithful to watching this app grow and helping you grow in your business. So I’m so excited to invite Annabel today, to come and talk to us about the realities of how to use clubhouse as a strategy,

but also for people like me and probably most of our listeners, how to actually fit this into your life and your time and your business. So welcome to this Wheatland entrepreneur podcast and about, we are so glad that you are here. Thank you for having me. I love your whole entire kind of transition into being the marketing guru, the business guru of clubhouse.

Can you just briefly tell everybody a little bit about your business and how you help entrepreneurs? Yeah, So I am the founder of clubhouse for buses it’s to my knowledge, one of the very first business coaching programs using clubhouse. Before that I’ve worked behind the scenes with a lot of small businesses growing their businesses. Many of them being, you know, people who work on Instagram and they teach people how to use Instagram to grow their business.

And so I was very familiar with the model and actually very interested in doing it for myself. And so when I noticed that clubhouse was something that’s up and coming there was nobody working like this in this space yet. I thought, okay, this is my chance to be a very early adopter of this app and teach people what I know about growing businesses from,

you know, Facebook and Instagram and LinkedIn. It’s all very similar model with a different basically funnel head, I guess you could say, or a marketing positioning. And so I decided to just dive right in, like right when I had 300 followers, which was really intimidating and I would go into rooms and tell people that like I was a clubhouse for a business coach and they would laugh at me,

but now seven months later that has worked really well because I positioned myself very well to be somebody that people turn to for this information. But like I said, I took like about 10 years of experience growing companies, whether corporate or small business, all in my overbroad company called scalability, marketing and coaching, where I’m now taking those principles and those concepts,

but I’m making them applicable to clubhouse specifically. Well, I love that you dive right in. Okay. So let’s just take a pause for any of our listeners. Like this is the story of growth and success. You guys, it goes with diving in, even when other people might be like, oh, what is she doing? Or who does she think she is to do that?

So like, this is a perfect example of how you only need to focus on your vision, what, you know, you’re supposed to be doing and just like race, horse blinders on and dive fully in. So take Annabel’s experience, apply it to wherever you are, if you are afraid to die fully into something, but you know, you should be and you want to be,

go for it. So that’s a whole entire separate podcast episode. I love that you share that. So let’s go ahead and roll into what we’re going to talk about today. So here are the problems that we know entrepreneurs experience on the app definitely burn out for sure, from being on clubhouse in the middle of December, I think is when I joined clubhouse and fashion,

I don’t even know how many of there, a couple of thousand, maybe at the most. And it was so exciting to be on there in the beginning. And I remember like we don’t fully in, and I loved having these amazing, authentic conversations. And I know that other entrepreneurs felt the same way because basically we had been so disconnected in the world with what has happened until we’re craving these amazing conversations.

And then I discovered something that I know you’re going to talk about today, which is the goal of professional and personal development. And I was able to literally sit at the feet of people like Myron golden and go through total masterclasses on live virtual events with people like Barry and blue. I mean, and really be in these spaces with these leaders that I otherwise never could have had an opportunity to become connected with and now become,

you know, business professional friends with. And so it was really amazing in the beginning. But then as a mom of three kids, I owned five companies. All of a sudden I really started feeling that fatigue as well, especially as we got into our summer travel season. And I know that so many other businesses feel that way. And so it’s so important what you teach and your expertise because I love clubhouse,

you know, we’re back on it. Jose, I think I was telling you that behind the scenes, before we started recording we’re back on it tonight, launching our regular weekly wave makers mastermind room, which is so much fun. And I’ve really missed everybody, but man alive, we have to have a strategy behind this in order. It’s like not a sprint,

it’s a marathon for sure. Can you talk about some of the things that you have noticed are problems with businesses in having a long-term strategy for this and maybe some of the stuff that you’ve even experienced yourself and being consistent on clubhouse. Yeah. Yeah. So I’m going to tell you three places. You could spend your time on clubhouse that won’t pay your bills.

So let’s start with that. And one big mistake that I think people make right from the beginning is not being clear about why they’re on clubhouse, what they’re there to do and who they want to be known as on clubhouse. And this is the same for every single social media network, right? If you go on social media and your purpose, there is either.

So here’s the first one, your own personal development, although it’s great. It won’t pay your bills unless you turn it into something else and give yourself that time to implement it, your own entertainment, right? You can go on Instagram all day and take talk and watch them all day long, but they won’t pay your bills. And the last one really is something that’s more of a long-term strategy,

which is networking, right? It’s great to network with people, but if you aren’t getting yourself positioned and your brand position to actually convert people when you’re just meeting people, it’s all fluffy. It’s all nice. You might be developing. You might feel really good. But you know, when we think about burnout and we think about business owners is that it feels really good until it really doesn’t.

And so you start asking yourself, like, I’ve actually invested a bunch of time on this app and all of a sudden, now I’m asking myself, why did I just do that? Like, it felt really good. I was lonely. I made some friends, but now, okay, I’m six months in and I spent 20 hours a week on an app.

What does this actually mean for me and my future? And this is the point that I think a lot of clubhouse users are coming to. And a point that I want to maybe help people avoid if they’re just getting on the app or just building a strategy around how to use it, because it’s real, right? Because here’s the thing. Unlike Facebook or Instagram or LinkedIn,

really, where you could pay someone else to actually engage for you, get in front of your audiences, you can pay ads. You can’t do that on clubhouse. It’s you in a room talking to people. Now the power of it is that when you’re in a room, talking to people, you build relationships, you build networks, you get yourself in front of prospective clients,

but if you’re not in the right place and you’re not talking and you’re not in the right positioning, and you’re not clear about what you want to do, all of that is literally just wasting time. And you have to decide, like, there are moments of my day where I want to scroll tech talk because it’s stress relief for me, it’s fun.

But if I do that every day, I’m not going to reach my goals. So I think what it comes down to is like to avoid burnout in the first place. What do you really want in your life? What is that driving force? What is that life that, that you want to design? And then as we kind of like get behind that,

we can then say, okay, how can we use clubhouse to create that? And that’s what I’m really passionate about. I think that, you know, something that a lot of people don’t know is that like underneath every single thing that I do it’s to empower women, to have more decision making power, because they’re able to create and monetize the lives that they love.

Like every single thing that I do clubhouse is just the tool that I use to do that. And so for me, that’s why I drive that message so clear. And that’s the best way to avoid burnout is know what you want, if you know what you want. It’s so easy to say, like, is the action that I’m taking right now getting me what I want.

And then when you say, no, it’s very easy to not do that thing. So yeah, that’s what I wanted to say, Writing down your quotes and like writing them down here and I’m going to go make these quotes and put them out on it. You are so, right, right. So like, understanding why are we doing this? How does this play a role in the bigger part of this?

And that’s why I’m so excited to have you here on this show. Because as you know, like that’s everything we talk about, it’s reverse engineering, the lifestyle, and then we build the business to get you there. So love everything you’re saying, of course, which is why I love you. So let’s talk about the ways that do make you money on clubhouse.

And let’s kind of hone in on those business trainings. There are three primary ways that you teach entrepreneurs and small businesses to interact into function on the clubhouse app. And so can you dive into, let’s start with number one, what is the first money-making way for somebody to spend their time on this app? So it’s awareness, right? It’s building visibility around who you are.

If nobody knows you on the app, nobody’s coming to your room is going to be very hard to then take them down the rest of the journey. This is something that I actually see a lot of people getting in the awareness trap, right? It’s very addicting. Especially for entrepreneurs. We get a little bit mixed up with like, oh, I can grow here.

And so we come to this point where we have to decide how much exposure do I actually want before I try to then take people along a journey to actually sell something to them. And that’s also a very personal question. How much time do you have, right? How much time does your business have before you need to drive leads before you need to turn this traffic into leads and what would best serve the people that you’re generating awareness around.

Right? If you kind of like go on a clubhouse stage and you’re talking about something that people could really use more information on that they could use more of a transformational journey, and you’re not providing that, just be rest assured that your competition will, right, but you might be the person to like create the awareness around it. You might be the person to let those people know that they have their problem,

right? Those are like kind of two things to really think about, like how much time do you want to spend as simply building your account, building up your social media profiles. That’s more of like an influencer strategy, but also every single brand, every single business needs people to know that they exist. And so the ways that you really do that on clubhouse is by either being on other people’s stages within other people’s clubs,

opening up rooms within other people’s clubs. And of course, opening up your own rooms with other mud squads and you know, that type of thing. And the whole goal of this awareness strategy is really to get in front of as many new people as possible and have them remember you for what you do, right? So you want to make sure that your bio set up,

you want to make sure that you have a clear introduction. You want to make sure that the rooms that you’re going to are going to make sense with, you know, the topics that you open up when you open up a room, you know, you don’t want to be like in a music room talking about how you like create business strategy, right?

It probably would not make as much sense, but people literally do this. Like you want to be in a place where you can get in front of an audience that needs what you do. So the first question you want to yourself is, you know, from my ideal client, from the person that I want to be on clubhouse, whether or not you’re becoming it,

you’re it, whatever it may be, where are the people that you could serve the most sitting on clubhouse right now and showing up in those places in the biggest way possible. That is what the awareness phase looks like is getting people to really know who you are, Where are the people that you can serve the most on clubhouse right now. And so for those people that are new and they haven’t actually dove into clubhouse,

let’s give them a hack. How would they find those people? What are some of the ways they can use the app to actually find their people that they want to be in front of? Yeah. So something really cool is happening right now on clubhouse, where they’re using interests, that’s to tie in people and clubs together. So the first thing you can do is really make sure that your interests match the interests of the ideal client that you’re trying to actually attract.

So for business owners, when they’re setting up their clubhouse profile, I recommend that you try to show up in the places where your ideal customer is going to be. And then you can add in a couple of your own interests, but for now I think that’s very smart to make sure that that’s niche down to your category. So that clubhouse begins to recommend you in the places that matter most.

So clubhouse did not use to recommend people based off their interests, but they’re about to, so I want everybody to set up their interests. The next is to make sure that you show up in keyword search for your industry. So whatever that ideal client might be searching for, make sure that you show up in your bio and your entire clubhouse bio is searchable.

So just make sure that those keywords and you can use a lot of them are all there, but also reverse engineer that right? If we know that people are putting keywords in their profiles, we can also go out and find the community leaders, the thought leaders, the people that might want in our network, the people we might want to be on stages with the people who have already collected the community.

We can go through and follow some of those people so that we start to see their rooms in our hallway. And then the last way is really using that keyword search in a similar way, but for clubs and I think clubs, they work very much like Facebook groups. There’s something that we’re all, you know, intuitively aware of, but maybe not everybody is as strategic about it.

When they first joined, they probably think, what clubs do I want to be in. But then we’re always asking the question, which club does my ICA most likely spend time in. Right? And so those are the things that you want to ask yourself, because what this is going to do is basically open up the content and the communities that are already being created with your ideal client already in it.

It’s going to accelerate your growth because when you show up in those places, when you’re like, okay, I want to become aware of there’s a room of like 100 to 200 people that are all within my ICA set. I’m going to get up. I’m going to talk, I’m going to build awareness. It becomes very easy, but all we have to do is make sure that we’re showing up in the right places.

And the best way to do that is really through keyword search to start from there though, what’s really cool about clubhouse. And I don’t know if this level of visibility is going to always be available, but if you find somebody that’s a thought leader in your space, you find somebody that maybe is serving your ICA. Maybe they’re complimentary to you. You can go through their entire network.

You can go through every club that they’re in, you can everything. So if you want to take this to the next level, the next thing to do is once you have your clubs set up, is that you go in and you see if there’s anything that you maybe didn’t think about that somebody else did. And so that’s what I would do. I think that’s the most strategic approach to really set yourself up for maximum awareness.

Oh my gosh. That is so great. Thank you so much for all of that wisdom. Quick question. Before we go into money-making strategy, number two, because I have been off clubhouse for the last two, three months traveling, and I know this is always something we were trying to figure out before, but I’m wondering if it’s become clearer. Are there now proven better times here for those of us in the USA,

when certain audiences are on the app, are we starting to see that like the business people are usually primarily using the app during the daytime? Are we starting to really have been on this app now for now a year, almost a year, it’s starting to see those flows in those trends and when are people active on that? Is that becoming clearer? Yeah.

Yeah, it is. So most people are on in the morning. And the reason why is because you have, you know, India in the evening, you have Europe, you have us up. And so maximum times are really at the top and bottom of our time zone. So I’m in Pacific standard time zone. And so was clubhouse HQ. So it tends to be like anything like 8:00 AM and before,

and like 5:00 PM. And after there seems to be a lot of people on the app. But if you think about your ideal audience, right? When are they on the app, if it’s an entrepreneur or maybe it’s during work day of your hours, the trend that I’m seeing is that, or the trend that clubhouse has talked about is that all the rooms are going to start getting bigger because fewer people are creating more people are listening.

So I would say like the number one thing to worry about would be when is the best time for you and your business, right? So that you could do this sustainably over time in the future. And this was a big question I had for myself. Okay. What is the absolute best time that I can do this for a long time? So I had to ask myself that question,

but on top of that, what you can do is you can go in the app and you can see how many members are on the app and in certain clubs at every single hour. And you can start to think, okay, you know, I have two different time slots I could do on a Tuesday. Let me see which one of those might have the maximum potential.

Let me also see who is doing regular rooms during that time slot. So I can see what if I have a competitive advantage or a competitive, you know, situation here where there might be other rooms that are pulling people in the same direction for the same topic. So I think that that is a little bit individualistic, but I will say that there’s more people on the app in a global sense in the mornings and at night,

but that might not matter for everybody. For instance, I coach people mostly in the U S right. So I’m okay with hitting people in the U S but just know that as people go back to work, you want to set yourself up for success for thinking, you know, when our people that my ideal client, if it’s somebody that’s working, when will they most likely be on a social media app?

So those are the questions we want to ask them. Great advice. Great advice. Yeah. And that’s exactly what you were saying. So we picked Tuesday night for our wave makers mastermind room, because I know I’m usually not on an airplane. I know that sounds silly, but like, when I’m traveling to see my kids, I’m on an airplane,

like Friday to Monday, right. I knew that there was no way I was going to be able to be there every single Tuesday night. So as we roll back into the fall, I never have to wonder about a Tuesday night because I’m always there. And so I love that you said that, and then I have so many questions for you clearly.

Hopefully all of our listeners are getting value out of the questions. I’m asking you as well for our Australia participants. Are we starting to see more of a growth in Australian participation on clubhouse than we were in the beginning? Yeah. Yeah, we are. And I think it had to do with like more lockdowns, more like of the pandemic actually grew the user base.

So we do think that there’s more people from Australia. I’m meeting them. They’re a little bit of an opposite time zone for me. So I don’t meet as many of them, but there’s growth in that side of the world has accelerated a lot, like all the way from India to Asia, to Australia. Europe has also grown a lot too. I think that us kind of had a strong user base before you left,

but that side of the world, I mean, they’re, they’re creating communities and the app just continues to grow. Like it really only has like a few million people on, like the growth potential is still in the billions for the app. So it’s something to really think about. It’s still a baby. Yeah. You guys are all a drop in the bucket.

So this is why we love clubhouse so much. You know what Annabel was saying? Like, she’s an early adopter, even you who would be on this app now would be an early adopter. So you are not late on the upswing on that at all. Thank you so much. And those were kind of very specific questions, but these are questions.

I knew that our clients and our audience is asking, we have a huge client base in Australia and yes, it’s like three to five o’clock, you know, in the afternoon here in mountain time. When, when, when it is there tomorrow morning. And so there are some, some different times in there. Okay. So way to build your business and be productive with your time is number one awareness and everything we just talked about can fit kind of into that awareness category.

What is the second way to make money off of clubhouse and be strategic about your time? Yeah. And these next two, I think, are things that I told you, a lot of people are getting in the awareness trap. They’re just building awareness, building awareness, building awareness. Okay. Let’s think about the human beings, right? That we’re meeting,

we’re building relationships with and the fact that we’re going to see them again, because here’s the thing on clubhouse. We’re all clustered together. Everybody that’s interested in business development. We are in a cluster. As people follow more people in your social graph, you are going to be more visible to them, especially now. So going back to what you said,

where this is a great time for people to be an early adopter. Yeah. Because discoverability just started right before the rest of us were kind of like, I hope you see me over here. You can’t really find me by my keywords unless you’re being super strategic, like that doesn’t exist anymore. So here’s the thing is that if you are setting yourself up to get to know people really well,

you’re treating them well. You’re giving them a ton of value in that awareness phase. They’re going to like and want to maybe see you again. But as we know with the business buying cycle, people don’t necessarily buy from you the first day they meet from you. So I think what a lot of people need to do is nurture their audience, right?

You are literally building a community on the app. There’s something called clubs on the app, which we talked about a little bit, but you could have your own, right? Most people when you’ve been active for like maybe a week, you could start your own club if it’s aligned with your brand even better, but that’s basically your hub, right? You can take people also,

I just want to put this out there into a community of your own. Like maybe you have a Facebook group, something like that. You can take people, but the level of readiness for them to take that journey with you is going to depend on how you treat them and how you bring them into your world. So, one thing that I think is really important to do is through that awareness phase,

bring people onto your email list so that they can see even more value from you. See if you can get them to take the journey over to Instagram and follow you there so that you have more touch points. These touch points are so important in like developing that trust. When you see somebody on video and you also heard their voice, you’re going to trust them a lot more.

And also what this also informs is that I know that there’s people who are aware of me, but they don’t know me that well. And my content, I need to nurture them on clubhouse, right? I need to create rooms that maybe are not the big, bold, like huge rooms where everybody sees me that are nurturing people in specific needs. So if somebody comes up in a clubhouse room and they ask a specific question,

I may create a room about that specific question to best serve them. If I think it’s going to, you know, serve the community that I have, because I want to nurture that community and help them with their needs and give them a chance to get to know me in a smaller setting. And so that’s really nurture is like kind of moving people along,

getting them to like you more, giving them more resources, maybe engaging with them on social media. So you can hit them in more ways. It just depends on how robust you want to be. But at the very minimum form, it’s, you know, you might meet me in a room with other people on a stage. You might like me,

you might follow me. Now, I’m going to take you into a container where you can really learn from me specifically, have an incredibly clear idea about who I am and know my style, know what I have to offer. And so that’s, the second part is nurture. I love that level of that. Okay. And then number three, the third way to make money,

grow your business and be very productive and strategic of your time on clubhouse. Yeah. This is the one that almost nobody is doing and it’s conversion. It’s converting straight from the stage. So what I’ve noticed is that people can sell anything from an SLO or a very low ticket offer all the way up to something that’s a few thousand dollars. Sometimes even more from the stage,

like you don’t even have to like get them into a fancy funnel, but if you have one, it does help support you, but it’s having those rooms and being in that position where you are literally by yourself, hosting a room. And the whole intent is to get your super fans into the room. The people who are the hottest that know you the most and basically drive them down a sales sequence.

So that content might look like why you need an email list to build your business. Then you would sell to them like some sort of email list building service at the end of the day. But having something that’s like very coherent with the room to what you are selling and selling it directly from the stage. And in order to do that in the way that has the highest integrity,

in my opinion is to really be the only moderator to not have any conflict between offers and to have that be a very small niche down room that, you know, like, okay, somebody came into a clubhouse room and awareness phase. They asked the question, I did a nurture room on that. And then, you know, maybe, you know,

as I’ve, I’ve warmed them up, I’ve gotten to know them on socials. I’m now going to sell them something that answers that. But it’s me as part of the solution. And so bringing people down those journeys on clubhouse, it’s really, really working well, but people have to do it. They have to be okay with being in a room with one or two people that said,

heck yes to them. And sometimes it’s more than that. Right. I noticed that as you grow, it’s more than that. But this conversion content is really, I think what makes or breaks businesses as being okay, sitting there and saying like, by myself, do you like me? Do you like what I have to offer? Are you interested in taking a further journey and then offering that to them in a way that’s like,

of course of service. And so those are the three types of content to grow your business on club. Yes. Okay. So I want to give an example of that. I always try to pull the curtain back on what we do in our business. So this is a strategy that we’ve used on clubhouse since the beginning of January. So let me reverse engineer for you guys,

because some of you guys have actually been in this strategy who are listening and we’re about to do it again. Okay. So I’m going to tell you here on the podcast, and then you will be able to go and watch us do this. Okay. So we have a masterclass. So we only hold a couple of times a year called your signature offer.

Right? So where we teach everybody how to build out their industry, leading signature online course and program mastermind coaching program. So that is starting here in October. We were talking about that behind the scenes, right? So before that we have a challenge like creating your industry, leading offer challenge, right? What we do is we host clubhouse rooms for three weeks leading up to that on the B primary questions that are answered in the beginning parts of our masterclass and in our challenge.

So the rooms are going to be like how to create your leading signature framework or method, you know, how to choose a signature offer. That’s right. For you, you know, is launching a course, right? For you, like all of those questions that people are asking. So that’s, I’m just telling you guys exactly how we do it,

and you’re going to see us doing it on clubhouse here over the next couple of weeks towards the end of September and October, because that’s leading that up. And that’s exactly like Annabel was showing you that when you do this, that conversions are incredible because you’ve been able to have conversations with people. They know that, you know, what the heck you’re talking about.

They know that you actually can, that you are proven to give them the results they’re looking for. They know that you understand their frustrations and their pain points, and you are like the golden arrow to the problem they’ve been probably trying to solve for a very long time. It’s full of integrity. It’s very straightforward. There’s nothing hidden or tricky about it.

It just goes from a conversation to a smaller solution to our masterclass and those people that want it, they totally want it, right. They’re like, yes, please let me do this. I need this industry leading and signature program. And so that’s just sharing with you guys and just laying it all out there on the table. Exactly how we do this strategy.

And, you know, it’s interesting that you said something in there, you know, as long as you’re okay, being on being on stage and being like the one. Totally. And I think that makes people scared. Right? I think the reason why some people get scared of that is because they aren’t so sure about their solution about their signature program and offer.

If you aren’t sure about your solution, then, then that’s a problem we need to solve for you. Right. But I think that they are not so sure about themselves. And so that’s how they, you know, don’t want to do that. Some people that are just shy, what we have seen people do in the past is bringing in. So instead of it just being them on the stage,

bringing in affiliates and friends or clients who have actually experienced their services, and I will have some people ask a question, I’m like, Hey, you know what, that’s a better question for, you know, Nicole or somebody else to answer it because Nicole has actually been in our class and we’re always very upfront. We sell the solution to this. We’re never,

you know, like cryptic about it. We’re like we actually sell the solution to this. And so I just wanted to share that with you guys, as we’re talking about it. So as Annabel’s teaching you the structure of it, that you will also have like set example of it in action as well. And it does work really well. And I’m really surprised that you say that more people aren’t necessarily doing that.

Why do you think that they aren’t doing that so much? Yeah. You know, I think it’s because they don’t have a business. Like they don’t have an offer exactly what you’re saying. They got on the app. Now they have all the awareness. They know people like them. They know they like their ideas. They probably know the problems they could solve,

but at the end of the day, they don’t really have either that confidence or that flow. So there’s some people that like, maybe they start with, okay, you can get on a discovery call with me and I’ll try to sell you coaching. Right? Like that’s probably the level that they’re at with their funnel, but they don’t really realize that you could do a masterclass or you could have like freebies to build your email list or you could have some sort of launch sequence.

And so I think that all of that’s really important, but at the end of the day, you have to know what it is that you’re offering people so that you can then back that up and say, okay, what’s the bridge between you knowing who I am in a clubhouse room, me actually make an offer to you and you actually buying the thing.

Right. So people kind of need to know that bridge. And so I think that it’s a little bit like a happy surprise for many people that they grew group, they got all this awareness. They have all these people that like the thing is about a clubhouse is if people are interested in you, they’re going to come to your inbox and say, can I work with you?

And then if you don’t have an offer, you’re like, Hmm, yes, you can. Let me just like, create something for you right now. Like, let me just, if you want that, yes, I’ll do it. But we want to get people into a model that’s really scalable, right. Something that they could do over and over again,

just like you are like, you know, that it works, you’ve measured. It, you practice it. You know, that like if people go from clubhouse room to masterclass to challenge, they’re going to buy the product. Right. And so that’s kind of the thing that we want to build for everyone is just knowing that that conversion content will always work for you on a consistent basis because your offer matters.

It’s something that people want. It’s something that they will take that journey on with you. And so that’s why I think it is, is that a lot of people are disliked kind of like in that development phase. And it’s totally okay. I think that’s awesome. Yeah. And we have actually had multiple clients come to us for that exact reason. Like,

I don’t have an offer. I don’t know what I’m selling any of my signature offer. I help them out. So totally. Yeah. A hundred percent. All right. So today we talked about how to be really wise on your time, but we actually didn’t talk about the numbers of time in itself, but I know everybody’s different. So before there’s my children calling in my emergency breakthrough listeners,

there’s another child podcast listeners calling for more lunch money, probably for our listeners that are really kind of wondering how much time do I actually need to spend on this in order for it to actually be worth my while. Is there at least a minimum time or is it a cadence or a consistency that you recommend? Yeah. Okay. So I would say that like,

you’re probably not going to move the needle a lot if you’re not willing to spend at least four hours a week on an app and at least one of those hours being you having your own room. So I think that that’s something that’s really important. It’s a time intensive app, but here’s the other side is that the sky’s the limit with influence awareness and all of that.

So to me, the real question is what do you actually want? Do you want to build something that’s more evergreen? When we talk about the offer, when we talk about the funnel, do you want to build something where it’s like, you can be on the, in the conversations? Do you enjoy them? Does clubhouse let you up? There’s a lot of people that are like,

I love it. I just love it here. I just want to spend all day every day. Okay, great. Let’s build the model that lets you do that and be profitable. So that’s kind of like the question that goes to my mind. But at the same time, there’s people like Janet who does Pinterest marketing and she’s made a ton of money on the app.

And she does her two regular rooms every single week. And in her free time outside of her business, she goes into other rooms and she creates awareness around who she is. And her funnel is really strong, but it’s a service based funnel, right? She has coaching. She has her courses. She has a little bit of a mix. She’s made a lot of money on the app to spending around four hours a week.

So the sky’s the limit for you. If you’re somebody that has the desire to build your personal brand and build your social media, and maybe you are starting at zero and you have a lot of time use the time to grow that, build that. I think it will serve you for years to come. If you’re somebody that’s super busy, you have a great funnel already in place.

Maybe you have a Facebook funnel or something that’s already existing. Maybe you want to add a little bit more. You want to actually use clubhouse to nurture your community or get in front of some new eyeballs or be an expert guests. That’s great position yourself for that. I really think that anytime, but I would say the minimum is around four a week.

And I think most people could probably figure out four hours a week. Right. And it’s worth it. We love being on the app. I love the app so much and I get to meet amazing people like you. So thank you so much for being on the show. So you actually have a guide that you’re going to give to our listeners, a clubhouse productivity guide,

just share what is in that. And then we’re going to make sure it’s in the show notes of this episode so everybody can grab it for free. Yeah. Yeah. So this guide really came out of the question of so many people say like is clubhouse worth my time. And so it’s literally your answer to that. So we go over the six different places where you can show up on clubhouse effectively.

But then we also asked the very hard question is like, what is your ideal life and week actually like, right. Take the time to actually do the worksheet in order. I tell you my winning formula, how to use awareness, how to use, you know, nurture how to use, you know, conversion. You can do all of that,

but none of that matters to me unless it fits into your ideal day and week. And that is going to help you to decide, okay, what are the hours that I might spend on clubhouse? Why is it worth it to me? Because I want you to define what you want. Right? What makes it worth your time to show up in a clubhouse room,

do the scary thing, add some value, get in front of people, build your brand, do the work around clarity. Like what is it that gets you to actually do that? And then once you do that, then it’s like, okay, so what time am I going to do it like that? That’s where I want to get you. And that’s how I designed the guy Love.

That sounds so awesome. I know our listeners really appreciate it. And I really appreciate you sharing that with everybody. This is episode number 243, and all of our listeners can find you and how to connect with you@theshownotesatsweetlifeco.com, just click on the podcast button. It’s episode number 243. But before we go, what is your clubhouse handled? So everybody can follow you.

Yeah. At Annabel, by Han. And then if you went to follow my club, it’s now the club under clubhouse mastermind. And so you could follow me in both places and that will get you right into the content that you want to see. It has mastermind. I love that. Okay. Well we’ll for sure be jumping in your rooms from your club too.

I appreciate your expertise and your time so much. Thank you so much. And Thank you for having me.

Episode 242: Should Live Virtual Events Be Part Of Your Offer? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for coaches, consultants and service based experts who want to grow their leads and increase their sales with pre-qualified buyers. 

Summary:

In this show we unpack the online business model of “live virtual events” and help you determine if they should be part of your business strategy moving forward. 
 
Live Virtual Events are not new. In fact, we’ve been hosting them for years. They’re an upgrade from sales webinars and could be a good option to increase sales in your business. But, like all business models, Live Virtual Events aren’t for everyone. In this episode we dive into the model of Live Virtual Events and how offering them can impact your business and lifestyle both positively and negatively. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the structure of a Live Virtual Event
  2. Compare Virtual Events to Sales Webinars 
  3. Know the most common way to fill your Virtual Event
  4. Have complete clarity as to if Live Virtual Events are the right strategy for you

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach I, you guys, and welcome back to the show. We have a little bit of housekeeping to do before, before we dive into tonight’s episode. And so let’s go ahead and talk about that first,

For those of you who are faithful, sweet life podcast listeners, thank you so much. You may have noticed that the previous episode, 241, which dropped on August the 23rd, 2021 was removed. And I want to talk about that. I’m always honest with you guys. And I want to just cut right to the chase. Our guest, who is an amazing human was asked by a former business partner to remove the episode out of respect for our guests.

We removed it, but in almost five years of podcasting, we have never removed an episode or we have never not produced an episode. So first and foremost, I want to apologize to you. This was an amazing episode. It was so good. I want to tell you this, that if you would like to have a recording of this episode, you can get a recording of it by emailing podcast@sweetlifeco.com.

It was an incredible episode, and I will release a recording to you. As long as you send the request to podcast@sweetlifeco.com. So there was a previous episode that was titled how to build a million dollar business with live virtual events. It is incredible. And if you still want a copy of that, I will release it to you. However, we did pull it off of iTunes,

out of respect for our guests and frankly, a very, just messy situation that I’m not going to take our time to talk about what I will say, learning moment here. This is exactly why I don’t like partnerships. You guys is because shit like this happens. So that’s all I’m going to say about it, but I want to thank you for being a listener to this show.

Again, happy to give you a copy of that episode. If you missed it, as long as you email it, the request for episode number 2, 4, 1. Now what’s happened because we had to remove the episode is that our numbers got a little messed up. So last week’s episode, you’ll hear me referring to the show notes as going to episode number 242,

but our numbers kind of squished back one. So this episode that we’re going to talk about here, and yes, I’m talking about live virtual events. It’s a really hot topic we’ve been talking about for almost a year. This episode is officially numbered, 242, but there’s a little bit of some confusion in there because last week’s episode was supposed to be 2 42.

I hope that makes sense to you. You can find all of the show notes for all of the episodes by going to sweet life co.com. Even the show notes for the previously removed episode. And there you have it. So let’s go ahead and dive into what we are going to talk about today. So we’re going to talk about today is answering the question should live virtual events,

be part of your offer. And we’re going to be talking a lot more about live virtual events here on the podcast. We’re going to continue to talk about it and clubhouse with live event, amazing leaders like Barry and blue with Sage and all these great entrepreneurial leaders who are hosting live virtual events. And so we’re going to continue to talk about this here on the show.

So this is definitely not the end of the story. This is the beginning of a, I don’t want to say a launch, an awareness of an amazing way to warm up your audience and pre-qualified buyers, and to increase your sales. So on today’s show, this is for all of you who are ready to scale your business online, and you’re considering maybe webinars in the past.

We’re going to talk about the status of webinars in this show. And we’re going to talk a little bit about how live virtual events compare to webinars as well. So it’s a great show for those of you guys who are coaches and consultants, who are all of our listeners, are your service-based expert who want to grow your leads and increase your sales with pre qualified buyers.

In this show, we unpack the online business model of live virtual events and help you determine if they should be part of your strategy moving forward. So here’s the deal live. Virtual events are not new. In fact, we’ve been doing them for years. They’re an upgrade from the previous old-school sales webinars, and they can be a good option for your business,

but like all business models, they’re totally going to affect your lifestyle and your time. And you know that I geek out on those things for you. There’s nothing worth building. If it’s not going to give you the lifestyle and the time and the profit freedom that you want. And so we’re going to dive into those discussions on two day ship. At the end of this episode,

you will understand the structure of live virtual events. You will compare live virtual events to sales webinars, and know really which one, if either could be a good fit for you. You’re going to know the most common way to fill your live virtual event. So how do we get people in there? And you’re going to have complete clarity as to whether or not this business,

this business model is for you. So again, all this show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and just click on over there. And this will be the most, most current podcast available if you’re listening to this real time. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show So the first question we have to talk about when we’re talking about live virtual events is to answer the question are webinars dead.

If you are in business and you are selling to other entrepreneurs, webinars have been not converting well for about two years. Let me give you some history on this. We first started selling our courses and programs through webinars back in 2008. I mean, that’s like ancient times. That’s like the dark ages of online business. Okay. So webinars and sales conversion,

Weber’s about it had been around for a really long time. So if you are selling to other entrepreneurs who are used to being in webinars all the time, you’re going to have a hard time filling your webinars and converting from your webinars. And so inter live virtual events. Now, if you have a business that doesn’t sell to establish entrepreneurs that are new to webinars,

webinars can work great for you. So we don’t want to totally throw the webinar baby out with the bath water, but I just want to address kind of the elephant in the room and like, Hey, what’s really happening to sales webinars. And so those are just some of the trends that we have seen. So let’s just take a moment of silence of gratitude for the sales webinars of old that have made many of us thousands and thousands and thousands of dollars.

Okay. Moment of silence over at times are changing. And here’s the deal. When is the last time that you like raise your hand to be in somebody’s webinar funnel, right? And you’re saying, Hey, you know, please let me sign up for your webinars. So I know you’re going to sell to me. And the last 10 minutes, none of us want that over the last couple years,

we have bond back, which I know when you’re thinking automation and, you know, press and go businesses where you do not want to be present webinars on demand. Evergreen webinars are great, but we’ve been moving back from so much on demand because people, especially in the last year and a half want curated experiences, they want personal attention. They want to know that you know their name or that,

you know, what they look like or that, you know, their story or, you know, people frankly just really like to talk and they like to share what’s going on with them. And so they can’t do that in a webinar setting. But when we curate an atmosphere where people can share where they can talk, where they can share a little bit about why they’re there and what their story is,

all of a sudden we have created an environment where they feel like they belong and that environment can be done in your live virtual event. And it’s magical. So let’s kind of talk about live virtual event structures. The first thing you need to about a leverage event is pretty much just like a webinar format, but instead of using a system like zoom webinar,

where it’s just you up there on the big jumbo screen talking, some of the best live virtual events are where, you know, we can see all your others, attendees faces. So we can use zoom meeting and different software for that as well. Live virtual events are most commonly held in 1, 2, 3 or five day settings. Now these are live events, okay?

These are not prerecorded. These are live events where you get to show up and you bring all your energy and you interact with people and they offer powerful strategies in a workshop setting. It’s like a duet with you setting. That’s what you do when you offer live virtual event. And what’s so cool about them is you can bring in your expert content that perfectly tees up your high end offer,

which you sell at the end, kind of to the middle, to the end of your live virtual event. And because you’re weaving in these emotional journeys and these emotional connections for your attendees throughout your live virtual event, by virtual events, commonly have breakout rooms. People commonly get personal attention, and there’s a lot of implementation that happens within that, the event itself.

So whether or not people actually choose to join your high ticket offer, I fill up virtual events, really give them an amazing transformation. And if you’ve been listening to me in any of my shows for the last four years, you know that I am an engineer of transformational offers. And so anything we do, I believe we need to deliver a transformation and live virtual events are one of the best ways to do this.

Now let me peel back the curtain a little bit more for you. Like I said, we’ve been doing leverage events for years, but the king and queen of live virtual events and how to use live virtual events are Berry and blue with Sage. Let me tell you a little bit about them and I’m going to make sure that you have their information to connect with them further here in our show notes.

So at first connected with barium blue and clubhouse, and they delivered some amazing masterclasses, totally free to hundreds of people throughout late 2020 at the beginning of 2021, when we first all got on clubhouse. And since then I’ve co moderated multiple rooms with blue. And so a lot of the strategies that we use, we have learned from them. This is very important to know like who is the king and queen and the live virtual event space.

Currently. I know there are a lot of other people that are doing it really well. And my friend Eileen Wilder does live virtual events well. And so I just want to make sure that you’re getting all the resources and that you get to tap into and learn from the same amazing leaders that we have been. So we hosting live virtual events for years before this,

in this same setting, but my IQ and how we do our live events is, has really changed. And we’ve been able to curate even better experiences because of these leaders. So I always want to give credit where credit’s due. And so I’ll make sure that you have their resources to some of these amazing leaders in our show notes. So let’s go ahead and we’re going to dive into three different areas of live virtual events.

Now that we’ve talked about the structure of what it is as a business model, before we move on, if you have not yet grab my ultimate guide to online business models and offers, I just updated it to include the details of live virtual events. It’s totally free. It’s 18 pages of the ins and outs of all the different offers and business models that you can deliver in your business.

And I tell you exactly how they will affect your time in your life and your profit. You can pause this podcast episode in just text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Or you can very simply go to the show notes@sweetlifeco.com and I’ll make sure that that is in there for you as well. Okay. We’re going to talk about live virtual event pros.

We’re going to talk about live virtual event, mid considerations, and we’re going to talk about live virtual events, lifestyle considerations, because at the end of this episode, I want you to be able to answer the question, which is the title of the episode should live virtual events, be part of your offer. And this is how I’m going to help you do that.

So let’s, first of all, talk about the pros of live virtual events, live virtual events, deliver an amazing customer experience. They build deep relationships with your leads and they build trust faster. Now, one of the things you need to know is live virtual events are not offered free. You sell tickets to your library to event or a library to event ticket.

Currently at the recording of this, we commonly host a live virtual event is $77. So it’s not a ton of money. It’s just a little bit of change. But the thing is, is it helps people know that, Hey, you know what, I’m going to show up because I paid for this and I’m expecting to get value. So at the recording of this,

the most common price for live virtual events that are used as conversion tools into higher ticket offers are anywhere from $47 to $97. We picked 77 right in the middle, just so you know. So they’re super fun and high energy. I mean, it feels so good to interact with people and get them results in people really feel like they belong. Live virtual events are answering the need of isolation for a lot of people over the last year and a half.

And they’re different from Sydney to the zoom. They’re just not sitting there in a zoom, you know, having a chat, having a boring chat engineered, just like in person events, live virtual events are engineered and laid out just like we’re there in a room together having this amazing interaction at time live local event, but we’re engineering them to be hosted virtual.

And they’re very, very special and very powerful when you do them, right? And they establish you as an expert and the solution holder for what people need. And they do that in a really fast way. And so therefore live virtual events pre-qualify and they disqualify your perfect buyers. So those are some of the pros of live virtual events. And I want to make sure we just head out the gate with those,

you know, live virtual events for us, again, pulling back the curtain for you in order to host our library to events, we lay out our 12 month calendar of when we’re going to host our live virtual events multiple times a year, and they lead into our signature offer and program. And so it’s really powerful and people love it. And we even have huge faithful fans that chose not to purchase our signature higher ticket program because they got amazing results in our live virtual events.

And they are lifetime fans. They love us because our engineer or the way we engineered our event was so powerful for them. So that’s great. Again, there are some of the pros of live virtual events. Now let’s talk about some of the mid consideration. So these are kind of like lukewarm, not hot, not cold. I just want to make sure you’re aware of these.

If you’re thinking about doing live virtual events, they are alive. They are not pre recorded, live means live. So you have to show up in. So does that align with your personality? Does it align with your schedule? Is that something that you feel like doing? Are you like somebody with high energy energy that loves to interact with people or does that not really align with,

with your personality as a leader? So those are some of the things yeah. You really need to consider when you’re considering this type of business model. Are you good live, are you good on the fly? Can you stand up in front of anybody in teachers zone of genius and how easy is it for you to flow in that? Even though obviously your content is planned,

you’re still alive. It’s like you’re speaking for an extended period of time. And so you need to be comfortable with that. And the other mid consideration before you just go and start launching a live virtual event, is that the architecture of the rest of your funnel. So your marketing in your ads, your lead magnet, and then after your live virtual event,

your call to action into your higher ticket offer has to be nailed. You don’t want to host a live virtual event all by itself until all of the, of the rooms in that house are built. Okay. So it’s, it’s something important I want to mention, because I don’t want you to leave in this show and being like, oh yeah, I’m going to get a live virtual event on the calendar.

We want to reverse engineer your success. If you’re one of my clients and you’re listening to this, you hear me say this all the time. First, we have to know what you’re selling, right? What is that signature program and an offer. And then we can go a little bit closer in, so, okay, what’s a conversion tool in this case,

we’re talking about live virtual events, and then we can go a little bit closer. We can say, okay, what’s that lead back that that’s going to lead into that leverage hold events, lead magnets can be challenges that can be quick little videos. They can be downloads. They could be quizzes or assessments. There’s a variety of lead magnets that people use to feed into leverage events.

The most common lead magnet that everybody is using is a challenge. Just so you know, everybody is using that right now. And it’s working really well. We use that ourselves. Okay. And then you reverse engineer that little bit closer, and what’s your marketing strategy. What’s your ad spend and how are you, how are you filling your live event?

So those are some mid-level considerations that I want you to think about. You know, first we talked about the pros, like the high highs, and now we’re like, okay, let’s come down to earth a little bit here. What actually has to happen in order for you to pull this off and nail it. Okay. Want to make sure that I’m uncovering all of that for you,

and you need to have a consistent flow of new leads to run this model more frequently. So if you want to run a live virtual event every single month, you need to make sure that you have an adequate ad spend or another source to generate leads, new leads into your business to continue to continue to fill your live virtual event every single month. Okay.

Now let’s talk about how this is going to affect your life. And again, this is my favorite thing to talk about because, well, you know, I just came back from taking like all summer off, going around and adventuring and traveling with my kids and, and moving my oldest son back to college and all the things that we do or all of the things we want to do.

Right? And so every time we consider a business model, we first want to consider what is this going to do to your life and your time? And so when we’re talking about live virtual events, it is definitely going to affect your lifestyle and your travel and your family time. And there are some ways around that. As an example, I host zero live virtual events in the summertime because I’m Mia,

right? And you can do that too, but just know that if this is going to be part of your flow, it is going to affect your family time positively or negatively. This could work great for you. Number two, plan your live virtual event, calendar 12 months in advance. You can always then plan your travel, your adventure, your other business operations,

your passion projects, your philanthropy, whatever it is you do, right? So you want to take a 12 month calendar and you want to plot when you are selling or opening your signature program. And then prior to that is when you want to host your live virtual events. So how often are you selling or opening your signature program? Is it available all the time?

Those are some of the things that you want to consider. Number three, many live virtual events that do well are held on the weekends Friday, Saturday, Sundays. How does that work for you? I work on weekends quite often during the months of the year that I work and I love it. My brain works really great. And then some weekends,

I don’t feel like working at all and I totally check out, you know, what does that look like for you? Are you okay with having a business model where the people that are going to attend really need to be there on a Friday, maybe even a Friday night and Saturday and a Sunday. How does that work with you and for your life?

Number four live virtual events that are currently performing well are done in one, two and three day segments. We have shorter live virtual events that do well. So our current live virtual event is a half of a day. It’s awesome. We’re in and out. You’ll love it. Other friends of ours host live virtual events that are for five days. It really depends on what your signature program is and what you’re selling and what content or what transformation needs to happen in that live virtual event.

If you’re talking to Barry in blue with Sage, they love three-day live virtual bats, but just know for you. Are you cool with doing leverage events that could be three days straight or five days straight? What does that look like to you? Number five, really think about scheduling these on repeat for your lifestyle considerations. These do need to be on repeat.

So some of our clients, and we have a lot of clients right now that we’re coaching and working with them to design and build their live virtual event. Some of our clients are doing them every six weeks hosting their live virtual event. Every six weeks, some of them are doing them quarterly. So what does that look like for you? Do you want to host a live virtual event every month or every quarter or every trimester,

whatever that works, whatever that looks like for you, just make sure that you are looking at that 12 month calendar. Like we talked about before and scheduling them on repeat, do you have to do this? No. I’m just teaching you and sharing with you, how we scale businesses for higher profit, right? You can host one live virtual event and it can be just one little Allah cart event and it’s great and you’re done,

but that becomes more like a signature offer program that changes your live virtual event from being a conversion tool into your signature offer or program. If that makes sense. And then the last thing, just being really honest, what does that really look like? As far as your energy and your personality, are you like the super high energy person and you love engaging with others or you,

somebody that is like, wow, you know what? I just don’t know if I can be at that higher energy for that period of time. Now let’s dive into that being very real. First of all, your live virtual event is going to be yours. It does not mean you have to have dance parties. Can I just say for the record?

I hope I don’t hurt anybody’s feelings. I can’t stand the dance parties. If you get me on your live virtual event and have me dance, I am not liking you very much. It’s just not who I am. So what I’m seeing is you do you in our live virtual events, I will never make you dance, but I do like have you get up and have you get a drink and have you get a snack.

And we do put on music. We do a lot of music, but I’m not going to make you dance on zoom. And I’m a dance mom. Okay. So you do you, your leverage events don’t have to be like super high energy.<inaudible> I’m not like that. You don’t have to be like that. And you can still have an amazing event.

You can have a three-day meditation prayer event. I don’t care what it is, but just make sure that whatever event you are curating, that it aligns with your energy and that you want to do it. Because if you’re building something that you don’t really want to do, number one, you’re going to suck at it. And number two, your sales are going to suffer.

And that is a fact, okay. Keeping it real here on the show. Okay. So let’s recap today. We talked about should live live virtual events, be part of your offer. We talked about what they are, the structure of live virtual events, the pros and cons of library, virtual event, and some mid tier business model considerations. We talked about the current format of the funnels that are being built into live virtual events.

We talked about, who’s doing them. We talked about how we do them. And we uncovered, you know, and pulled back the curtains about our live virtual events. And we also covered whether or not you should be selling with webinars. We actually covered a lot of ground in this episode, and I’m meant for this to be more of a foundational episode about live virtual events,

but we’re going to be talking about them a lot more. We teach our clients in our wave makers program about live virtual events and we help people engineer live virtual events. If you want to work with us to learn how to engineer and layout your live virtual events, you can find us@sweetlifecoat.com and apply to work with us at any time. We would love to meet you.

And if you just want to take this information and run with it, awesome, please do it. Take a screenshot of this episode. Let me know if you’re thinking about doing live virtual events, I would love to follow you on Instagram and cheer you on. You can find me at April beach life. All right, you guys. And again, all of the show notes for this can be found@sweetlifeco.com

to recap. This is technically going to be number two for two, but last week’s episode was also talked about being number 2 42. And that was only because we had to take down the episode the week before that lots of drama. I hate drama. Okay. So we’re cleaning this up for you and moving forward next week, moving into fall. So excited for fall here to be here on the Northern hemisphere.

And then for those of our friends, and we have so many of you guys that listen that are down and under, first of all, praying for you guys that you’re all well and thinking about you guys, and hopefully as the seasons change for you down there, that circumstances will change for you as well. Okay. You guys have an awesome week and I appreciate your listenership and I appreciate your subscribing and I appreciate Your sharing this episode,

and I will talk to you. Bye for now.

Episode 241: How To Make Money While Having Fun – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download the free Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models, Offers, and Lifestyles

Who This Episode is Great For:

As a lifelong entrepreneur, I can’t imagine a life where someone else directed my time, energy, location and schedule. So this episode like all others, is geared for people like me. The dreamers and doers. 

Summary:

Money doesn’t buy happiness. Yes, it definitely takes the edge off… but when it comes to being truly happy and fulfilled, most people consider time, family, health, love, giving, helping, and adventuring as the real prize of life. 
 
In this show, I’m breaking down the two-punch formula for a profitable business that makes you really REALLY happy. 
 
This episode is dedicated to my oldest son, who asked me this exact question over breakfast. He’s grown up in our lifestyle entrepreneur family and was the special guest in episode #84 “Inside The Life Of An Entrepreneur’s Kid”.  But now, two years later as a college student, he’s determining how he wants to design his life, and this question is at the forefront of his mind. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. What is a lifestyle entrepreneur? 
  2. How to engineer your offers so people always buy
  3. How to know if an open and close cart is really for you

Resources Mentioned:

 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach, Come back to the show. I’m April beach. And today we are talking about how to make it money while still having fun. Now, I know that sounds like a Super cheesy title, and you might think that we’re not going to talk about anything very serious here,

but that is definitely not the case in this show. I am breaking down the strategies to actually make this happen. So let me go ahead and set the stage for what we’re going to talk about today. First of all, this is episode number 242. So if you’re a new listener, all the things that we talk about, all the links that I share,

oftentimes we give away these huge free resources with episodes can be found by going to sweet life co.com clicking on podcast. And you can just search by episode number 2 42. So if you’re on the go, don’t worry about missing any of this because we will have it waiting there for you in the show notes at our website. This episode is great for those of you in any stage of business.

So our company, the Sweetlife company, we consult entrepreneurs who are launching, scaling and amplifying a coaching consulting or service focused business. And usually I’d like to break up the episodes because we give you step-by-step business strategies that other coaches charge thousands for here on the show, totally free, but not every business strategy is great for every business, right? So where you are in your business tells us what strategies you need to be using to get to the next level.

And so oftentimes I break up these episodes saying, okay, if you’re in this phase of business, listened to this show, or if you’re in this second phase and listen, honestly, this show is great for everybody. So regardless of where you are in our business growth system phase, this show is going to be really good for you because there are a lot of people that are making a lot of money that are not happy at all.

And we talk about that on the show today. So your bonus resource, which is really powerful, which you can just pause and grab right now is the ultimate guide to online business models. Okay? So this means online offers. We have a massive ultimate guide that you can grab just by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash ultimate business guide. Okay? So that’s available for you now,

again, anybody in any phase of business, this show’s going to be a great one for you as a lifestyle entrepreneurial lifelong entrepreneur. I seriously cannot imagine a life where somebody else has directed my time and my energy and my location, my schedule. So this episode, like all others were talking about how to make money while being happy, but it’s just for entrepreneurs.

You’re not going to catch a drift for me here on the show about how to do this by working for corporate America. So the summary of what we’re talking about is the fact that money doesn’t buy happiness definitely takes the edge off. I hear you for sure, but when it comes to being truly happy and fulfilled, most people will consider time. Family health love giving,

helping others, adventuring and traveling as the real prize of life. And so in this show, I’m breaking down a two punch formula for a profitable business that makes you really, really happy. And here’s a really quick behind the scenes. Okay? This show is dedicated to my son, Tim, and he’s actually been a guest here on the sweet life entrepreneur podcast.

Before years ago, I interviewed my son, Tim beach on episode number 84. You can go back and listen to it about what it’s like growing up in a lifestyle, entrepreneur and family. But this morning we’re literally packing his car right now to take him back to college. I’m about to, I’m literally recording this episode. So funny share with you guys like ultimate beside the seeds.

I’m recording this show because I didn’t get a chance to batch because we’ve been out having so much fun this week, I’m recording the show, sending it to my amazing producer. And I’m getting in the car with him and driving him all the way from Colorado to Delaware to go back to college. And so we’re sitting here and I’m thinking to myself today,

man, I really need to record this great show. And I have this other show totally lined up that I was going to record for you guys today. And he asked me the question, which is the title of this show. And so this show is dedicated to him. He said, how do I make money while still being happy, mom? And I was like,

yeah, it’s such a great question. And I will teach you. I’ll teach you how to do it. Just like I’m going to teach you guys here on this episode. So anyway, this show is dedicated to Tim. And by the time you listened to this, I will be somewhere in a car halfway across the country or on my way home from dropping him off.

So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show today. We’re going to talk about what is a lifestyle entrepreneur, how to engineer your offer so that people always buy them and how to know if an opening close cart is right for your lifestyle and your business. Ooh, that was a long intro. Thanks for hanging. All right, let’s go ahead and do it.

So, first of all, how to make money while having fun. All right. So to answer that question, it’s also asking the question, how to become a lifestyle entrepreneur. All right. So how to make money while having fun, AKA, how to be a lifestyle entrepreneur. So, first of all, we need to dive into the definition of a lifestyle entrepreneur.

If you go right now on Instagram and you search the hashtag lifestyle entrepreneur, you are going to see like Ferrari’s and like half naked girls on the beach, all the things. I’m not sure where we went wrong, but expensive cars and huge mansions do not me, lifestyle entrepreneurship. So somebody hacked that hashtag, but I’m telling you, I grew up in a true lifestyle,

entrepreneur family. I have a true lifestyle, entrepreneur family, and it’s not driven primarily by money. So what is a lifestyle entrepreneur, a lifestyle entrepreneur designs, their business in such a way that it enables the lifestyle they want to live true. Lifestyle entrepreneurs are not driven by profit. They’re driven by the ability to have the freedom lifestyle that they want.

Oftentimes this freedom lifestyle is centered around action, adventure, sports traveling, and a flexible schedule. And while some lifestyle entrepreneurs have a primary business location, other lifestyle entrepreneurs want to be location independent. So it has to do with what you’re doing with your time. There are ways to make money working for other people, working for corporate America, but a true lifestyle.

Entrepreneur is one where no one else is directing your energy, your location, your schedule. And so this lifestyle entrepreneurship is how we engineer your business to actually give you the lifestyle that you love. And so to answer this question, I am breaking this episode into two parts within this one show here where it’s just two punch right here. Okay. So first of all,

we’re going to take on the question, how to make money, and then we’re going to dive into the question about having fun. Okay. So first of all, let’s talk about how to make money. So how you make money as an entrepreneur is by designing and delivering a highly valuable offer. Okay. So I’m an offer architect. I know that sounds so geeky,

but it really all starts with your offer. You guys, right? All the marketing in the world cannot save you if you have a shitty offer and you’re not good at giving people amazing results. All right. So number one is designing this highly valuable offer and here are some steps to do that. First of all, you need to solve a big problem.

So my, one of my amazing clients, I love her so much. Her name is Lauren lavender. She says it is a painkiller, Lauren lavender calls the solution to somebody’s problem, the painkiller like the medicine. And so I love that analogy and it just helps a lot of people see it clearer. And so I love to share that that’s what Lauren calls it.

So solving a big problem. And this goes with identifying your ideal client’s struggles as it relates to your area of expertise. So really pinpointing this. And if you were new in business and you’re listening to this episode, this is also what we call your M P your minimum buyable product, okay. Or program, because we’re not, you know, making physical products here.

In most cases, most of our listeners don’t do that. So this is the first solution that you need people to understand that you deliver and that they’re willing to pay for. So how to design a highly valuable offer, you have to solve a highly important problem, or you can fulfill a highly desirable solution. Okay. Number two, design, a winning customer experience.

This is huge you guys. And especially as we’re seeing the evolution and the change in online business offers the growth in the coaching and the consulting industry over the last couple of decades, it’s really important that your offer is able to be personalized, that you have the ability to enable some sort of customization. That’s how we design highly valuable offers. It is not by doing it with cookie cutter solutions,

unless your business model is to serve the masses. Some of the ways I know you’re probably thinking April, you know, highly customized offers. It’s really hard to scale. It’s actually not. When you break down your method and your framework, then you put it into a winning customer experience where that your customers, it’s kind of like those choose your own adventure books that,

that many of us used to read as kids, your customers can pick their path and enabling things like artificial intelligence and bringing in like CX focused team members. For those of you guys that are scaling your business and allowing them to customize their journey through your signature program is how we design a winning customer experience. Even if you have 500 people in your program at once,

we can still customize it. And I just challenge you right now, just if you have an existing offer to take a look at that and make sure that you are delivering that personalized, custom winning experience for your clients as much as possible within your content. The next step to designing a highly valuable offer is to determine your position on scarcity versus availability, right?

So let me say that again, determine your personal viewpoint, your decision on scarcity versus availability. This is answering the question. Should I offer my product all the time, or should I offer my product on a limited time basis? This applies to those of you guys who are considering doing what we call an evergreen course or an evergreen program, or creating a program where somebody can join all the time,

or is this something that they can only join once, twice or three times a year? And here’s why this is important when we’re talking about how to make money. If you are new in business, this is a warning to you. If you are new in business, open and close programs are tough for businesses that have not reached consistent 10 K months in businesses that have not hit list growth.

Like you don’t have an audience yet. If you were brand new, open and closed programs are tough because it puts all your eggs in one basket and you can’t open your program and then close it. And then two weeks later say, oh yeah, I’m going to open it again because only two people joined scarcity versus availability. There is no right or wrong way,

but I do want to make sure that you’re thinking about how that affects your life. And you have to determine, are you okay with only making money a couple times a year? Or does it bring you personally more peace to have a consistent revenue generation every single month or quarterly or whatever that flow looks like to you? So psychologically as a business owner,

you need to think about how it affects you. But also if you’re a new in business, I just going to send a warning about being very careful about open and closed programs, because we need to make you known. We need to have you gain traction before you close the door and not letting any new clients in, just because some marketing person told you,

you should do it for scarcity sales, the next thing nail your minimum viable product. Okay? So this is what you’re known for. You want to determine what it is that you really want to be known for. You can be known for all the things, but it’s going to take you a long time to get there, like a lifetime. We want to pick one.

We want to pick one thing at first and I promise you, I promise you. You’re not going to get stuck at it, but you want to pick one thing at first that you want to be known for and you sell the heck out of that painkiller, you sell the heck out of that solution and you own that space. And then you can grow into other solutions and then you can grow into other ways.

Here is an example of that. I bet you had no idea that my first consulting firm, oh my gosh. How long ago is this? Now about 17 years ago that I am the creator of the parent coaching and baby planning industry. The whole industry, I wrote the scope of practice for it. This company is still run. See, and you leave.

You don’t even know that probably I have entire separate business consulting firm that coaches businesses, that market to new and expecting families. And we have clients in 17 countries. It’s crazy, right? I wasn’t stuck there. And so I’m just telling you this. I promise you when you nail one thing, right? It gives you a springboard to do all the other things.

So make sure that you’re nailing this one thing that you want to be known for. And then you can grow into other things and really sit down the last step to designing a highly valuable oper is crunching your numbers. And we call this your profit matrix. You need to understand how many people you need to sell to at your determined program price. And then you need to decide,

and these are kind of scary numbers that nobody really tells you. So I want to make sure, you know, you need to decide how many people that you need to reach in order to convert into sales at your goal number of people to sell each month, right? So if you want a 15 or 20% sales conversion, and you want to have 10 new people join your program each month,

then that means you need to reach that total number with your marketing, taking into consideration, converting it 15, 20, 30%, whatever you believe based on your conversion strategy that you can convert at. And so you have to crunch the numbers. You have to know your numbers, and once you know how many people you need to reach, then that leads us into your marketing strategy.

Do you do paid ads? Do you do affiliate partnerships or are you doing everything in sweat equity, content creation and posting, and it’s really going to give you some clarity on how you’re going to hit that highly valuable, highly profitable marker. You have to look at your numbers. And so that’s answering the first part of what we’re talking about today on how to make money.

Again, we’re talking about how to make money while still having fun. So the money part is basically you need to have an industry leading rock star signature program. That truly leads the way. And as a complete side plug, don’t forget, we have our, your signature offer masterclass that is available for you to take@anytimecruiseovertosweetlifeco.com. And you can learn more about how to be involved in the,

your signature offer masterclass. And we go through the whole process with you in developing industry, leading signature programs and offers. Okay, now let’s talk about the second part of this. How to have fun. Now I know it’s silly question, right? Like I’m not an expert in you. You’re an expert in you, but I’m an expert in the business modeling standpoint.

So let me just give you some tips on how to understand how to really have fun doing what you’re doing and it all starts with your business model. Do you remember in the beginning of this episode, when I’m like go grab the ultimate guide to business models and online offers that is going to give you all of the answers that you have been looking for on what’s going to make me happy,

what I should launch. So your business model is how you work with clients and deliver your services. So examples are one-on-one coaching group coaching hybrid coaching live courses on demand courses, hybrid courses, memberships, or re occurring revenue programs, live virtual events, local events, retreats, masterminds, accelerator programs, incubator programs, licensing programs, certification programs, train the trainer programs,

just straight business consulting. This also helps you how you want to deliver your services. Are you delivering services that are done with you done for you or consult you? And what I mean by that is how are you taking the content that you’re giving to your amazing clients? And are you giving it to them in such a way that you’re actually doing the work for them?

Are they hiring you just to do it all and say, here you go, fix it for me. Is it a hybrid way between you helping them figure it out and doing a little bit of the work with them? Or is it strictly where you were showing up and telling them how to do it? And they have to go out and do it all on their own.

And so the very first thing to determine how to have fun is that it all starts with your business model. And let me pull back the curtain some more and share why I know this. So I have run successful programs and profitable programs in every single one of these business models. And I’ll be honest. It affects my life as a mom. They affect my life.

As you know, just leading my family and wanting to travel. Each business model is going to affect your life. So your choice on whichever one of these, you want to release as your signature leading profit making program. Again, you know, courses, coaching memberships, masterminds in your ability to create your blueprint. So your suite of offers and bringing it together is totally going to affect your life.

So we want you to start at the end and inside that ultimate guide, I break down each one of these primary leading online coaching and consulting business models for you. But then what you’re going to read in there, as I tell you how it’s going to affect your life, how it affects your time, how it affects your cadence, how it affects your family,

how it affects your travel and how it affects your bottom line and your profit. So you’re not only going to get a list of those offers that you can choose from. I tell you literally how it will affect your life and you can bank on that because I have done it. And I want to make sure that what you’re building you’re really going to love.

So I want to save you years of building something that you hate, because somebody told you to, or because it looks sexy on an Instagram ad. So first go grab that guide. Secondly, determine your weekly cadence. Okay? So this is how you flow through your perfect week. What do you want to be doing? And I know this kind of sounds a little pie in the sky,

but this is very serious work. You need to determine what do you want to be doing in your perfect weekly cadence when your business is where you really want it to be? Do you work out in the morning? Do you work out in the afternoon? Do you go for walks? Do you go ride your horse, you know, to go surfing,

whatever it is, what is your family time look like? What is your time in personal development? Look like? Do you want to be reading a book or reading a book? Do you want to be helping other people? Do you want to be really active in philanthropy and giving back to your community? What does that perfect weekly cadence look like to you?

And then also ask yourself, how do I want to be working with clients? How do I want to be connecting with my team? How do I want to be connecting with my colleagues and other business partners? The answer to this is going to give you super power, vision and clarity on what business model is going to equal that for you. How many days a week will you work?

How many months, a year do you work? There are some business models that are so powerful. This is content licensing that literally, I only work one month, a year in my other consulting business because of the fact that we license out our courses and our content to others, the companies and companies line up literally the way for me to work one month,

a year to approve releases of content. You can do that. You can grade that business model. If you only want to work one month. Great, let’s build that for you. And so I want you to know that that is available to you. And you know, really another question I think is really important that isn’t discussed so much is we talked about it again a few minutes ago,

but are you comfortable only making money a couple of times a year? That can be pretty scary, you know, needing to have a six figure launch because that’s, what’s going to sustain you for the rest of the year. How does that really work for you? Does that really work for you? Is that the way that works best for your clients?

If it does awesome. We have so many clients that love their live launch business models. I’m telling you personally, I hate them personally for me, but it doesn’t mean that my clients aren’t great at them and they love them for them. That’s what’s the power of business design is deciding what works best for you and reverse engineering it to make sure it’s making you money and really diving into those questions and getting really real with yourself about how you feel about those.

And then the next question I want you to ask yourself is what actually makes you happy? Like, what do you love to do in your work? Do you love working with people? One-on-one do you love hosting zoom meetings where your whole community is coming together? Do you love delegating and empowering all this stuff to your team? And what do you love to do outside your work?

What are your sports for hobbies? What hobbies did you used to have when you’re a kid that maybe you and you haven’t done? And you’re like, man, I really wish I could take up this thing again, because I was really great at it. We want to that into your business future so that you will actually be able to do that. So to be happy in your work,

you need to design your work to make you happy to make money in your work. We need to design your offers to make you money. And that’s how we go about it. So it’s offer plus business model equals how to make money while having fun. And it’s a simple formula and it’s super surprising how many people don’t do it. And so I want to make sure that you have the power and the insight and the knowledge so that you can do it.

You know, most people think, gosh, if I make money, I’m just going to be happy and that’s not oftentimes the case. So we want you to make a ton of money and do it in such a way that you’re going to be super-duper over the top happy. And it’s going to be no big deal for you to jump in the car and drive halfway across the country.

After recording a podcast episode, after taking three weeks off work, just to go play with your kids or whatever it is that you want to do, I’m here to support you and give you the proven strategies to do that. The truth is honestly, when you’re happy in your life and your work, that’s when you make the most amount of money. And so to recap,

we talked about how to make money and be happy. We broke it into two parts. We broke out, offer architecture as the primary part of this, your offer is going to be the driver. And then your business model is the part that makes you happy. The offer strategy, the value of your offer. That’s how we get you to the profit benchmarks that you want to be at.

Your business model is how we design it within your life in a way that you’re super going to love everything that you’re doing and the ultimate guide to online offers and business models. Just go grab it. It’s totally free is going to save you years and years and years of time by seeing behind the scenes of how each one of these business models has affected our family.

And I just lay it all out there for you, for you to consider how that could affect yours as well. You can grab that by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash online business guide, or you can also get it by texting the word guide. So just one word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Again, text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0.

And of course we’ll have all this in the show notes for you as well. All right. Thank you so much for tuning in. I have a very eager college student waiting outside in the driveway with his car, packed, waiting for mom to pile in and take another road trip adventure. So with that, I will talk to you guys next week.

Be awesome. And I can’t wait to hear how you guys are using your business model and what you’ve chosen to be best for you. If we aren’t connected on Instagram yet hit me up. I’m April beach life on Instagram, and I would love to know your ultimate business model in the one you are building For high profit. All right. You guys be awesome.

Talk to you soon.

Episode 240: How To Create Your Business Affiliate Dream Team – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Discover your business growth phase by taking the SweetLife Entrepreneur Self Assessment

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and small businesses who want to collaborate with other teams and need a plan to make it happen.

Summary:

The best source of business comes from word of mouth. In this episode we’re talking about forming your business affiliate dream team. These are other companies you partner with for mutual benefits. By creating dream affiliate partners you can provide broader scale options for your clients while receiving pre-qualified clients ready to give you money. In this show we talk about how to choose the right partners for your business and how to reach out to them appropriately. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know exactly which businesses make the perfect partners for your company
  2. Know how to choose those partners
  3. Know how to approach them for the outcome you want

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life. You love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach, come back to the show. This is episode number 240, and I am April beach, your host and founder of this sweet life company. And today we’re talking about how to form your business affiliate dream team.

So this is literally a collective team of other companies that can serve your clients, and that can extend the service you already provide to your clients, but how do you pick them? How do you reach out to them? Those are all the things that we’re talking about today, because when you do a great job, creating these affiliate relationships, it can be really lucrative for your business and really better for your clients.

And if you do it right, like we’re going to talk about today. It gives you an opportunity to get in front of your perfect audience in a very creative way. So all of the details and everything we’re chatting about can be found on the sh in the show notes, if you are driving and you can’t write any of the things down we were talking about,

there is going to be one time today when I’m like, okay, get a piece of paper out. Here are the exact steps, which I really love to give you guys these exact steps of exactly how to take what we talk about in implemented immediately in your business. So if you miss those and you can’t write it down, just know you can go to sweet life,

co.com, click on the podcast and all the show notes will be there for you as well. Okay. So today’s episode is for those of you who are in the launch through scaling phases. So if you were in the launch phase, you’re still working towards consistent 10 K months, or we’re scaling you to 20, 30 K months. This is a great episode for you to listen to if you’re not really sure where you are in your business development phase,

take a pause, go over to Sweetlife code.com forward slash quiz and take the short assessment we have for you. This assessment is going to give you a customized business plan based on where you are to get you to the next level. It’s totally free until you can take that by going to our website, or by simply texting the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0.

Okay. So here’s the deal. What we’re chatting about the very best source of business comes from word of mouth. We know that. And so in this episode, we’re diving into forming these amazing business alliances. I call them business dream teams, and these are where the other companies you partner with for mutual benefits. And by creating this dream affiliate team,

you get to provide a broader scale of service options to your clients, but you also get to receive really well pre-qualified clients ready to give you money. And so we’re diving into all of that. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know exactly which businesses are going to make the perfect partners for your company. How did choose these partners and how to approach them to get the outcome that you want.

So I’m going to try to keep this short. I know that it’s been summertime, by the way. I hope you’re having an amazing summer season if you’re here in the Northern hemisphere. So all of our friends down at hope, you’re having an amazing rest time that everybody’s staying well down there. And we have some big episodes. There are some huge,

powerful episodes next week, coming up on the show, just a side note, Bart, Miller’s going to be in the show next week show is so epic. You guys, we even whiteboard. And so, yes, this is an audio podcast, but we videoed it because the strategy that Bart is giving next week on the show, we even sketch out for you.

So make sure that you tune into next week because we’re going to be dropping a video on that one as well. And so today I wanted to keep it short and sweet and to the point and give you something you can run with right away. So you’re ready. Let’s go. Okay. So number one, how to choose an ideal business affiliate. Okay.

So first of all, decide what you want to be known for. You know, it’s actually a surprise. You think that you should nail this kind of in the first couple of years of business, this is something that companies struggle with for decades, just so that you know, so if you’re still struggling with this, like what do I really want to be known for?

What do I want to offer my clients? And what’s that specific niche I want to hit. Don’t beat yourself up about it. But in this particular case, and for many marketing and business profit reasons, we really do need you to hone in on that. And so once you decide what you known for what you want to be known for, then it gives you an opportunity to look around and say,

okay, what else are my clients missing? And when you go through this process of when you’re not trying to be everything to everyone and really stay in your lane, then you can refer out and you can receive clients from other businesses in each one of your companies gets to really specialize in your clients actually receive a better specialized service. So if you haven’t kind of checked off that list,

at least when it comes to what offer or program you are creating your business affiliates for really hone in and really decide what is this that I want to be known for and what are my clients missing? What else is in this ecosystem? So if you imagine your service, the solution you provide as the center of the universe, what are the other kind of planets that are floating around that other things that your clients could need that might not even necessarily be directly related to what you do,

but the other things people are doing or thinking about around that same period of time when they’re looking for your solution. And then what I want you to do is I want you to go, and I want you to make a list, a wishlist, a partner, and see you already know, and we want to go after people, you know, first number,

obviously, any company that you have worked with before, that’s going to be the best. Okay. Somebody you’ve worked with before that, you like them, you know, a little bit further out from that close of contact. It’s somebody that you have met before. Maybe it’s, you know them from a mastermind group or they’re a friend of a friend,

and then you can get a little bit further out, you know, maybe somebody you’ve met on clubhouse or somebody that you’ve connected with on Instagram before. So we want to go after people that you have a connection with first and make a wishlist of those companies and be really specific. We don’t just want to go after like any company, don’t forget, step number one is identifying what you do.

And then what other things your clients could be missing around what you do. We don’t want to just go get a whole bunch of partners just to get them. We want to be strategic about how you’re doing this. So you already know what holes or supplements you want to fill for your clients. And so make a wishlist of people, you know, and then make a wishlist of people that you want to connect with that you might not know directly,

but that you’ve been following them. You admire them, whatever that is, but try to go after people that, you know, first. So this is really, really important. Okay? And so this is the thing I wanted you to write down. When I said there’s going to be something to write down. Here’s a checklist of what makes a good business affiliate.

Following this checklist is going to save you time from just randomly, you know, hanging out all day on the internet, wondering, you know, who you can find as a partner. And it’s also going to save your business integrity and your brain from picking the wrong people. So who makes a good business affiliate? Number one, they serve the same audience,

but they provide a different service in your client’s journey. So we need them to serve the same audience. Okay. We need them to provide a different type of service to your audience. So that’s step number one. Number two, I ideally their service is a precursor to yours. The very best affiliates that we can find for you are the ones that provide a service or connect with your clients in some capacity,

two or three steps before. They’re about to make a decision to need you next. Ideally, we want to find an affiliate partner that your service is the natural next step after what they provide, but great affiliate partners are also businesses that provide services that could be considered like cross sells that are happening at the same time. And then even for you to be able to off-board your clients to them after what you do.

So, you know, I want you to find them as precursors, but it doesn’t always work out that way. So number two is ideally their services, a precursor to yours. Number three, they offer complimentary supplements to your service. So if you have a service and let’s say you are providing the bulk of it, but somebody is missing a small piece,

like a website build out or copywriting or you know, meal delivery, you know, whatever it is that you do, if their services can compliment yours and make yours even better, they’re also a great affiliate partner. Number four, they hold similar values and abide by the same ethics. This is probably the most important thing in here. Okay. And sometimes we don’t know these things unless we’ve worked with them or unless you’ve really taken the time.

And so with each one of these steps, I want you to go through literally and treat it like a checklist of each affiliate partner you’re looking at. So do they hold similar values? Do they abide by the same ethics as much as you can possibly tell, because that will absolutely affect you. Number five, their brand messaging is comparable to yours. Now this is also equally important,

but in a different way. So let me explain this. If you are more of a passive personality and your business is, you know, just a gentle type of a brand, the personality of your brand is, you know, chill and gentle and whatever, you know, and then you refer somebody out to an affiliate, a partner that is like in Your face,

let’s go soldiers. You know what I mean? That is not going to go well in European. I’m going to be like, why did you hand me over to this person that is such a different brand personality venue? It’s not that they have to be like that. You, but you just have to make sure that their brand messaging and their brand personality is an extension or a flow from yours because your clients hired you or your clients will resonate with you.

So it can go both ways because of the fact that they resonate with your brand personality, that resonate with your brand messaging. Right? And so if you have, let’s just kind of go with that more of a gentle type of a very strategic brand personality in your business. And you’re trying to get affiliates from this kind of ball or a brand. You know,

if you will, that’s really, really add row then, and they get to you, it’s going to kind of be like, oh, wow, okay. This is, this is a bit yeah, different. And so in a perfect affiliate dream team world, I would love for your brand messaging with your company. So from other companies to other companies,

there is a hand holding process. That makes sense. So that, that personality is a bridge from one company to the next, because that’s ideally how we’re going to continue to get business through your affiliate partners. So number five is making sure their brand messaging is comparable. Number six, they have to provide exceptional customer and client care. There’s no exceptions to this at all right.

They have to be very good at what they do, how well they are at what they do is going to be a direct reflection of you, even if they’re a totally separate business. So do your homework, go through the process and make sure that they provide exceptional client care and number seven, ideally, we want them to have lifelong clients and raving fans,

because if they are a company that has had fans coming back again and again, and they had clients and they have this amazing customer journey, their clients trust them so much that as soon as that business says, Hey, you know, go to April, she’s the one to do for all this. They won’t even bad their eye. They’ll just be like,

sure, whatever you say, Hey man, you know, if you say that she’s the one to go to. I am absolutely working with her, right? That’s what we need them to say about you. And we do that by looking at their established relationship with their audience and with our customers. So let me do a quick recap of those seven steps for you.

So who makes a good business affiliate? Number one, they serve the same audience, but they provide a different service in the client journey. Number two, ideally their services, a precursor to yours, but it doesn’t have to be number three. They offer complimentary supplements to your services. Number four, they holds similar values and abide by the same ethics.

Number five, their brand and messaging is comparable to yours. Number six, they provide exceptional client care and number seven, they have lifelong clients and raving fans. Now I promise I’m going to make this quick because I know I promised this would be one of our quickie episodes, but let me give you an example of this because it was really cool. I received a phone call a few weeks ago from a woman I met on clubhouse months ago and she had remembered me and she wanted to reach out because she has a business in New York and she was interested in sending clients my way.

And so she had a lot of questions and she reached out and we’re going to, I’m going to give you the steps to reach out here in a second. And she reached out in the pretty much, the exact way that I’m talking about here on this show, but she asked me really tough questions. And in the process of asking these really tough questions,

she was covering her integrity for her clients. And it was important for her to ask me these really, really tough questions. And I really appreciated that. And so as we go into this next part on how to pitch your partners and want you to remember this, I want you to know that it’s important that you interview these affiliates when you’re reaching out to them to truly make sure they are the right fit.

And don’t be afraid to ask tough questions. Now, when we’re talking about who makes a good business affiliate notice, I did not say that they are willing to pay you or require an affiliate commission. Please note that some of the very best affiliate relationships don’t offer monetary exchanges. Now I’m a big advocate for paid affiliate programs. My friend, Laura sprinkle has been on this show before.

She’s like the go-to for creating paid affiliate programs. I love paid affiliate programs. We’ve had paid affiliate programs before. All I’m saying is they don’t have to be paid because the value of tapping into another perfect affiliates audience with personal recommendations from them and exposure to their audience can be far greater than any commission that you could receive. Okay. So just remember that I’m not necessarily saying this has to be a financial exchange.

Sometimes the exposure that you would get, you could never even pay for and the amount of money that you would receive, because it’s so good. So just a side note there. Okay. Now five steps to pitch your affiliate partners. So step number one, do your research write a personal letter, kind of like you would be pitching a podcast, but even more,

you have to do even more homework. If you’ve pitched yourself or had somebody else pitch you on podcasts before, you know, you have to do the research on that podcast and write a good pitch letter. You’re going to do that like times a hundred. Okay. So write a personal letter, explaining your intention for reaching out why you’ve selected that. Now in that letter,

you need to be very, very clear saying that I’m not sending this to everybody. I have done extensive research on your business and I am not reaching out to everyone, just you. I just want you. Okay. It’s really, really important because we need them to know that you have taken the time and that you care a lot and that you would rather walk away from this partnership and have a partnership that isn’t good.

Number two, in this letter, explain who you are and who you help in, what your superpower is. So be very clear what you do, the end result you provide, why you’re the best at that number three, explain that you would like to send clients to them. Do not write a letter saying, Hey, I would really love to talk to you about sending people my way people are going to be like,

no, I’m totally not doing that. I mean, like I would delete your email in two seconds, right? But if you send me an email, say, Hey, April, I have done the research on your company. I love what you’re doing. This is who we are. This is what we do. And I want to talk about sending clients to you.

Like the woman who called me and she called instead of sending a letter, but she sent me an Instagram direct message first, just so you guys know. And when we got on the phone, she explained it. She goes, I want to talk about sending clients to you, but I need to know much more about your company first. And I was like,

this is awesome. Thank you so much because already I know that anybody that she sends my way is going to be a rock star because of how thorough she is. Right? And so you say the same thing that she said to me, I want to talk about sending clients to you. All right. So explain to them what you do, what your superpower is.

The fact that you’ve researched them a lot, that you have looked into everything that they do. You love what they’re doing. You want to discuss sending clients to them. Number four, ask to set up a call and number five, possibly share some case studies about what you do and the details of what you do. And an example of how working together could look like in that initial letter.

And it doesn’t have to be a letter. We can do this creatively. We’ll talk about that is from a tech standpoint. And just a second with what I’m saying to you, be very intentional. Don’t make it too long, right? It can’t be a long letter. It can’t be a novel. It’s hard for people to even read emails anyway.

So a couple of ways to get around this are sending an Instagram direct message and just saying, Hey, listen, I want to let you know, I’m emailing you a quick note right now. This is what I want to talk to you about. Then looking into your company. I want to talk about sending clients to you. This is my email address,

where it’s coming from, and I’m sending it over to you right now. So giving them a heads up like on Instagram or sending them a LinkedIn direct message, letting them know that you are reaching out to them is another great way in that email that you send them. You can also send them a video. So a couple of favorite tools that I love for video emails are loom and loom has a Chrome extension.

If you use Gmail or Gmail for business, loom has a Chrome extension. That is really cool. And you can just say the things that instead of typing in the letter, but do include some sort of text type in the letter as well. Or you can do a BombBomb or any other sort of video insert into your email as well. So those are some suggestions for you.

Let me go back over those five steps to pitch partners. So that you’re really clear on, on what they are. Number one, personal letter, reaching out, saying that you’re not reaching out to everybody, just them. Number two, explain who you are, who you help and what your superpower is. Number three, explain that you’d like to discuss sending clients to them.

Obviously you’re going to get on the call and it’s going to be a mutual discussion going back and forth, but you want to discuss how you can partner and send clients to them, request to set up a call with them and possibly include a case study of an example of what this relationship could look like. Okay, you guys, that is the summary or the full show of what we’re talking about today.

You know, let me just show you. I always try to share with you a little bit behind the scenes. We have had our business dream team for about 14 years, and we have some businesses that we have partnered with for so long. They are just in our collective. We call them like our collective Sweetlife business collective, and these relationships are so good.

They’re so good for you as a business owner, because then you end up growing and building a relationship with these other companies and your company grows as the other company grows. And they’re so good for your clients. When your clients know that you’re sending them to somebody that you personally know that you’ve worked with in the past, that you trust, they have so much more peace and they hired you for the answers.

And so it’s such a great opportunity for you to expand your services, become even more of a trusted source for your clients and provide a better end result for your clients in whether or not these are set up through monetary or not. It is a really powerful way for you to grow your business and to provide it much greater resource. So wanted to share this episode with you guys.

And hopefully it’s been quicker than some of the other ones here. I know, like I said, we have some great shows coming up. So this was episode number 240. This can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com or as you know, cause you’re already listening to this. We are on every single podcast, listening app out there, including Pandora and Amazon music and just all of them.

And I just appreciate you guys so much listening to the show. Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. Thank you for clicking subscribe because sometimes apple loves to add, subscribe us in for sharing the show with your friends. If you found this show helpful, would you please just take a screenshot of this and tag me on Instagram at April beach life.

I would love to just see that you’re listening to this or see how you’re implementing this in connect with you further. You guys have an awesome day. I hope that your summer or your winter season is going exactly the way that you’d hoped. And I look forward to talking to you again next week.

Episode 237: How To Grow An Online Empire Without Paid Ads – with April Beach and Lorraine Dallmeier

Lorraine Dallmeier SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Discover your business growth phase by taking the SweetLife Entrepreneur Self Assessment

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for those of you who want to build a global brand or international empire without paid ads.

Summary:

Today we’re diving into the actual, step by step, proven process of building a global empire organically without paid ads.  Following Lorraine Dallmeier’s proven process, you’ll not only be inspired but  leave this show with tactical marketing you can apply to your brand right now, even if you have no marketing team or little marketing experience. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the 6 steps to create a global empire
  2. Be inspired that little marketing skills are required to grow a loyal following 
  3. Understand the power of brand protection and how to apply this to your company
  4. Learn about “edu-tainment” and how to apply this to your content marketing 
  5. Have yet another confirmation that consistency is king

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi guys, and welcome to episode number 237. Here it is the end of July, 2021. And we are so glad you’re listening to this episode. I’m April beach host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast and founder and CEO of the Sweetlife company,

where we help entrepreneurs did not design launch and scale a business for high profit, deep impact lifestyle. Freedom today’s episode is really special. You’re going to love this guest. She is an absolute delight, and we’re talking about the actual proven step-by-step process to build a global empire. This woman did it starting only 11 years ago with a baby on her hip.

And she is breaking down her exact formulation for how she did it without running high cost ads and really in a way that creates brand consistency and gets her message across. And so I’m very excited to introduce you to our guests today, and if you’re new to the show and you have never listened, thank you so much for tuning in. There are a lot of really amazing podcast episodes out there from different hosts all over the world.

And I’m so appreciative that you are here hanging out with us today. All of the show notes, everything we do as a company, to help you design, launch and scale your coaching business, your consulting business, or your expert focused business can be found by visiting us@sweetlifeco.com as well as all of the show notes and all of the resources we have available for you.

Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. I am pleased to introduce you to Lorraine doll Meyer. She is absolutely literally an amazing woman. You’re going to be so inspired. She’s an award-winning CEO of formula. Botanica the organic cosmetic formulation and business school, which has trained over 13,000 organic cosmetic formulators and ND beauty entrepreneurs in 177 countries. And probably counting.

She’s voted the most influential person in natural beauty for 2020 and awarded the digital achiever of the year for the cosmetics industry by Google. Lorraine is on a mission to teach the world to formulate and in this process and you’ll hear her story. It is so cool. She’s going to break down what it was like moving from an employee role, becoming a mother,

realizing that that isn’t what she wanted and that she just had so much more that she wanted to do. And you are going to leave this episode, understanding the exact six pieces. I should say, being six steps to her formulation. She breaks it down very, very clearly her six step formula on how she created this global empire. So the end of this episode,

you’re going to know her exact six step formula. And it doesn’t matter if you’re in the beauty industry or whatever you’re in. If you were in the education industry, if you were a coach or consultant, this is the level of business that you want to design. You’re going to walk away knowing her step-by-step process. And you’re also going to realize that you can absolutely do this yourself.

So I’m so excited to dive in today’s episode. It is episode number 237. So all of the show notes, everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com simply click on the podcast. And this is episode number 2, 3 7. All right, let’s dive into the show. Hi everybody. I am so excited to be joined by my new friend,

Lorraine Domar and she is going to blow your mind. You are literally going to be inspired just by the little chat that we have done behind the scenes here to get ready for what she is going to teach on this show. I am taking crazy notes and you are going to absolutely love this woman and be incredibly inspired and learn so much from this show today.

Lorraine, welcome to the show. Can you give everybody an introduction, share who you are, how you started out and all about this amazing online empire that you have built. Awesome. Well, thank you so much for having me on the show April. It is amazing to be here and I can’t wait for our chat. So I’m Lorraine. I run formula Botanica,

I’m a biologist, I’m a chartered environmentalist and I am on a mission to teach the world to formulate. So I run formula Botanica the online organic cosmetic formulation at school, and we train people how to make their own natural skincare and haircare using botanical ingredients are we are taking the world by storm with what we’re doing at the moment. It has been phenomenal.

So I’ve been running the school for almost eight years now, I guess. And I have 40 staff. We have over 13,000 students and graduates for in 177 countries. It has been a roller coaster to get here, but it wasn’t always like that. So just to give you a short intro into how I got here, I was on maternity leave with my eldest son who will be 11 in a few weeks.

And I decided that I couldn’t go back to my day job anymore. I had to work for myself. You know, I’d had really good jobs, but I just couldn’t handle working for other people anymore. And having listened to a few podcasts with you now, April, I think you probably heard that vaping quite well. So I decided I was going to start my own business.

I was watching the BBC’s apprentice. I was sitting there on the sofa with breastfeeding, my son. And I like, if these idiots can do it then, so can I, so that’s, I guess where it started. And then by the time I was on my second maternity leave, I had my business up and running. I was teaching people online already.

I had an app, I was teaching people how to make simple beauty products. And then I had the chance to actually buy formula Botanica in its infancy. It was a one woman side hustle. At that point I was, as I said, I had my second baby with me at that point. And I thought, you know what? This could be a fun hobby project.

And then I went back from attentively for a second time and my employer has ghosted me entirely. And so I thought I got to make this work and I have, so that’s like a potted history of, of how I got to where I am today. I guess You said something to me before we were recording. You know, you said I went from being this,

you know, mom would just a baby on my hip to having this global empire in 117, a hundred. How many different countries? It’s insane. Saudi 777 different countries, friends. Okay. This amazing woman has done this. And you literally have a formula just like you teach people how to formulate natural beauty products on their own. And I want to,

I want you to share your mission because I think that’s incredibly important. But what you’re going to share today on the podcast is the act is the actual formula from how you went from a mom with the baby on your hip, to where you are right now. But I think it’s important to know that for people to know, like, why are you doing this?

You shared this a bit with me before. Why are you so particularly passionate about what you teach women to do? Well, I love formulation because it takes us right back to our roots. It’s a skill that we’ve lost, that we’ve forgotten. And yet everyone used to do it. Like they’ve even found like fossilized face creams from Roman times. You know,

this is not something new and we can all formulate. Cause formulation is fun. It’s easy, it’s empowering. And most importantly, it disrupts the mainstream beauty industry because they want you to go and buy that product for 150 years. They’ve been telling us we’re not good enough. We don’t look right. We don’t smell right. We don’t conform to that.

Blonde stick thin what teeth person that they put, all the adverts, you know, everyone is different and we can embrace our own beauty by reclaiming that power from the beauty industry and learning how to formulate ourselves. And that is so incredibly empowering because then not only can you make your own skincare and haircare and even makeup whenever you need it. But it’s also more sustainable because the beauty industry produces over 120 billion units of packaging a year with that is just staggering.

And most of that ends up in landfill or in our oceans. And we can do better than that. And we can do that by learning how to formulate for ourselves and making things as in when we need them. So I am on a mission to make formulation as commonplace cookery and the entire world had to do it. And thankfully the world is very receptive,

which is a good thing. And you’re doing a very Good job out of that. You are doing an incredible job. And so thank you for sharing that. So before we even go into these six steps to how you have built this online empire in hearing these six steps, and I know our listeners after they hear them are going to be like, wow,

I can absolutely do this as well. I want to point something out. You are so incredibly deeply fiercely fire, really passionate about what you do. And you are very clearly leading with that determination. It’s not leading with the money because you want to build an empire to take over the world. You want to change and you want to create a transformation for women and disrupt an industry that needs to be disrupted.

So I say that. So as our listeners are listening to understand that underneath all of these things that we’re going to talk about in content marketing and all the other strategies to build literally a global empire with your online courses and your education business, that under that all is a fierce passion and conviction for what you are doing. And I think that in order to be successful,

frankly, anything, unless you just want to make a lot of money and not have a deeply purposeful company. I believe that that’s a requirement. And so I just wanted to point that out to our listeners and our listeners and pick up on that anyway, they’d be like, wow, this, you know, this, this woman’s amazing. She loves what she does diving into,

you know, history and, and the history of what she’s doing. So let’s transition. Let’s dive into that a little bit. How on earth did you go from this mom who was kind of working kind of decided she wanted to stay home, had an app, bought a company, having another baby to where you are now. You literally have a formula for this as well Through it.

Well, first of all, thank you for all those lovely things you said as well. I mean, yes, you have to drive forward with that passion, but then there are various steps that as you say, anyone can do. And the first one for me and I live in a brief there, so I absolutely love this is content marketing. Now I have been a prolific content creator since I was 15 years old.

And I badgered my parents to get the internet at the home. We were one of the first adopters of the internet where I lived. Everyone was like, why do you have the internet? I didn’t know what to write to, you know, web pages that really had anything of use for me. But I started blogging when I was 15. I started designing websites then,

and that has stuck with me ever since. So a big, big part of what we do is putting out content and I call it edutainment, which is a slightly pretentious word. I mean, you’re mixing education entertainment, but it says what it does on the 10 basically. And so we write, we film, we record content every single week that our followers want to read,

want to listen to what to watch. And a lot of people say to me, well, how’d, you know what to record? And I’m like, well, I go to ask people, you know, because they tell me what they want to know. And we put that content out there and that has been so, so successful for us because by showing up every week,

it doesn’t matter if it’s raining. It doesn’t matter if I’m on holiday, it doesn’t matter. What’s happening. That content will go out. And that means that our followers become dependent on it. They want to read it. And actually as a result of that, we’ve become like a publication as well as an online school. And we get more visitors now than the many of the sort of mainstream publications in,

on niche as well, which has been phenomenal. So let me ask you, where do you distribute the majority of your content? I know our listeners are thinking, okay, well, they’re doing this content. What are your, I know every industry is different. What are your primary social channels or content distribution channels that seem to have worked for you?

Well, social does well for us, but I have to say the main channel has been email. I mean, it’s all in the list, right? And I’m sure everyone listening who wants to do this understands you have to have a list. And I started off at 300 people on my list. I now have 125,000 and we clean that list rigorously.

Let me boot people off all the time because they don’t open our emails. Otherwise we’d have hundreds of thousands of peoples out there. So that is the primary outlet for content because people then sign up and they know they’re going to receive value in that inbox every single week. And that is so powerful because it means they stay subscribed as well. So you guys send a weekly email.

Yep, absolutely. We’re thinking of making that bi-weekly, but at the moment it’s just weekly and yet then the rest goes out on social. I mean our main channels, I suppose, are Instagram. I mean, we have, we’ll have over a hundred thousand followers by the time this episode ads, which quite exciting Facebook, we have big groups on Facebook.

I have a big networking group there with 47,000 people, which is free. So those are the main channels ready, but email first and foremost. And then, and I suppose that’s 0.2 and the sort of six step process. It’s all about the SEO as well. And I’ve only recently hired someone for the first time to do that before that it was just me writing lots of really good content,

then hiring people to write really good content. And I’ve always believed that rather than delving into what Google says about its algorithm, the best thing you can do is to just write top notch content, make sure it’s a good length and make sure people want to keep coming back to read it basically. So, you know, one of the things you said to me behind the scenes as well before we started recording this with that,

and I think this is important for people to know that you have been consistently hitting the pavement with content and putting content out for seven years. I think that’s important for people to know that consistency is king here. And I’d love also how you say that you clean your list. And I think people are afraid to do that as well. You know, get people that have an open things off their list.

I think people are really afraid to do that. And I love that you said that because we want a vibrant list of people that are actually absorbing your content in and really love what you’re doing rather than a dead list. And when people really don’t, who wants to talk to people that don’t want to listen. And so I love that you said that as well,

but I feel like one of the important things to say here about this number two is that you were just out there posting, like you said, rain or shine for seven years, and this is organic growth. You guys, we aren’t buying a hundred thousand people to end up on the reins list. This is, you know, fully putting amazing content out there that people want to absorb and organic growth.

And so I’m really admire how hard you’ve worked at doing this. And I just want to commend you for that. People want to shortcut all the time and it’s not that you can’t be successful fast, but there is, there’s much more to the iceberg underneath the water, for Sure. Absolutely. And I’ve seen so many people sort of try to shortcut or get bored of doing it.

And then if it doesn’t work within three months, they’re like, oh, I’ll do something else. And so many of the entrepreneurs who started in my sort of year group, I suppose, when I got going, they’re all doing something different now and I’m sitting there going why? And they’re like, I’m really impressed. You kept going with like, well,

yeah. And look at what I’ve achieved by just plugging away at the same thing every single day. It’s been amazing. Wow. Well that alone, what a great testimony and just a great amount of encouragement. That’s exactly right. And I think that we get so afraid that maybe we’re doing the right things, or we need a confirmation faster in that trust in what you’re doing and what you’re creating and the consistency in doing it.

And that’s a whole podcast episode on itself. So I just want to highlight that. And I just think that’s incredibly powerful. So we talked about step number one and then step number two is just really being out there consistently posting SEO, you know, really diving into that. And then step number three is one of my favorites in people. It’s not that I think that entrepreneurs don’t want to do that.

They all do, but I don’t necessarily believe that there are many entrepreneurs that fully understand how to fiercely protect their brand. So let’s talk about number three. Yeah. So three is all about the brand and I’ve created a really, really strong brand around formula Botanica. And when I look at a lot of digital marketers online, they often bypass that step.

They just go straight for the ads, the shortcut, as we said, and actually building that strong brand is something that has made the company so unshakeable. So rock solid that if something terrible happened to us, we would weather it because the brand is so strong. And I protect that brand fiercely. Now I have brand guidelines. I make people read them all the time.

I, I tweak little, you know, the very fact that I’m sat here in a green top, in a green office, it’s just all part of the brand. I live in every single components of it. And that comes down to how we speak the tone we use in the emails that go out, even in our help desk, the way we support people,

the way the courses are put together, the way we show up for events, just literally every little detail is overlooked by that brand. And people often come to me and they’re like, can I say this? And I’ll go, ah, let’s rejig it slightly. So it looks like that. And this is the reason behind it. So I’m constantly trying to educate my team as well so that they can live and breathe that with me because no one can take that away from you.

You know, if your ads bomb or if no one comes to a website, oh, you know, if something goes horribly wrong on social media, your brand is still there. And that is a thing of beauty that I think, yeah, as you said, lots of people overlooked, but yet it’s the core components to growing an online empire. Wow.

That is so powerful as I have my, my wave mug and my, my way of wall. And it’s what we do. If you guys are watching behind the scenes in the video, you have to, you have to go to the YouTube channel. You have to see Lorraine behind the scenes and see all her great. It’s fabulous. And this is an example of that,

but I also love what you said with the language and the tone and the brand personality. And I think that that is so incredibly important as well. So thank you for that. I love number three. So what’s number four. What was a fourth thing? What’s a fourth step in your formulation for building this online empire. So we’ve got the content,

we’ve got the distribution, we’ve got the brand step. Number four is all about the community. I mean, it’s the people who sits at the heart of all of this in some respects, they should be step number one, but I thought let’s walk through all of them in sequential order. So I’ve built a really strong community around formula Botanica as has my team as well.

And these are people who we know we love, even though we have over 13,000, almost 14,000 students and graduates. We know so many of them and we get really excited by them because we know what they’re doing. You know, I have, if you’re watching the video, I have all of that products behind me. I sit here with them on my desk.

I’m always sort of holding them up, going, oh, this is so-and-so. She lives in Denmark. And this is so and so she lives in India and you know, the community is what makes us who we are. We wouldn’t be where we are without these incredible people. And I’ve met so many of them over the years. I know their stories.

I’ve become friends with so many of them as well. And they inspire me to do better as well, because that constantly out there changing the world, being part of this global green beauty movement that we’re spearheading and yeah, they’re helping us drive it forward. So to do that, we’ve used social media. We use Facebook groups. It sounds really simple.

And it is in a way, and in the beginning I would be in that and I would show up all the time for our students and graduates. And that was how we built this incredible heartwarming community where are really kind and generous to each other. And that still exist today. Even though we have, I think about 10,000 students in our online classroom,

it’s got huge, but still that, that really heartwarming aspect is that. And if someone posts and says, I’m having a bad day, you know, there are hundreds of comments from people just going, we’ve got your back. And most of the people who go through our courses and launch a brand, go, I love the courses I learnt so much.

I can formulate, you know, you’ve empowered me, but oh my goodness, the community, I wouldn’t have got to where I am without my, my sisterhood, basically, because as you can imagine, it is mostly women who go through our courses and that has just been heartwarming and incredible to watch. So that’s step number four. And Question about that.

You have both a free, and so we’re talking, you know, we’re talking about business modeling, restructuring for our listeners. You have both a free and paid community, Correct? Yeah. We have a big free networking group as well, which has almost 50,000 members. And that’s incredible too. And now I have a community manager, but not just that.

We also have a whole team of people around the world, our student mentors, so that we have 24 7 coverage in our groups because otherwise, you know, it is like a groups. You have to be there to sort of support, to help, to moderate sometimes as well. And so I have staff members literally around the globe so that there is always someone on and they have a rotor.

So they’re going through the groups all the time. And that has been incredible actually. So the community is everything to her. I love that. I love that. And Facebook makes sense, you know, the global community Facebook makes sense. And, you know, it’s when we talk about structure and tech and enabling what you want to do and the experience that that does,

you know, it’s really completely make sense. Okay. So then number five, what is the fifth step to your formulation to building a global empire? So stage, you’ve got your ducks in a row and now you have to start really putting yourself out into the world. And so step number five is very much that I’ve made sure that we are viewed as thought leaders in our space.

And again, that can sound like quite a pretentious word. You know, what is a thought leader? It’s someone who has an opinion, the other people readily take on board and follow. And we have that. Now people follow us because we teach them all viewpoints and all sorts of what natural means and what green beauty means and what clean beauty means.

You know, we’ve redefined a lot of these concepts and we’re regularly tagged in social media posts where people go, I listened to this podcast from formula Botanica and I now understand that the three or four shades of natural, and I’m going to show you have made my own little infographic. And I finally understand these concepts and I’ve learned them from these guides. And we do that thought leadership through,

I have my own podcast as well called green beauty conversations, which is all about green and sustainable beauty and the science and indie beauty. But I’m also constantly on summits, on podcasts, giving interviews, speaking to journalists, you know, I out that all the time as is my team. And that means that people view us as the people to follow because we hold opinions on things.

We share those opinions. I make sure that they’re always balanced. They fit with the brand. They’re very sort of rational and scientific and the heartwarming and friendly and natural and people buy into that. So you have to have opinions when you’re running a business. And I see a lot of people really struggle with this because they don’t want to put themselves out there,

but it is. Yeah. Step number five, for reason, it’s been a huge part of our growth in becoming this global empire. It is so important. And I understand that. And I, I think that there is a, there is a fear about not having everybody agree with you, but that’s also part of the destruction and the part of leadership and,

and most leaders don’t have, you know, everybody that loves them. I mean, that’s the way it is when we’re doing works. That work, that really matters. It means it’s work, that’s different. And to do work that’s different. It means that you’re probably going against the grain on the way that the commonplace has been. And so I really love that.

You said that. And I think that that is, that’s just very encouraging for some of our listeners to hear. Okay. And then step number six, what is this final icing on the cake to bring it all together? So following on, from what I said about putting yourself out there, now you have to go and form a network. And that means getting to know people,

big players, small players, any players, really people who also hold opinions and who are active in your world in your sector. And we now have partnerships with NBC brands, with our graduates, with bloggers, with influences, but also with the mainstream beauty industry. You know, I have stood on major stages in front of the big players, the L’Oreals,

the Unilevers, the Proctor and gambles, but also the indie players at the same time. And I’m trying to bring people into our world so that they understand that we’re the bridge that brings everything together. So for instance, we are, we’re the formal NDBC partner for the world’s largest cosmetic ingredients exhibition. They have 12,000 visitors a year. You know, they tour around Europe.

It’s like going into three aircraft hangers. You know, when you go and visit these trade shows and we’re there in DVC part in that. Now I have spoken at major industry events because of a lot of the work that we’ve done and the networking that we’ve done. And because of that, that’s opened the door whereby people don’t do formula Botanica as Lorraine’s little side hustle with her baby on their hip anymore.

They view us as a big accredited award-winning online institution. And obviously that’s all part of the seven years of just showing up every week and just putting yourself at that. But you have to make a network and you have to invest in that network and be kind and really give back because it will come back to you tenfold every single time. And that’s certainly what I’ve found over the years.

That’s Incredible. And so let’s recap these six steps, and then I have one last question for you. So Lorraine’s formula to build a global empire, but not just any global empower you guys that really matters. It’s really, really making a change in this space are your six steps. Okay? Step number one, content creation, educate and entertain your followers at the same time.

Step to constantly promote that content, put it at that great SEO, social media outreach, but most importantly, your list, you need one step, number three, build a strong brand that you fiercely protect and build. And you’re constantly growing it. Step number four, create a thriving and happy community. Make sure that the people around you know, that you love them because they’re your biggest assets,

your biggest fans, they’re everything. Step number five, be viewed as a thought leader, have opinions and put those opinions out there and make sure that people buy into those opinions and hear you. And step number six, build a network and build a strong network that you pour your love and heart into because it will come back to you. Tenfold, how I Love that.

I love that. Thank you so much for sharing all this wisdom. This is an amazing lesson. You guys hear that you are hearing and I’m taking notes and listening right along, right along with you. And so I have one last question for you. And I don’t ask this. Isn’t like a set question. I ask all the guests. I just really,

I would love to know this answer from you. What have you learned about yourself along the way through this process? What do you believe about your, I know I didn’t even prepare you for, this is such a tough question, right? Sorry. You know, like what, what do you know and believe about yourself that only could have come through your tenacity,

your resilience, your consistency. What have you learned about yourself in this process? That is a great question. So before I took them formula Botanica I worked all over the world. I lived in multiple countries. I worked in high-powered jobs. You know, I ran all sorts of fantastic projects, but I kept coming up against this massive glass ceiling everywhere I went.

You’re too young. You’re too inexperienced. Lorraine. It’s too scary, too outspoken too. In your face, you voice your opinions too much. I do that. And it got to the point that it started to chip away at me because you start to internalize a lot of what you hear. And when you’re constantly told you need to tone it down,

you need to be less outspoken. Yeah. You need to put your opinions out there less. You start to do that. And I now know that the only way I think for women to achieve true gender equality in the workplace is by building something like this for themselves and driving it forward. And I know myself that I am more confident and more able,

and I believe in myself more than I ever have before because of the work that I’ve done here over the last seven years. And no one can take that away from me and I will never walk into a workplace ever again, where someone will tell me I’m too scary because I will eat them alive. Thank you so much for everything that you have shared.

I know our listeners just like Marriott, we just want to eat up everything you’re giving to us. So, you know, and just absorb from you. So this is, I’m just so honored to meet you. Thank you so much for applying to be on this show and wanting to come here and share your story with this audience. It’s incredibly powerful and proven and you know,

that’s what we, that’s what we do. We bring in experts like you, that have created their expertise through resilience and, and determination. And, and I’m just so glad that you’re here. So how can people find you? How can they connect with you? All of you join your, your formulation school. If we have listeners that want to start doing their own thing and they haven’t done it yet,

or go and follow you to learn and watch and observe how you are building and how you’re continuing to grow your empire, where can we find you? So wherever formula botanica.com, where we have a free online organic cosmetic formulation course that anyone can take Instagram is the biggest platform for formula Botanica as well. But I am also on Instagram and on Facebook where you can follow me.

And I talk more about the business side of things, the sustainability side of things. Cause that’s my bag. And I just want to say, thank you so much April for having this amazing podcast and for welcoming me onto it, because it’s fantastic to talk to you. And it’s a real honor to be here. It’s such A pleasure and Lorraine and I will be live in clubhouse.

You guys. So this is episode number 237. It will be episode number 237 when it drops. So Lorraine and I are going to be here to talk to you. And you guys get to come in, ask Lorraine all of your questions, whether it’s about formulations or how she went from baby on the hip to literal global empire creator through online business.

These steps work. This process works with consistency. And so we’re going to be live in clubhouse on July 28th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Please come join us there. We’ll make sure all of the links to where you can connect with us in clubhouse are found in the show notes of this episode@sweetlifeco.com. Ryan, thank you so much. We really, really appreciate it.

Thank you. It’s been awesome.

Episode 236: 3 Types Of Content Companies Line Up To License – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Free Webinar: How to License Your Content to Scale Your Business and Increase Profit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs who have an established method, framework or process and are ready to scale exponentially.

Summary:

People don’t talk about licensing. In fact, it’s a secret weapon that most companies don’t tap in to. However, licensing when done properly can be the catalyst to higher profit than you ever dreamed possible. And there’s no catch! In fact, the business model of licensing your content, course, or program is quite simple. This week we’re continuing our conversation about from episode #235 and talking about the types of content companies line up to license.
I’m also sharing behind the scenes details of how I’ve licensed my content, methods, frameworks and processes for over a decade. And you can too! 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know what makes your content valuable enough to be licensed
  2. Know how to license what you already have and not re-create the wheel
  3. Know how to decide if licensing is right for you

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

Episode 235: How To License Your Course, Content, or Program – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneurs Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Free Webinar: How to License Your Content to Scale Your Business and Increase Profit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for established entrepreneurs who are interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially through licensing your content, course or program.

Summary:

If you’re an established entrepreneur with proven programs, courses, or content, and you’re looking to grow exponentially, then this episode is for you. By creating content to license you can demonstrate thought leadership in your space, increase credibility across your audience, expand your business to B2B or create a dual business model. 
 
This an intro to licensing for entrepreneurs who want to know how content licensing works, those who want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space through Licensing, those interested in transitioning from B2C to B2B in some capacity. This show will give you a good foundation and knowledge base to consider your options. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know what licensing is and how to make money doing it
  2. Know the business model of licensing and if it’s right for you
  3. Know the prerequisites to license your content

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach, and welcome to episode number 235. This one is really juicy. It is jam packed with the secrets to how I grew my first business consulting firm to over seven figures. So I’m super excited to share this with you and all of the resources that we have here available for you on the show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

And this is episode number 235. Welcome to the suite life entrepreneur and business podcast. If you’re new, my name is April beach. I am the host here of this show. I am a business consultant and strategists that works with entrepreneurs and experts to design, launch, and scale. Your business in today’s episode is literally a secret weapon. If you are listening to this,

if you’re a regular subscriber or you just happened to land here, this is something that nobody’s talking about, and I’m so excited to share it with you on today’s show, we’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit. And this particular episode is a best for you. It’s most appropriate for you. If you are in phases three,

four or five of my entrepreneur roadmap, what that means is that you have to be in a specific phase to be ready for this level of business scalability and this level of growth. And so if you’re in phases three, four or five, this is a great episode for you to listen to. If you don’t know what phase of business design growth scale and impact you are in,

please take a second pause here and cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. And you can take a really short quiz and I’ll tell you exactly where you are in your business and what you should be working on right now. You can also text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Okay. So here’s what we have in today’s show. It’s really great for those of you guys who are established entrepreneurs,

and you’re interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially through licensing your content course or program. If you have a proven program course or content, and you are looking to see even the greater impact that you can make, you’re trying to find even more ways to make more money into create the impact that you know, that your program can, then this episode is for you.

And so at the end of this episode, you are going to know what licensing is and how to make money doing it. You are going to know the business model of licensing and be able to have insight on whether or not this is even right for you. And you’re going to know the prerequisites that you need to have in place in order to license your content.

And there is a super special bonus with today’s episode. If you want to know more about this, you do not want to miss this bonus. I am giving you a completely free one hour licensing your content quick start video training, and you really don’t want to miss it. It’s one hour training on the quick start guide of how to prepare and license your content.

And you can find that totally free by visiting licensed to scale.com. It’s the word license, the number two, and then the word scale.com. And I’ll make sure that that is in the show notes for you. So that’s another resource for you to grab here at love, giving you guys awesome, very highly valuable stuff here for free that other businesses charge you thousands for.

So definitely go grab that. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. This is episode number 235. And so all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. Number 2 35 under podcast<inaudible>. So let’s start out by answering the question. What is licensing licensing is creating content for other companies to use. Think of it as renting your content,

renting your course, renting your program. So it’s creating content for other companies to use and they rent it from you and it’s called licensing so that they can grow faster or so that they can make more money or so that they can provide better services or training or support for their people, whoever their people happen to be. And now let me read you the legal definition of licensing,

but just so you know, I wanted to make sure I gave you the April entrepreneur, regular person’s definition of it too. So the legal definition of licensing is content licensing is a legal agreement between two parties known as a licensee and a license or licensees can purchase the rights to re-publish content from a license or licensing is extremely versatile and allows her brands to repackage content in a variety of forms across desktop and mobile platforms.

And that official definition came from news cred. So let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit more. You have a program where you have a course and you want to make more money. You want to go from what I call in our business, where we take our clients from scale to amplify, there is a difference between scaling your business and amplifying your business in this.

My friends is how you do it. So the benefits of licensing are really important to think about as you’re considering whether or not you want to license your program to other companies. Here are some of the benefits that you can flow through your mind. As I’m saying these to you and really hold each one up and see if it fits you right. The first one is,

if you want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space, if you want to become a thought leader in your particular niche, your particular area of expertise, then licensing is a benefit in that area. Number two, licensing increases credibility across your own audience. So even though you’re creating content, that’s used by other companies, when your audience knows that other companies are buying your content,

all of a sudden, they are really confident in your ability to get them direct results. Number three, licensing enables for what I call exponential scalability. So let’s talk about scale for a second scale. In most cases, as we talk about here on the podcast in most entrepreneurs and online businesses are familiar with it. In that case, we’re talking about taking a one-on-one service or a one-on-one program and turning it into one on group or creating different business models so that you can reach more people and increase your profit.

Usually in the same amount of time, scaling is a precursor to licensing licensing is where you still create that one piece of content, and then you’ve tested it in the scale capacity. And now you are willing to rent it or allow other companies to borrow it from you called licensing it for them to distribute. So we have gone from scaling you to literally exploding so fast,

your reach with your content through licensing. And then another benefit of licensing is for those of you, if you’re listening to this and you want to figure out how to go from B to C, so you have a consulting firm or a coaching firm, or you’re a speaker, an author, and you are used to serving one particular client that gets direct results from you.

And you want to transition. You want to start coaching other businesses. Licensing is also a really great benefit for you. So there are multiple benefits to licensing your content, if any of those fit into what aligns with your strategic objectives for your life in your brand. So really the question that we need to dive into here before I share anything else is,

is licensing right for you, but not only that are ready to license. I have so many people, literally we have a waiting list of entrepreneurs who really want to learn how to license their materials, but they aren’t ready yet. So let’s talk about what is the prerequisite for being able to join my masterclass called license to scale, to learn how to do this.

The prerequisite is that you have to have a proven course or program or content. That’s gotten people transformational results in the past. Okay? So this means if you have never created a course before, or if you do not have a membership community with curriculum, if you have not developed transformational curriculum or a transformational program, and you have not tested that you are not ready for licensing.

And so at this point in time, if that is you, of course, you’re welcome to sit here and hang out with me for the rest of this episode, but I would put it on pause because we have a program to teach you how to do that. It’s you can find that program by visiting signature offer.com. And so the process we take companies through is first we help businesses launch.

And then the second phase is scale where entrepreneurs join our transformational program, design masterclass. Again, you can find that@signatureoffer.com at this is where you are, and then you can go onto licensing your material. So the prerequisite is you have to have a proven program course or content. That’s gotten people results in the past. If you don’t have that, you’re not quite ready for that yet.

And that’s okay. This is a very Coopa. So to know what is the potential for you is in the future. So I’m going to give you guys a peek behind the scenes. I’m pulling back the curtains, and I’m going to share with you two case studies out of five different case days in which I have licensed my content for over 12 years,

because I want you to get your wheels spinning about what you have or what you can do with your business, all five case studies, and they’re all different. All five case studies are available by going to license to scale.com and joining that licensing 1 0 1 webinar. But I’m just for the sake of time and to get your wheels spinning, I’m going to share with you two here.

Okay. So the first case study I want to share is the fact that I had a collection of courses, a collection of online courses back in 2009, I’ve been doing all my courses before. They’re even a thing. If you listen to the show, you know that right? So I had a collection of eight full online courses, and there were eight different courses that were as for a very specific niche audience.

And they were totaled 198 slides, 13 hours of recorded classes. And they came with teacher guides and supplemental worksheets and even project plans. I licensed that collection of courses, and I have licensed these collection of eight courses that is currently still to this day, licensed in over 13 countries to other businesses. They included business coaching videos, swipe files, and we licensed it in different formats so that the business could use it.

And even co-branded. So that is case study number one. So I had a collection of courses that served a specific audience and people line up, people literally joined my waiting lists to license my courses. I only release them once a year in the month of November. And they join a waiting list to license my courses once a year. And I have been doing that since that beginning of 2009.

And so that’s one way. So if you have a collection, of course, it’s not just one course. Think about all of the material you have created all of the mini videos, all the things that you’ve done, that we can package together into a complete package. And I promise you when it’s done correctly, they will line up to license that from you.

And so I’ve done this for years and I’m still doing this today. So that’s case study number one and then case study number two is that I have a full coaching program that includes the courses, but it also includes consulting for corporations and content that that corporation can distribute to all of their people in this case, it’s a corporate program. And so they want to take my content and my courses and use my consulting.

And that’s another case study. And I first started doing this back in 2010. So these are two case studies. And again, I have five, some smaller ones for those of you guys that are just getting started and you can see all five by going to the license to scale.com and you can join that information webinar. So hopefully that gets your wheels spinning a little bit about what you already have.

We want to dive into your assets, dive into your method, dive into your process and what you’ve already created, and then have a conversation about who can this really benefit. So it’ll benefit your business and it’ll benefit their corporation and their company as well. The next thing I want to kind of transition here, because I know that for many of you,

this is a new conversation. This is a new topic is sharing with you that there are three primary ways to license your content. And each one of these ways is going to equal the branding in the future goals for you that you have for your company. So the first way you can license your content is straight as it is with your branding, your logo all over it.

So that would be somebody borrows or quote unquote licenses, rents your course, or your class. And they plug it into their LMS. They plug it into their system or wherever they’re distributing it, but it’s your logo all over it. That’s way. Number one way. Number two is co-branded where you allow your them to add their name and logo to it.

It could be co presented by co-branded by, and that’s a really great way for you to retain the ownership and the authority of that content, but also to really help your licensee level up as well. And then the third way you can license your content is completely white. Labeled white labeled is where nobody even knows it’s yours. Some operations expect that to happen.

So some companies will only license your content. If it’s completely white labeled some companies only want to license your content if it’s co-branded. And so every single one of the licensees has their own goals for licensing your content. Now let’s talk about for a second. What is really actually good for you? Those three levels. Number one straight as is, is your trademark number two co-branded or number three white labeled.

They follow the flow of the value, which means that someone will pay you less to take it straight as your own, a little bit more to co-brand it, and a little bit more to white label it, or in some cases there’s significantly more amount of money to let white label content, but let’s ask the really important question here is that right for you?

Is it right for you to have no stake? And for nobody to know that that was your genius and out of it, all the companies and all the entrepreneurs that I coach to license their courses and their content, very, very few of them go with the white label. Even though the end user, the licensee will pay all the tea in China,

is that really worth it to not get recognition or your brand. And so those are some things that I just want you to be thinking about. I know this isn’t yeah. Intro to licensing conversation. So I wanted to make sure that you knew about those three primary ways to license your content. So as you’re going through, as you’re thinking about what you have,

or that you can license, you’re also thinking about in what capacity that that could work best for you and what you want your branch to be 2, 6, 10 years down the road. And then the last question I want to answer for you today is who licenses your content? Who should you license it to? This is a very common question. I answer this in clubhouse rooms all the time.

And I get emails very often, especially when we’re leading up to opening up my license to scale masterclass. And people are saying, well, who, who wants this? Who do I sell it to? So let me give you two very clear examples of who should you license your light, your content to the first one is other companies who are not in direct competition with you,

but they serve the same audience and they want to look better or expand their reach, grow their list, increase their sales and save time. This second opportunity for an audience for you are companies that are exactly like yours, but they’re missing something they need. And they want your expert content. They want turnkey offers. So they want to be able to take your course and just plug it in to their system and sell it right away.

And they want to have faster instant results. So you can license your content to a company whose audience needs it. But the company is not in direct competition with you, or you can license your content to a company that is just like yours, but perhaps they don’t have as great of content as you do. Perhaps they need some more content to level up where they already have to shore up their offering and they need your help to do that.

So those are two general examples of audiences who you could consider licensing your content to. So today we’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit. And I talked about a lot of things. We talked about, what is licensing? We talked about the benefits of licensing. We discussed whether or not you’re ready to license. I gave you two of five different case studies of when I have licensed my content and hopefully in doing so,

your wheels are spinning and you’re thinking about what you already have, that you can license or how you can package together content, courses, programs, your framework, your methodology, to license, to other people. We also talked about three primary ways to license your content. And we talked about who should you license your content to? So we discussed a lot,

but I’ll be really honest. This isn’t even the tip of the iceberg. I have so much more to share with you. So if you are interested in licensing your content or learning more about licensing your content, I highly recommend you join the licensing 1 0 1 training, and it’s totally free where I’m also going to give you a quick start guide to learn how to get your content licensed faster,

and to determine if it’s right for you. And you can grab that anytime by visiting license and then the number two, and then the word scale, S C a L e.com. Or of course, all of the show notes will be found in the episode show notes. This is episode number 235, and you can visit us@sweetlifeco.com click on the podcast. And this is number 235.

And just so you know, this is part one of a two part podcast episode I’m doing for you next week in episode number 236, I’m going to tell you the four types of content that companies line up to license. They will literally line up Fletcher list begging for you to license your content to them. And there’s four kinds of content that companies line up to license.

We’re talking about that next week on the show, that’s going to be episode number 236. So thank you so much for joining me. I am very excited to share this. This has been my secret weapon. Many of you might not know. I own two different business consulting firms. And this is how my first, very first business consulting firm really broke through that glass ceiling.

And I’m so excited to share this with you. It’s been kind of a secret. I’ve been holding in my pocket for quite a few years, and I’ve had the privilege of working with so many businesses one-on-one to do this, but we do have our license to scale masterclass, visit licensed to scale.com. If you are ready to take the steps and license your content to hit that amplify level in your business,

all right, you guys have an amazing night happy July, 2021. When I’m recording this, I hope you’re doing something super fun that you love that really fills you up. I’ll talk to you on another episode soon.

Episode 233: Create Videos People Watch, Engage With, and Buy From – with April Beach and McCall Jones

McCall Jones SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

GET THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO ONLINE BUSINESS MODELS, OFFERS and LIFESTYLES

Who This Episode is Great For:

Experts who are ready to increase sales with video. 

Summary:

You’re an expert, and you’re pretty incredible at what you do, but sales from your online videos aren’t exactly reflecting just how amazing you are. This means there’s a disconnect between who you truly are and how you’re showing up on video. Or there could also be some bumpy roads between how you show compassion on video, establishing your authority, or entertaining viewers long enough to stay until the call to action. Does this sound like you? 
 
No worries my friend! McCall Jones, creator of Charisma Hacking, is here to break down her proven framework to “make strangers trust you and followers become aggressively devoted to you.” 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the F.A.C.E. Framework and how to apply this to your videos
  2. See the formula to pin-point your own areas of improvement
  3. Solve the disconnect between the great videos you already make, and your lack of sales

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hey everybody. And welcome to episode number 200 in 33, we have a very special treat in store for you today. You’re Going to leave today’s episode with fully knowing how to look at your own videos,

how you’re showing up in video and edit and change anything so that you can create an, a crazy devotion to you where people love you and increase your sales. So we’re going to dive into all of that in just a second with our guest expert today, McCall Jones, before we get started, first of all, welcome if you’ve never listened to this show before I’m April beach,

founder of the Sweetlife company and host here at the sweet life entrepreneurial podcast. Thank you guys so much. I keep forgetting to share back with our audience. I’ve been trying to in the last couple of episodes that you guys have just voted me top 50 moms and podcasting, and I appreciate you so much that never would have happened without you turning in your votes and lifting this show up and lifting me up.

And I appreciate it so much. So I just want to say thank you to you guys. We’ve been producing this show for about four and a half years, and if you’ve been a faithful listener here on the show, you know that the Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast gives you business trainings from the trenches proven business trainings from decades and decades of proven frameworks systems pass and coaching to bring your business to the next level.

We like to say that this is the podcast that other coaches would charge thousands for the information you hear on this show. And I just want to thank you so much personally, for being a listener. If you are not officially a subscribed yet, please click that subscribe button and take a screenshot and tag me in it. Take a screenshot tag at April beach life.

And so I can know you. I can know who’s listening, and then I want to follow you back and I want to follow your business back, and then we can keep supporting you back on Instagram. So I would love to do that for you as well as if you haven’t connected with us yet. Every single week we host a live Sweetlife entrepreneur pot house podcast room on clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time on Wednesdays.

That is your time to come to me, come to our guests and ask your questions. We want to workshop with you based on the podcast trainings that we drop here on the show. So listen to the show as a drop some Monday, join us live in clubhouse on Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And we’re there to workshop with you in order to find us on clubhouse.

All you need to do is search my name. You can search at April beach and then click follow up and click the bell little bell next to it, to turn on notifications. And you will actually also see a schedule of rooms that I’m hosting, and you can even RSVP for those rooms to get a notification on your own calendar, as well as we always post the clubhouse calendar every single week to my Instagram,

which is at April beach life. So lots of places for you to get connected and to get answers and to get support. We’re just not here talking to ourselves. Everything we do here is about giving you proven strategies and giving you support to take your business to the next level. And let’s go ahead and dive in and talk about what we’re talking about on this episode with our amazing,

amazing guests. So who this episode is for first of all, if you don’t know what stage of business you’re in, just stop for a second. We actually have a self-assessment you can take, you can go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, and you can take a self-assessment and you can find out exactly what stage or phase of business you’re in as composed as compared,

I should say to my lifestyle entrepreneur roadmap. And the reason why I say that is because every single one of our episodes here on the podcast are tagged to a stage of business, because I don’t want to just give you more content. We want to give you a transformation, but if you’re not ready for what we’re teaching you and talking about on today’s show,

based on where you are in business, then go pick another episode to listen to this. That is, that means that, you know, you, aren’t in alignment with where your business is growing right now. And we want to make sure that you continually stay in alignment. So I say all of that to say that this episode is for those of you who are in phases two,

three or four. So primarily you two and threes, but also some of you fours. So if you don’t know where you are, again, you can pause this and just open up a new window on your phone. Really quick, go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, or you can text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. And we will send you a link to take that,

to make sure that what you’re being taught, what we’re pouring out today aligns with something that is going to take your business to the next level, because you’re ready for it. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive in. This show is very important because you’re an expert and you’re probably really pretty incredible at what you do, but sales from your online videos.

Aren’t maybe re exactly reflecting how incredible you are, how great your services are. This means there’s a disconnect between who you are and how you’re showing up a video. Or there could be some bumpy roads between how you show compassion on video, establishing your authority, or maybe making your videos a little bit more entertaining. So that’s what we’re solving today on the show.

And my friend McCall Jones, creator of charisma hacking is here and she is breaking down her proven formula to solve these problems. So let me tell you whom a call is. She’s going to introduce herself a bit. So I’ll just read a little bit here to get you prepared. She’s a founder of charisma, hacky, and a set of business systems built from Hollywood tactics that make audiences notice you then obsess over you and then compulsively buy from you.

And she goes in and she’ll share her whole entertainment story on this show. It’s fascinating. And the connection between her background in entrepreneur growth is this perfect superpower that she has is there. You’re really gonna love today’s show the secrets of charisma hacking success is in its systems and how they adapt to each entrepreneur’s personalities. McCall says we’ve cracked the code on how any entrepreneur can amplify the best parts of themselves to build a rabid fan base,

regardless of whether they are as intense as Gary V nurturing his Bernay brown, energetic as Russell Bronson, or matter of fact is Dave Ramsey with charisma hacking clients have increased YouTube video watch times by up to 242% tripled their revenue, 20 X, their Facebook ad click-through rate, and more than anything else, finally, we’re able to connect with their audience and meaningful way and deliver their message in a way where they responded by being the best versions of themselves.

That’s everything you get today on the show. And it is a little bit longer than most of our episodes. So I just wanted to prepare you for that. You are going to want to stay till the end. I promise you, you are those of you go getters that never leave before the end. You guys are so rad. We love you,

but if you can’t stay too long, make sure you pause the episode and you come back to it. All right, let’s go ahead and dive in and all of the show notes and everything I mentioned previously, and everything that is going to be mentioned on the show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 233. Let’s go Hey guys,

welcome to episode number 233 here on the sweet left entrepreneur and business podcast. And I am joined by my new good friend. I say new good friends because yes, of course, all my listeners are laughing and be like, oh yeah, I bet you met her on clubhouse. Yes, you’re right. I’ve met McAllen clubhouse. By the way, side note,

if you aren’t over there yet, you need to come over there and chat with us on clubhouse, because this is what it’s all about. Meeting amazing people that can pour into your business that can pour into my business and create these amazing dream teams, a business collaborations that bring us all to the next level. And I have had such a great time the last five months getting to know my friend McCall Jones.

And I’m so excited. She’s here on the show today. So I’m so proud of be April. Yeah, guys, you got to get over to clubhouse is the place to be. We’re just making all new friends kind of hang out with us. Kim, hang out with us with that being said, one of the things that we know about clubhouses is it’s a great place to establish your superpower,

your true superpower for how you get people results and your exact method and strategy. And you have risen to the top. It’s like the best rise to the top and clubhouse because of your very niche, amazingly charismatic, important like important superpower. So tell everybody who you are, what you do and how you got into doing what you do first. Let’s start there.

Yeah, of course. So I own a company called charisma hacking. So with charisma hacking, we work with coaches to solve two problems in their business. Number one, people aren’t watching my videos and number two, people are watching my videos, but they are not buying. So we tap into your specific personality to make sure that you are being yourself so that you get higher value customers that stay forever.

The way that I got into charisma have you, I’ll give you the short version. It’s a long story, but I grew up actually as a child performer. So I was performing in front of audiences of 25,000 when I was eight and 35,000 when I was 11. And I was performing on a very consistent basis, did a couple of movies in high school.

I was in high school musical two a, which was really fun. But the whole time I have this incredible performance anxiety, that was pretty crippling. All of my worth in my mind was wrapped up in the fact that I was a performer and I had this recurring nightmare. That one day I would wake up and not be able to sing, not be able to act,

not be able to perform and that nobody would love me anymore. And this nightmare started when I was a really little girl and it led me to, you know, long story short, it led me to creating these frameworks back then I called them checklists so that I could wake up and feel like I could teach myself how to do what I did the night before.

I also started paying attention to what audiences paid attention to and what they cheered for louder, things like that. It all started with Donnie. Ozmen, it’s a long story, but basically I was watching him perform. He saying right before me at the Steve young benefit retirement cruise. And when I was having this panic attack backstage, basically I saw the audience interact with him in a way that I had never seen before.

And I snuck over to the side of this room divider that they used as this backstage area. And I honestly got really envious and really jealous. And I thought to myself, I could do exactly what he’s doing. And I started to make a checklist of like, oh, what he’s doing with his hands, what he’s doing with his space, what he’s doing with his voice,

who is he pointing at? How is he walking on the stage? And I started to log these things into this checklist. And then I realized that these checklists were going to lower my anxiety considerably. And I just made checklist for everything. After that, I realized that it’s more of a science and it led to creating checklists for acting, for dance for all different types of audiences and sizes.

I used it for auditions. And then when I was 18, I was fired from an acting job for being too fat. They literally dismissed me from set because I had been wait between the audition and when we were actually filming, which it isn’t their right to do that. But it was very devastating to me. All of a sudden this fear of rejection became just rejection.

And in that moment I vowed to never get on camera. Again. I knew that I never wanted to do that again. I, I didn’t want to feel the way that I was feeling in that moment. So I didn’t, and I stayed low for a couple of years. Then the really depressing thing about that. I went into this very deep depression.

I had spent my whole life at this point, perfecting the art of being in front of people really perfecting it of, you know, all of these checklists of like, this works, this doesn’t in front of these audiences. You move this large and in front of these audiences, here’s what you’re supposed to do. And you know, an auditions. And then I wasn’t using the skills that I built over,

you know, my entire life. And within a couple of years I had somebody come to me and asked me if I would help then with an audition. And I said, yes, under very strict circumstances, because I didn’t want to be the reason they succeeded or failed. And I told her that I would help her as long as we did it before after video.

And if I could prove that I made a difference, then yes, we could do it again. I could take her money and we can move forward that way. And I just taught her some of the checklists that I had really never verbalized out or verbalized yet outside of, of my brain. And it worked in a very real way. The before after video was insane,

which led to my whole first business, which was helping entertainers basically be better in front of people. And then about a year and a half ago now I went to funnel hacking live, which is a big internet marketing convention. And I just went to see my sister-in-law speak. She was speaking. I knew it was big deal for her, but I knew nothing about the internet marketing world.

And as I looked around, I started taking notes of all these entrepreneurs that when they would come up to me, they would light up and share all of their solutions and the amazing things they were doing. And then we’d go five feet, you know, to the left or to the right. And they would be networking with other people and they would shut down and it would be a completely different person.

And then I’d see them filming things for ads or joint ventures or logs. And they were just not great. They were not themselves. And I realized that nobody would ever hear their solutions. Nobody would ever listened to them. People on stage that I was just like, oh my gosh, they just had these techniques. I could help them. And as I looked around,

I realized, you know, with entertainers my whole life, I had gone through, you know, the, that I’m going to change the world first as a performer was, I’m going to make people happy. Then as a coach of entertainers, I’m going to change the world by basically trying to help people be famous. And then as I sat there surrounded by people who had these incredible solutions that truly were going to change people’s lives.

I realized that my impact on the world could be infinite because theirs was, if I empowered them to make people, listen to them, basically. So Prisma hacking it’s been going really well. And it’s really fun. All of the techniques that we use, like I said, have been proven. I’ve used them since I was eight years old. I have hundreds of before after videos proving their effectiveness.

Yeah. That’s what brought us here. That’s I really, I don’t think I could do anything else. This is so much a part of my identity and everything that had been since I was a little girl. Wow. I have honestly, never heard that whole entire story. I never knew that that was your background actually in all the time we spent together on clubhouse.

It’s really interesting what you say. So I don’t know if you knew this, but my middle son is a professional hip hop dancer. And so we have lived in Los Angeles before COVID a week, a month. He was there working. And interestingly enough, since COVID, and since he’s kind of not currently dancing right now, but in some of them,

some of the, the wave that you were sharing, like about viewing yourself and how you show up. I see some of that. I’ve seen some of that in him and some of those same challenges actually. And so it is really, really fascinating to hear that. And just being like a mom in that industry, there is nothing like that industry.

And how cool is that that absolutely a completely, perfectly positioned you to help other kinds of stars, people that have amazing solutions for businesses, but actually utilize what you know, from the entertainment space, because it’s like, what does that reminded me of gladiator of Russell Crowe when he’s like, are you not entertained? You know what I mean? I just think that’s such an amazing story and absolutely you’re the perfect person to give this solution to people.

And you know, me being in the entrepreneur space, my whole life you’re right. I see so many people that have these amazing solutions, but yet it’s not getting out. There’s like a block of some kind and you have the gift to see that. So I’m so excited. You’re on the show today. We’re going to talk about your framework that you’ve developed,

literally, since you were eight, this genius started following your framework that people need. And when we give people frameworks to build their own genius within that’s when we truly created something, that’s amazing. That’s going to, like you said, your one framework impacts literally a magnitude and a multitude of people. Let’s talk about what does this look like? Like,

first of all, when people say, what is actual charisma hacking? Like what actually is the definition of charisma hacking? Let’s start there. Absolutely. So I defined charisma a little bit different and I will tell you why. The first thing that I feel like people define charisma as is like what the masses consider high energy. And they’re like, oh,

they can command a room because they’re this very specific personality type. I do not define charisma that way with all the research that I’ve done with all the clients that I’ve worked with. And with my own experience, I defined charisma as making strangers trust you and making those who know you aggressively devoted to you, that does not matter. And it’s not dependent on your personality type.

It only matters the level in which you communicate with people. So for me, you know, it’s exactly what you said with the entertainment industry. Everything is about rejection. You get so many more rejections than you actually get jobs, really. And you know, people who like you or dislike you and people are picking apart every single part of your personality.

And for me, you know, growing up a lot of times, people wanted me to be something different. And because I was an actress, I could do that. I had a very specific skillset that any time somebody didn’t like a very specific part of my personality, I would change. And a lot of times they wanted me to be sexier or I was called step Ferdie.

Once some people have told me that because I am bubbly, they thought I was stupid. Like, there’s so many different things that kind of built up this, what people want me to be, which I know a lot of times that’s how people define charisma. They say, what do people want me to be? What do they need me to be?

And I will be that when I started charisma hacking, you know, remember I made this vow to myself that I would never get on camera again. And at funnel hacking live, I had this really interesting experience where the whole first day that I was planning, you know, creating this new business model, I was trying to figure out a way for me to do it behind the scenes.

Cause without whole first business, I was, I was very much behind the scenes. I was pushing other people, you know, out in front of the spotlight on the stage on camera. I was the director, the producer, and I felt like I was happy and satisfied with that. So that’s what I tried to do the whole first day. I tried to figure out a way to not be on camera,

to not be the face of my business. And I very quickly realized that that was not possible if I wanted to make the impact that I wanted to. And there was a wonderful woman who spoke at funnel hacking librarians, Heather Quizzle, she’s a friend of ours now. And I went up to compliment her on her speech and she stopped me and said,

what do you do? And I tried on my new business title and my new business description. And she just told me it was like, she saw through me. She’s like, whatever you do, make sure the face of it, make sure that you are on every video, on every ad on everything. And it really struck me. I was like,

oh my gosh, I’m being seen. So when I got home, I had to make this promise to myself that I made all of my clients also promise themselves that they have to be themselves 100% of the time. They cannot try to think, Hey, if I’m going to be charismatic, I need to be whatever people want me to be. Whatever people think I should be,

whatever will attract the masses or satisfy the masses, whatever they will. Like. Instead we focus on this aggressive devote. And like I said before, that actually draws people to your specific personality. I will tell you, I am not for everyone. And a lot of people will tell you that, right? I am cooky and crazy and silly and all these.

And I wasn’t that for a really long time. And my greatest achievement, I believe with charisma hacking is building a business around actually who I am. Because every time people watch my videos, every time they move higher in my programs or up my value ladder, they only want to get to know me more or at the very bottom. They know if I’m not for them and they leave don’t waste any time,

I don’t spend any money marketing towards people who are not a good fit. So with this, when we put it okay, charisma hacking, right? We make people themselves and we make them not only themselves, but that version of themselves, that level of themselves is the very best person they can be in their business and for their clients. So when I said like,

I didn’t want to be the face of my company or led me to taking all of these amazing things, all of these things and really breaking down what was important, how do we make you yourself? Because the frightening thing is you absolutely can build an audience if you are not being yourself. And that should terrify you because all of a sudden you’re creating a new problem.

You are building an audience for a person who does not exist. If you create an alter ego and a character that you feel we’ll help you be less nervous and you just no put on your Sasha fierce face and you go on camera, you are building an audience for that person. They are investing in that version of you. That is not sustainable. You can build an audience that way,

but you will spend time and money acquiring an audience, acquiring a customer that is not a good fit for any of your higher programs, especially as a coach, because the closer they get to you, the more they will realize. First, you create distrust. You create a sense of discomfort because they realize you’re not the same person and they leave, right.

So instead we say, okay, you’re going to be the face of your company. You’re going to be the same 100% of the time so that we can create trust and we can make them aggressively devoted to you by being the face of your company. So I know we have a big face framework that we’re going to go through too, but that’s the core Prismic mapping.

And that’s a scary statement to hear for some of our listeners. And I am so glad that you said that the fact that you are literally building an audience around somebody that doesn’t exist, because it isn’t you and you aren’t showing up authentically to who you are and who you’re going to be after they buy you and, you know, refunds and, you know,

disgruntled people. I mean, that’s all part of what happens in that. And so it’s so important that you said what you said, but I also think it’s pretty sobering in the fact that you said it as clearly as you did. And so I also know that, you know, we have a lot of listeners and with the process of where they are in business,

when you are starting to launch, I actually think that in my experience, in coaching businesses, through the development and growth phase, the launch people, surprisingly, they, yes, they deal with kind of struggling with this so much. They actually are pretty good at being themselves. It’s after they start getting a little traction, I have seen them go to this next point of saying,

oh, but I’m not enough. Oh, now I need to become somebody different in order to actually keep getting a little bit more attraction. This is usually like in the first 18 months, sometimes I see that transition. And so I love that you said that because eventually that’s going to be a brick wall for them. And thank you so much for speaking the truth.

And that’s what we do here on this show. And I know our listeners really want and need to hear it. So let’s talk about this face framework. What is it, why do people need it, break it down for us? Absolutely. So with the space framework, what we are really assessing is two things. So it’s your personality style or type,

or your charisma style or type that’s one side of it. And the second side of it is the level, right? So the first thing that we establish is making sure that your personality type is right, or we can even say is true, right? And I’ll break down the different parts of your personality that we make sure that we assess the second part of that.

It never changes your personality or charisma type never changes, but the level does as you get more competent or more, you know, at an expert level on video, these very specific things are going to level up, but who you are and your personality type doesn’t change them up super important. So we go through F a C E so F is the floor,

or we can save a level. We can call it the Flavell level if you want. Right. And this is where we assess how competent you are or how effective you are at making sure these next three, the AC and E are the right type and what level they’re at. So Fs floor. So we’re going to assess the level a is authority.

C is and E is entertainment. So with all of our research that we’ve done, you know, not only over the last year and a half, but obviously for the last, you know, 20 years, I have found that you have to have these three things in order to fully connect with a human. Now everybody has them within their personality. So it’s really important that on-camera,

we make sure that all three of these things are present in very specific times. So authority makes people act, it makes people buy. And I’ll tell you how we measure that in just a second. Compassion makes people confess. It makes you safe. It makes them engage in the comments. And I’ll tell you how we measure that. And then entertainment makes people watch,

right? So with each one of these things, we have a way to measure, not how you are in person, right? What we’re saying is we have to make sure how you are in person when you are with your very favorite person in the world is the exact same person. We call this emotional accuracy as you are on camera. So we look at these very specific types of your personality or parts of your personality.

So authority would be like, when you’re in charge of something, when you are in your element, teaching something, how do you act when you are with your very favorite person? We have very specific ways. We measure that with compassion. It’s when you’re being empathetic with people, when you are counseling them, when they come to about hard things or when you’re being vulnerable,

how are you sounding? Right. Voice face, body language, right? How do you sound? How do you move? How do you speak when you are actually doing those things with your favorite person in real life? And that entertainment is when you are goofing off, when you are being lighthearted, all those different things. Now, each one of these things are going to look very different for different people.

Some people’s authority is based in strength and empowering, and it can even feel a little bit aggressive. Some people’s authority is very much based in patients and making sure that people know that they know what they’re talking about by being very patient with them, right? Compassion, same thing. Some people are like, Hey, I’m gonna kick you in the butt.

Like we got to go. This is how I’m being compassionate. And other people are deep listeners. And they want people to feel very seen entertainment. Some people are dry, some people are bubbly. Some people are, you know, the kid in the back, coroner making jokes under his breath, right? There are different types of all of these different things.

So making sure that you assess how you are when you’re with your very favorite person, once again, I’ll give you the ways to measure these. You say, how is my voice? Right? The most common thing that I see with my clients is when they’re on video with me and they’ll be like, oh my gosh, I’m so excited. This is so great.

And then they get on video when we’re filming now. Like I am so excited to be here. And I’m like, okay, well, if your voice like this, we’re actually excited. And then you sound like this. When you’re on camera, when you’re excited, it’s not emotionally accurate. Right? A lot of people say the word authentic. I don’t actually like to use the word authentic for this very specific reason.

I like systems. I like to measure. I like to be measurable and repeatable. And authenticity is just a little bit vague. Right? I know what they mean. And I, I think that that’s fantastic, but emotional accuracy with exactly what I just did with my voice, we can say, is it accurate? Or is it not? Is that actually how you sound move speed when you’re excited,

when you’re being compassionate, when you’re being authoritative or not. Right? So we dive into all these different things. So now with the level, so once we find the type, once we find your specific personality type, then we assess the level. And as you go up in level, you are able to retain attention more. Your watch times go up.

That’s the entertainment part. You are able to know pain points, objections, and get more comments and engagement because your compassion is higher and you are able to move people to action in very real ways, any call to action that you give them, whether it’s by opt in, watch the next video. If it’s in a course, it’s very effective. And people do what you basically tell them to do,

right? So we have your type and then we start moving up your level. So within the authority, I’ll give you this. And then I’ll tell you a quick story. So within authority, we have five different levels. Only the top three, make you any money. The bottom two do not. The very bottom level of authority is the level of authority where,

okay, have you guys ever watched somebody and thought they have no idea what they’re talking? Right? You watch them in your life, their stuff, or associate my business with them. It would do bad things to my business. It would not be a good idea, right? Yes. Bottom level of authority. The next level is the most interesting level because it still does not make you money,

but this person is very likable. You watch their stuff, you share their stuff. You like route them on from the side, but you would never pay them money if you will watch them. But you’re like, oh my gosh, they’re making their dreams come true. This is so great. I would never hire them as a coach, but I would totally,

you root for them, right? I’ll share their stuff. This is great, right? Still doesn’t make you money. You can be the most likable person in the world have the most views in the world. But if you’re missing that authority, you still aren’t making any money. The next level up from there is employee authority. What this means, we’re basically saying how much control will somebody give you of their business?

Right? So with employee authority, somebody would give you a checklist. They would feel, and a lot of coaching clients, guys, if you are a coach and you get clients that feel like they will give you the checklist of what you’re going to do, you have employee level authority. Even if you can get them to bring you money. At first,

it is not a good client for you, right? Because they feel if they gave you a checklist of exactly what to do, you would be competent to accomplish it. The next one is contractor level authority. This is the good, because of the glides who feel like every single thing you do is up for discussion and that they can decide which actions they want to take.

And not because with contractor level authority, they trust you in one very specific area, but they don’t trust you with steps. They don’t trust you with direction. These are things like funnel builders, where we say, okay, you know, I am in charge, but I trust that you have expertise in building this funnel. But every single thing we do is up for discussion.

And in the very top level of authority is coach level authority. When you get to this level of authority, not only will people pay you and see you as a coach, but when you get coaching clients, you have been given control. They do what you say. They trust your expertise in your area. It’s something where you can give them steps and direction.

And they are ideal clients. They pay you money. And then they thank you for taking their money because you have this level of authority. They don’t question that, which is really great. So with all these things, like I said, I have not said anything about some personality types have more authority than others, right? Every single personality type, regardless if you’re introverted,

extroverted, loud, quiet, whatever, right. Every single personality type goes through these levels. Right. And the way that we measure, if you’re being effective in this is do people move to action, right? Do they buy, or do they opt in or whatever your call to action is at the end of your video, if they don’t, you know,

your authority is probably down in the second from bottom level, right. They probably like you, if they’re engaging with you and be like, oh my gosh, I’m being myself. Right. But they do not see the authority enough to buy from you. Go ahead. Given you so much. So yes, obviously so much to say, I’m sure our listeners are like,

oh my gosh, okay. I’m like, I’m not taking notes by the way, side note, Macola and I are always co moderating clubhouse rooms. So just join us in a clubhouse room and, and McCall, and even expand on this for you personally as well. So this is really interesting as you were breaking it out. One of the things that I,

from like the offer development side of it that I see as I see like level three and four, for those businesses that do like the done for you or the done with you type services, which is interesting because some coaches obviously also have another separate of their division of their company that is like the build-out or, you know, whatever that is the done for you.

But one of the things that I coach my clients on is you’re not the person that does that. You’re the coach. Like you have to have a separate team to do that, that works with that client to actually implement that. That is a way to grow and scale your business. But I’ve never clearly, I like the way I’m communicating it has gotten through,

but the way you communicated, even now, I’ll be able to say yes, because that’s a different level of authority in taking your coach authority and bringing it back down to the contractor or that employee authority is actually reducing your expertise and bringing you down a scale after they have paid you top dollar or whatever it is that you do. And so, as you were saying,

all of that, that’s immediately. What I was thinking is these entrepreneurs that are listening to this show, small businesses that are listening to this show that have the coaching authority, but also this separate, oh, I’ll do it with you or I’ll do it for you after I coach you and strategize how to do that. It’s a great business model. It’s a great way to scale and grow your business.

Like we even have a separate design division of our company, but I don’t do it. And so it’s just really interesting that you were saying that. So getting back to these coaches though, what do they do? McCall, if they are like, oh my gosh, I think I’m at this. I’m looking at my notes here. And like millions of McCall notes behind the scenes and with a pencil because my children steal all my pens.

It’s all we have left in the house and you know, like, what is the deal? If they’re like, oh my gosh, I met this employee level. I’m not showing up with confidence. How do you get them from where they are now to that level five that I have the authority here. I know what I’m doing. You know, me,

I’m like, I have a framework. Everybody has to have their own framework or method. How do we help them? Absolutely. Such a good question. So the very first thing that everybody needs to do is they need to make sure that their type is correct. Right. So you can be very competent. And if you’re trying to, you know,

I don’t know how many of your listeners know who Garrett J white is, but if Garrett J white and Russell Brunson, right? These are two internet marketers in the online space. If Garrett J white and Russell Brunson, or let’s say Tony Robbins and Bernay brown, or Marie Forleo, if they tried to use the same tactics, they would work for one of them.

And they would not work for the other one of them because they’re very different people, right? So if you look at Marie Forleo, the way that she entertains is very authentic to her, right? He uses her voice kind of like this, and she’s kind of spilling all over the place with Bernay brown. If Bernay brown, tried would be Marie Forleo,

it would be a disaster. And Renee brown people would be like, I don’t buy it. I don’t buy, it would not only like lower her entertainment level, but it would also lower her authority level. Right? The first thing that people can sense is just a yes or a no, they just say is something off here, right? Is something off.

So the first thing that you want to make sure that you do is we’re going to find emotional accuracy in all three of these areas. I’m going to give you a very specific thing that you can do in order to do that. Because being emotionally accurate first, then you can actually be likable, right? As soon as you’re likable, we can start to increase your authority with very specific things as well.

So the first thing that you’re going to do, I’m going to tell you a very quick story. That’s going to make sense of how to do this. So we’re looking for emotional accuracy. So when I was a voice teacher, voice acting performance teacher, I had this wonderful nine-year-old student named Beck. He was incredible, was like a bounce off the wall,

kind of spastic kid who seriously, it was one of my very favorite humans ever. And I had taught him singing lessons, voice lessons for the last six months. But this was the first time he wanted to try acting. It was big audition coming up. It was this all male version of Annie, which was really interesting. And he had a three line audition.

He had a script that gave him three lines and a description of how to say it. And he memorized his script because he was a go getter. And remember, my whole first business was before or after videos. So he comes down to my studio and he’s all ready to go. And I’m taught him singing any hard to get him to stand still.

Right. And I read this description. I like, he hands me the script. I read this description. It just says very excited, basically excited out of his mind, there’s boats in the Harbor. He’s never seen boats and it’s, it’s supposed to be really exciting for him. And I was like, oh my gosh, he’s going to nail.

This is going to be thing. So I’m like, okay, back, we’re going to do your before video. Are you ready? He’s like, yeah, I’m totally ready. And you kind of see him, like looking off to the side to recall his script, that he’s memorized. These three lines. I was like, okay, ready? Action.

And he goes, the boats, mama, you were holding me up to see the boats. And they were right there. I was like, yeah. Okay, cut. Let me kind of like bounce around. He’s like how’d I do all day. Well, I was like this time. I just want you to be excited about the boat. Right.

We just need to be excited about the boats. Oh yeah. Okay. Okay. Okay. I’m like, okay, ready? Action. He’s like the boat’s mama. You were holding me up to see the boats and they were right there. I was like, okay, let’s try something different. So Becca wants you to tell me about your very favorite thing in the entire world.

My puppy snickerdoodle it was the best puppy in the world. When you tell her to sit, she sits. And when you tell her to stay, she stayed. I was like, okay, here’s what we’re going to do. I want you to talk about snickerdoodle. We want to be just as excited as we are when we talk about snickerdoodle. But instead of saying snickerdoodle we are going to talk about the boats.

You understand? He was like, oh yeah, totally. I was like, okay, ready? Action. Just like the bumps, mommy girl, you have to see the bumps. And I can see the bright there. And what I understood in this moment with this wonderful nine-year-old is he didn’t have any emotional context for his copy. He had memorized it,

which for a lot of people, if they have something memorized or scripted, they feel like they are doing it well, when instead that accuracy was not there, he knew need to have something in his life that was emotionally accurate for the emotion he was supposed to be on camera. And then he just had to make the match. Right? Coolest thing.

I’ve had people when I’ve done this in trainings before say, well, what if I’m not like that? What if I’m not bouncing off the walls? Right? What if my snickerdoodle story? Cause this is what we call them. Sounded like the boats, mama, you were holding me up to see the boats. I can see them right there. That’s perfect.

Right? Because then the way he talked about snickerdoodle will be, you know, my puppy snickerdoodle, Snickerdoodles coolest. As long as it’s emotionally accurate, it’s effective. Doesn’t matter what personality type. It just has to be accurate, has to be emotionally accurate. So with which one of these things we want to create or have snickerdoodle stories for authority, compassion,

and entertainment, right? These are going to be, our triggers are trigger snickerdoodle stories. So when you are authority, when you’re in charge, when you’re in your element at home, right. With your friends, when you’re giving advice and you’re making sure that they’re moving to act in the way that you tell them, right. As a parent, whatever,

as a teacher, right? In person, what are you like when you are doing these things? Things, how do you sound? Next voice was different. It was from the boats, mama snickerdoodle to the boats, mama. Right? Don’t let that happen. If it’s snickerdoodle, then it needs to be the boats. Right? How do you move when these things are happening?

What do you do with your arms? What do you, how do you speak if you use very formal language online, but you will never use that in person. It is not going to translate very well. Right? So you need snickerdoodle stories for all three of these things. Once you find your personality type, you also can start to charisma that other people who have the same personality type in one of these areas,

but a higher level than you, right? Easiest way to do this, find somebody who you feel you can. I can see yourself in and pay attention to how they communicate with people, pay attention to what’s effective, take notes, see what they’re doing with their voice, with their face, with their language body, right. You can say, oh,

I like this person. They are like me authoritatively, but there’s so much more effective. Okay. I’m going to, I’m going to charisma, hack those things. I’m going to write them down. And I’m gonna use that. If it’s somebody who has a different personality type than you, like I said, Renee brown can not be Marie Forleo. If they tried to be something different,

it would be a disaster. Right? So find your personality type. First with authority, we have content strategy and we have charisma strategy, right? Making sure that we have emotional accuracy. And second it’s making sure that you’re hitting very specific things in your content that lead them to buy before you ever to what all of my clients called the pitch transition.

If you’re doing it right there, shouldn’t be a transition, right? The entire time you’re pitching or telling a story, you’re establishing your authority in a very specific way so that people ask people, ask for your programs. So when you get to the call to action, it is so easy. All of a sudden they just buy. They just buy from you because you have highlighted their pain in very specific ways.

You’ve highlighted your solution in very specific ways, right? The way that you deliver it and the content that you bring to the table, the way that you structure your own frameworks that I know April has helped you with. Cause she’s a genius. That’s what I would say. That’s where I would start. Oh my gosh, the sneaker, everybody needs a,

here’s my notes. This is what I wrote down. That we all need a snicker doodle story for each one of these areas, authority, compassion, and entertainment. So, okay. Next question. So when we are speaking in authority, when we’re speaking in compassion, when we’re speaking with the entertainment component, I know it all comes together into one video.

What if those different stories bring up like another part of our personality? Does that make sense? Like what if like when you’re talking, like some of this is like, this is really serious and blah, blah, blah. But then it goes into my, but like, does that make sense? Am I making sense? Like if part of when somebody is on video,

if the flow of the stories brings them through experiencing multiple, I don’t want to say multiple personalities. Cause that’s not the right word, but multiple emotions from me or whoever’s making the video. What about that? Like we’re taking them through a wave of different types of experiences through that. Is that okay or not? Okay. So you’re a genius because that’s what we call emotional mapping.

That is 100% of thing that we do in everything. So with very short videos, usually you will have one snickerdoodle story, right? Very short videos. You have one emotional point that needs to get across. That is one, but with longer form content, right? We have what we call an emotional map with every single part of your speech, of your life,

of your webinar, of your ad, whatever it is, right. If it’s long form video, then you are going to map out the different emotions that people need to feel. And then if you have a script you’re going to color coordinate it, right? You’re going to color code it. If you have bullet points, you’ll color code those, right?

So you’ll have a color for entertainment. You’ll have a color for authority. You’ll have a color for compassion. Now, every single video doesn’t have to hit all three, but your audience has to see all three in order to fully connect with you. A lot of times, compassion isn’t introduced into every single video, right? Deep compassion, vulnerability. Sometimes you don’t see that in an ad,

right? You only see entertainment and you only see authority, right? A lot of times when we get to sales calls, because those are also on video, compassion is extra high. You need people to confess their pain to you in very specific ways. So that compassion piece needs to be higher. So as you map out your video and you map out these snickerdoodle stories,

you’re going to emotionally map it at which points do they need to make sure that they are feeling very specific things. Now, what I have my clients do is write out, post it notes and just stick them to your computer with those snickerdoodle story triggers in them. So when you get to those stories, you can look at your trigger and you can say,

oh right, that’s the emotionally accurate thing. The other thing I would say is before every single video, we call it a cold open versus a warm open. You have to make sure that you get into that snickerdoodle story that you get emotionally accurate before you ever push record. The analogy that I like to use is imagine you were an Olympic sprinter and you decided,

right. You’re like I got this or you were nervous and you had a 400 rates, right? Four times around the track. And you decided that because you got it or because you were nervous, you were not going to warm up. The first lap of your race would be your warmup, right? Either your warmup is chosen for you or you choose your warmup,

right? So you would hit your stride after that first lap, after you’ve warmed up. Same thing with video. So many people push record. And then they’re like, well, five minutes into the video, I really get to be myself or like eight minutes into the video. All of a sudden I hit my stride. It’s because you are not in an emotionally accurate place before you hit record.

Instead you push record. And then you’re like, hello everybody. I’m going to try to do this right. 30 to 45 seconds before your video starts, before you push record, before you start a clubhouse room, before you start your podcast, before you start whatever, speak out loud, your snickerdoodle story. But we turn it into an I M phrase,

if your snickerdoodle story is all about, okay. Yeah, my entertainment, oh, that is silly. Right? Then you say, I am silly. I am silly. Right? Whatever this snickerdoodle story puts you in the frame of mind to write voice-based body language, right? You say, I am silly. I am silly until you get to the point where it is emotionally accurate and say other things out loud as well.

If it’s authoritative and you’re like, I am empowering. I am empowering. So then when you start your video, you’re not like, hi guys, I’m here. You’re like, hi guys. I’m here. And here’s what I’m going to do. I’m an emotionally accurate person. Who’s being authoritative right now. Instead of having to warm up, having that time and losing people at the beginning of your videos.

So you have a snickerdoodle story for each one of them. You map out those points. If it’s a long form video. And before you ever start those videos, you warm up, you do a warm, open 30 to 45 seconds before you get in that emotionally accurate place that we practiced with those snickerdoodle stories. So that it’s effective from the time you push record.

Amazing. You guys, this is so much more McCall, just poured so much more into us. And we discussed before we started recording that she was going to talk about on this show. So as usual you have shown up and delivered and supported our listeners and you are freaking amazing. It’s just, it’s super unique in what you do. And I love that you have found your stride and your super power that is so different from everybody else’s out there.

And it’s such a pleasure to work with you and to know you and do fun collaboration stuff with you. It’s just, it’s just always a blast. And I appreciate you so much. So this is ton of great information, and I know our listeners are going to go and really start applying the actionable steps that we talked about here. But like we have tomorrow’s next level entrepreneurs to listen to this show.

People hone in here because they want to know that they’re getting trusted business advice, not just anything it’s really proven and trusted by us. And so we also have people that are action takers here, where they know if this is something that you guys know that you suck at this, that this is something that it is like, this has been it everywhere else in your business.

You might be nailing or maybe you’re even not there, but you keep trying and trying and trying. And there’s just something off about the way you’re showing up. Then I want them to make sure that you guys know how to connect with McCall. In addition to our clubhouse rooms, in addition to the places where I would highly, highly recommend that you follow McCall and clubhouse,

and that you do join our rooms, because we talk about these things, she’s goes in there and workshops it, all these things and helps. But like what would be the first step for somebody who is thinking, Hey, listen, I am really struggling with showing up authentically. I have tried. I want to be myself. I want to be true to myself.

It’s deep rooted. I really want to be what I know that I am to my people, but I can’t figure out how, how do they work with you to start going through that process? Yes. The first thing that I want to be very clear on is most of my clients. So yes, absolutely showing up authentically. We work on that,

but a lot of my clients feel like they rock on video, but their sales are not great. Right? They’re like, I am very likable. I am myself, but I am not selling right. Or they are rock stars. 90% of my clients speak in front of audiences of hundreds, of thousands of people in person. But for some reason can’t sell on video,

right. Something doesn’t translate. So the way that you guys can work with me. I know that April’s going to put all of the links in the show notes that you guys can check out all the things, but I felt like the very best thing that you can do. I have a free thing for you. It’s charisma vault.com on charisma vault.com. I break down five days a week on Facebook live,

and then I put them into this vault different personalities using my charisma hacking tactics. So you can see people of all different personalities, all different levels broken down using these tactics so that you can find those people who have the same type of different levels@charismavault.com. When you sign up, you get an email that literally says, be my friend. And if you want to work with me,

you book a call. When that comes through to be my friend and we can bond and you can hire me as a coach and do all the things you also will get the free thing. No, you signed up, you get access to every single episode. There was like 120 episodes in there separated by different people, different personality types, different video types,

whether you’re wanting to do ads, whether you’re wanting to do Facebook lives, YouTube webinars, live presentations on stage. Any of those things, they’re all broken into different categories and really, really easy to find. Wow. Thank you so much for sharing that. That is incredible. Charisma, vault.com. You guys. All right, Ms. McCall, we really appreciate you.

Thank you so much for your wisdom and pouring into our guests today on the show. Super pleasure. Hey guys, such a great episode. I love that McCall was here and she spent so much time with us today. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about can be found by visiting sweet life co.com clicking on podcast. And this is episode number 233.

Thank you so much for hanging out with us. Please take a screenshot of this episode, tag me at April beach life and tag McCall Jones in it. And let us know your favorite part of this episode and how you’re going to apply her charisma hacking formula. I can tell you right now, I literally have two pages of notes from everything we talked about and I get to hang out with a McCall all the time.

And I learned so much on today’s show and I really trust that you did as well. Thank you so much for tuning in here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast and sharing this episode with your friends. We really, really Appreciate you. You guys have an awesome week and I will talk to you again.

Episode 232: How To Plan Your Next Team Retreat – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

GET THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO ONLINE BUSINESS MODELS, OFFERS and LIFESTYLES

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to have successful retreats. 

Summary:

So, you’re hosting a team retreat? Amazing! Team retreats are one of the best uses of our time and resources. Though I’ve hosted team retreats for decades, I’ve finally nailed a planning process that helps us actually accomplish the goals I set forth, in a way my team loves, that blows the ROI out of the water. 
 
This is a great episode if you’re looking for structure in your business retreats, but you’re equally focused on building up your team, accomplishing crazy big goals and having a lot of fun in the process. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Learn my pre-retreat planning process
  2. Know how I set my team up for success before, during and after our retreats
  3. Get excited about the power of breakout sessions and mini-masterminds amongst your team members

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. Welcome episode number 232 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m April beach host of this show and founder of the Sweetlife company and everything. We do everything you find here on the show are proven,

trusted business strategies to launch scale and amplify your online business for four and a half years and counting. And I’m so glad that you are here. Joining me today. Welcome to summer 2021. It is not kidding you a hundred degrees here in Colorado. It’s it’s what it’s been all week. So I hope wherever you are, you’re in a nice, cool place,

surrounded by water or doing something that you love as you’re listening to this show today, we are talking about a little bit behind the scenes. I’m actually opening up a little bit behind the scenes about our operations here at the Sweetlife company. And I’m sharing with you how I plan for our team retreats. As a matter of fact, as you’re growing your team,

if you haven’t yet started having team retreats. They’re one of the most powerful ways that I have found to not only grow our company and our footprint and the people that we impact, but grow those people who are part of our family, our company, family, and really elevate them into their purpose within our company. And if you listen to last week’s show with Tracy Lowe,

she was talking about how to get over the fear of hiring. And so I felt like this was a really good episode to continue on that journey. Last week, we talked about hiring this week. I’m talking to you about planning for this next team retreat, and we’re talking a physical retreat. And so welcome behind the scenes of the Sweetlife company, all of the show notes and everything that we’re talking about here can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

And this is episode number 232 in this show today, you can expect to hear the three steps that I plan before holding our team retreat. And some of the philosophies that I have about growing teams and getting work done during the retreat, both for me personally, and for my team. So thanks so much for joining me in, don’t forget to join me every single week at,

in clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time for the clubhouse room, where we get to jam on this topic. And I get to know you more. If we are not connected yet on clubhouse, you can find me at April beach. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s show. Okay. Welcome to the scenes of the Sweetlife company. You guys, let me give you a little history about this company.

This is my second business consulting firm, and this company has really been active in motion for about a decade and in my first year consulting firm, which is still an active company, we used to have these huge, amazing retreats, and they were all centered around work and business. And we used to head to trade shows together in Vegas, and it was so much it’s fun.

It was life-changing. I know for the women who are part of that company, and for me, it was really important. And then we went through this lull here with the Sweetlife company where we really didn’t do any of them until fall of 2020. Yes. In the middle of a pandemic, we hosted our first in-person team retreat for the suite life company after eight years.

And it was the most powerful week that we had ever spent together as a team. So we have team members all across the world. We have a team member in the Philippines, in the UK. Okay. And over here in the United States and we don’t have a big team. There are only eight of us, but our core team, it’s really important that we’re together in that we’re lifting each other up.

And I’m a big advocate of doing that for my team members as a company, when we come together, the ideas that we have produce and the energy in this space, and frankly, the love and respect and admiration for each other, Heather just overflows my heart. And so it was, it’s a really powerful thing when we did this in October and I wanted to do it again as quickly as possible.

So the one I had to share with you a bit behind the scenes of how I plan for team retreats, and then also to share just recently here in Colorado, Kelly, who is the COO of our company was here and we had a mini retreat. So I want to share these tips with you and explain to you my process and the three areas that I plan for before I host team retreats,

whether you’re doing a whole entire team retreat or whether you’re hosting a retreat for just you and one other person, it doesn’t matter. As a matter of fact, as I’m saying this out loud, these three steps could totally work for your own solo two retreats. I’m also a big advocate of escaping by yourself for retreat, weekends, whether it’s a writing weekend or a creative weekend or learning weekend,

whatever that is. I’m a big advocate of that as well. So tonight I’m going to give you these three steps and share with you behind the scenes. How I do this in an effort to help you, if you’re planning for your next team retreat, or maybe you’ve just never thought about hosting an in-person retreat, here’s some steps that can help you help you make that time that you’ve invested in spending together even more productive and frankly so much more fun than you ever imagined.

So the very first thing I do when I am planning for a retreat is I set our primary objective for the time away. It’s not necessarily just to retreat to hang out which that is a great part of it, but these are working retreats. And so as a leader, it’s important for me to set the primary aim, where are we going? What are we focusing on?

What are the goals of this particular short period of time together? And if you’re like me, that means that you always think that you have more time than you actually do. If you schedule for a five day retreat, those five days are going to fly by and what feels like five hours. So it’s really important that you’re realistic with yourself in what you can accomplish.

And you set a primary aim for the company as a whole. And the things that you’d like to have clarity on the things that you’d like to have built or created, or those primary aim outcomes after you set that primary aim. My very next step that I do is I share that primary aim with my team members. And I say, this is what I want to have accomplished.

This is what I want the end result of this time together to be in. Then I ask each one of the team members to dive into each of their areas of expertise before they ever get there in think about how their part, their super power, which is one piece to our entire company puzzle comes together to form that complete picture of the primary aim,

objective that we want to accomplish in that retreat. So before we ever get to the retreat, I want them thinking about what things could get in the way of them being successful, what processes that we might need to discuss before they ever get there. So it’s not a problem so we can flow through and really get things done. So I want them to think about any blocks that are going to inhibit them from working through that primary objective.

And then the second thing is I really want them to think about what it is that they want to bring to the table. I want them to get excited about how their specific area of genius or management fits into the primary goals. And so their creative juices are flowing far before we ever get to this. So they can start doing research. They can start doing whatever they need to do.

And here’s the most important part to me is that they can feel ownership, that they know that they’re important, that their area of expertise is needed. That without their part, we can’t do it, that all, you know, the sum of all parts equals the whole. Those are the things that are incredibly important to me as a leader. And that is why I do this.

So first I set the primary aim and the objective, and I have to be really realistic. Again, the reminder on that one is if you’re like me and you think that you can accomplish so many things, scale it back because I’ve done that way too many times. And I ended up leaving feeling like, ah, I didn’t do enough, or I didn’t get enough done.

So set smaller primary aims or objectives, or very clearly just one primary aim or objective. And then you can always add on to that as you go through. And as you do an awesome job being efficient in your goals during your retreat time. But my recommendation is to set something that’s clear and a little less aggressive, but also something that’s going to definitely move the marker on your business and give your company a transformation.

And then the second thing is I do is I share that with my team and I asked them to start getting ready to contribute to this awesome main goal, get them really excited about it. How can you make this great? How can you bring more to this? What creative genius do you have or thought or training? Is there something that you need to train the rest of the team on your area of expertise,

as it relates to what we’re trying to accomplish together as a company, and when they bring these genius to the table, it will blow your mind as long as you are intentional. And you share this with them ahead of time and you ask them to start dreaming big and getting ready to present in their area of expertise. It is so powerful. And I’m so grateful personally to my team for always being so incredible about this and in teaching me and teaching all of us and contributing to the greater whole,

the sum of what we’re trying to accomplish together. And then the third step. The third thing that I do is I make sure that we have an, what I call an afterburn implementation plan. So after you leave, there’s a lot of work to be done. It’s oftentimes like going to a conference and leaving with a whole bunch of things. And so it’s really important that even before we get to the retreat that I build in implementation time for whatever it was we accomplished during that retreat.

And then my team does it as well. So we have afterburn meetings. We have the afterburn benchmarks based on the primary objective that we need to meet together collectively as a team and independently. And before we leave there every single person who is part of this retreat, whether they’ve joined us physically there, or some of our team members have to join virtual,

unfortunately not everybody can always make it, but every single one of them has their own afterburn implementation plan and really aggressive benchmarks in order to accomplish this company, aim this company objective from our retreat together. Now, here are a couple of things about that, that I want it, that I will also want to share. That is much more behind the scenes,

but this is real business. Oftentimes one of our team members can’t get something done without support. And so what we do is we pair up our team members. So team members that need help accomplishing things during the retreat time, they will go and they will have their own mini strategy sessions or their own mini, like scrum sessions to work on certain things because they can’t do it alone.

And frankly, the whole entire group, can’t always be working together as a whole entire group for the whole retreat. That’s unrealistic. So sharing with you a little bit behind the scenes, we break off into these little groups, almost like these mini masterminds to accomplish certain things. And last year in the retreat that we had, you would find that like two people would be working on something sometimes up until two and three o’clock in the morning.

Cause they were on fire and everybody else’s, you know, passed out asleep, totally exhausted. And then the next morning three other people would be outside, you know, having coffee right on the ocean, talking about another project. So when you structure your retreat like this, like I do, it’s really powerful because you’re creating an environment that honors genius,

that honors disruption, that honors collaboration and that honors thinking outside of the box and in, so doing, you are going to honor the people that you’ve brought together in your team and your company is going to be so overly, amazingly blessed like mine is when you structure it. Like this is a, let me give you a really quick recap about how I structure these team retreats.

And so that if you were thinking about hosting your next internal team retreat in person, hopefully these steps and these strategies can help you achieve amazing results like we do at our retreats as well. So first of all, again, set your primary objective and be very clear about it. Number two, make sure you’re communicating this primary objective to each one of your team members and giving them permission and encouragement and an opportunity to pre-work about their zone of genius and how their Joan of genius can contribute to this greater company.

Objective that is going to happen in this retreat or the bigger project you’re working on. But also having them think about what things could get in their way, either to strategy-wise or systematically before they ever get to their tree treats. So when you guys are there, you are hitting the ground running. And then the third thing I do is I have a very,

very clear afterburn plan all for the company as a whole and the benchmarks that we’re going to hit, but each individual who is there develops their own afterburn implementation plan, and they set their own realistic, but aggressive benchmarks to get things done. And then the overall culture just sharing behind the scenes of what we do here at the Sweetlife company is that we hire based on specific areas of expertise.

And so we honor those people who are part of our team and we honor their expertise. And so we elevate each person and I’m a believer that when each one of our team members can see and grow their future lifestyle, profit plan and wishes within this company, then it’s better for everybody. And so with that being said, I advocate for independent thought disruptive thought.

And I also advocate for mini mastermind in amongst my team members, because truly that is how we collaborate and get more things done. And I just wanted to share this quick episode with you. Some of these solo trainings I do here on the podcast in the summertime are a bit shorter intentionally because I want you to get great proven business strategies and information that you can take to the bank right away and get you back to the beach when dive in that ocean headfirst or climb that mountain or wherever you are faster.

So thank you so much for hanging out with me here on this wheat life podcast. This is episode number 232 and all of the show notes and everything we talked about can be visited, can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast and click on 2 32. And if you felt like this was a great episode and you took something valuable out of it,

I would love to hear from you. You can ping me on Instagram at April beach life, or take a screenshot of this episode and tag me in it. Or of course, connect with me on clubhouse. I’m happy to jam with you and talk about how to plan your next person, company retreat, any time important to you to make sure it’s really effective and efficient.

And you are truly leaving that retreat and everybody in your team is leaving that retreat, getting your company to the next level. Thank you so much for hanging out with me. Thank you for subscribing to the show. I appreciate you guys so much. Thank you. And I know I’ve said this a bunch of times in the last few episodes, but thank you again for the honor of naming me,

taught at the moms and podcasting. You guys are absolutely amazing. And I will talk to you next week here on the show with the one and only McCall Jones. And we are diving into all about charisma hacking. You are going to love her. If you don’t know this woman, yet you also, if you are doing video marketing, don’t want to miss me next week’s episode.

All right. You guys be awesome. And I’ll talk to you soon.

Episode 230: Simplified Systems To Scale – with April Beach and Brittany Keeling

Brittany Keeling SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join us live on Clubhouse to get your questions answered. 
June 2, 2021 12:00 ET

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who are ready to scale and grow, but lacking systems to make it happen. 

Summary:

It’s time to scale your business, and you know that systems and SOPs need to be in place. But, if you’re like me, the thought of sitting down and documenting your tasks sounds as fun as having teeth pulled. Thankfully Brittany Keeling, our guest expert, is sharing practical ways and clear, simple systems you can follow to start scaling now. 
 
In this show we’ll also cover the difference between a platform, a system and automation. These common terms are misunderstood but important to understand. Stick with us and join us live on Clubhouse to meet with Brittany personally and get your questions answered after listening to this show. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Brittany’s 5 Steps To Scale
  2. How to create SOPs without crying 
  3. The importance of choosing the right platform to make your business easier to manage

Resources Mentioned:

 
ClickUp (Brittany’s Affiliate Link)
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. We are so excited to dive in depth. So number 230 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, and today’s guest is simplifying your systems and helping you put standard operating procedures in place so that you can scale your business.

And this is why this is incredibly important. We have so many companies that come to us and they want to launch courses and masterminds and memberships, and they want their suite of offers created. But oftentimes when we do a really good job launching scalable online programs, there are some systems that are missing in the backend. And when these systems in the backend are missing,

then what happens is a bottleneck. And you actually can’t even absorb all of the money and the clients and the hard work that you’ve gone into in order to actually launch and reap the benefits of the hard work. And so today on episode number 230, we’re diving in with Brittany Keeling, she’s the CEO of be elevated a business operations and launch expert. And she’s going to take you through the processes of how to really simplify your systems.

Now you’re going to laugh. I am being really transparent about how I hate creating SOP on this. So if you’re like me, you’re going to be able to relate real well to what Brittany’s saying. And we’re going to give you some amazing strategies to get through that today on this episode. So this is a great show for those of you guys who are in phases two through four of my Sweetlife business roadmap,

that’s the startup to scale up system that we’ve created. And in order to figure out what phase of business you’re in simply go to sweet life co.com board slash quiz, and you can take a very short self-assessment. So this episode, this business training that we’re talking about is specifically for those of you guys in phases, two, three or four of that business system.

What you can expect at the end of this is to first of all, know the most common standard rating standard operating procedures that should be in place for your business. You’re also going to get tips on software that can simplify your processes. And you’re going to know how to use the way that you work as a leader, as an entrepreneur, in order to put it into systems in a way that is actually going to happen for your business.

So I’m so excited to dive into all this. And of course, Brittany will be with us live on clubhouse, the Wednesday that this show drops. So if you are not a member or following the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club on clubhouse, please make sure you search us on clubhouse life. One word, just like this podcast. And you’re going to get access to that room where Brittany is going to be able to take your questions.

She’s amazing. And I’m guessing you’re going to want to have somebody like Brittany workshop with you, and that’s what the clubhouse is for. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. All of the show knows everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting our website@sweetlifeco.com forward slash two three zero. Oh, wait. I lied about that. All of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life coat.com

and then you got to click on podcast, but then it is episode two, three, zero. All right, you guys, I can’t wait to dive in with you. Let’s do it. All right. You guys welcome to episode number 230 here at this sweet life entrepreneur business podcast. I am joined by Brittany Keeling and yes, you’re probably getting entired me saying this.

I met Brittany on clubhouse, like all of our guests, like lately, all my new clubhouse friends and she is amazing. I was in a clubhouse room with Brittany and she said three words that I was like, oh my gosh, I need this woman to come and talk to us and really simplify and clarify these three terms. And you’re going to find out what they are here and just a little bit on the show,

but, you know, Brittany is a scaling with systems expert. And so that’s what we’re all about here on the show, giving you tools and strategies to move forward and scale your business. And so here we are, Brittany, thank you so much for joining us. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself and how you became such a systems ninja. Yeah,

I’m so excited to be here. So I have a really sort of unconventional background. A lot of people get into this space from, you know, they were in the corporate world and they decided to go off on their own. And I actually started my first business straight out of high school. So I was a serial entrepreneur for a few years, with a few various different businesses.

They were actually all online businesses as well. So been in the space a while and towards the end of 2018, I was feeling really burnt out with what I was doing. I wanted to change it. I just didn’t know what to do. And so I started asking people who knew me like, Hey, what do you think of when you think about me?

What am I good at? What are my strengths? Literally, everybody came back and was like, oh, you’re type a you’re detail oriented. You’re great at like being productive and helping people reach their goals. And I was like, okay, I can do something with this. So heading into 2019, I started trying to like make that shift. But right at that same time,

my dad who was a business owner actually passed away unexpectedly. And so I took over his company the day after he died. So yeah, I put my business hold and took over his company. I was 21 and it was a mess. He did not have. I mean, obviously I was grieving, but also he didn’t have anything documented. He did not have,

you know, a second in command. It was basically two months of me being on the phone all day, every day with clients saying, sorry, he’s not here anymore, but we’re still business as usual. It was very weird. But another thing that we ran into a lot was like the questions being asked and us not having answers. And that didn’t feel good for anyone.

Of course, we didn’t want to say, sorry, we don’t know the answer to that. But at the same time, my dad kept so much in his head, in his head and all over his desk. I mean, papers everywhere. So it was just really hard to try to run once he was gone. And thankfully we did end up selling that business four months later.

And at that time I had planned a move across the country for like a month later. And I was like, oh, I have now no income and no clients and no business, I should do something. So I relaunched my business and I went like full force headfirst into the deep end as an online business manager. And so at that time, this was like August of 2019.

And I just dove in, I invested in a mentor and I was like, you know, I’m just going to help other entrepreneurs create something that actually can outlive them. For me. It grew really quickly. I’ll give you the cliff notes version here, but essentially I created a bit of a monster that was doing for me the opposite of what I was trying to do for others.

And so I ended up restructuring a bit around this, actually around the same time, last year. So around like August, September of 2020, and now we work with clients in either one day or one week and we have a few signature offers, but we really essentially help them either get their systems in check, do like an overhaul, get them things simplified,

make it make sense for the long haul for them. Or we help them have a large-scale launch of a digital product or service in a short timeframe. We do like a seven day package for lunches or a one day for one week package for systems, depending on how robust it is. And clearly to have that done. We have to have a lot of really clear systems internally as well.

Yes you do. Oh my gosh. So first of all, congratulations on all your success. It’s so hard when you know you’re doing something well and all of a sudden it’s running your life. I love how you have modeled. We talk a lot about life, first business modeling here on this show, and I love how you’ve modeled your offer to actually deliver that time in life that you want.

Secondly, I’m so sorry about your dad. I lost my dad a couple of years ago and that is it just really hard still sometimes today I’ll like forget, and I’ll go to pick up a phone and call him and it’s just this weird thing or I’ll think, oh, I can’t wait to tell dad or whatever. And so I totally get that.

And I’m so sorry about that. Your dad also was a total entrepreneur like that entrepreneur brain, like the notes everywhere, papers everywhere. I’m literally not going to turn the camera. You guys, before this, behind the scenes, you were typing something out to think like that’s way out. I need to write in order to think and process in. But because of that,

then I have a million pieces of paper. And so your dad sounded like amazing man and very typical classic entrepreneur. And then the last thing, you know, I love how you have always been an entrepreneur out of high school. Like we have very similar stories. I absolutely love that. And so I’m just so glad that you were here on the show.

Now what you’re talking about from a business sense, first of all, it’s no surprise that you are so successful because what you need are what people need are the tactical things that you actually deliver. It’s the not sexy part that everybody desperately wants and needs. They’re the systems and that like the SOP and the client pipelines and the launch plans and the content plans and all those things.

So I’m so excited to talk about what we’re going to dive in today. And I know our listeners will be like, okay, bro, gen up so we can hear her talk. So, so like, so this is very exciting. And so I’m really, really excited about what you’re going to download for us today. So one of the things that we find as a company is a lot of companies come to us and they’re like,

oh, we’re so excited to scale with courses and offers. And all these things help us design them, but it’s like, let’s stop because they don’t have their systems and processes in place. Yet. I was actually in a clubhouse room last week when I was saying that to somebody and the woman ended up DME me on Instagram saying, so you said I shouldn’t do this yet until I have systems in place.

What are the exact systems? People don’t know, like you were saying before we started recording what they don’t know. So can we first for our listeners who might not be familiar with that, we first talk about what systems should you actually have in place before you start really scaling your business. Yeah, 100%. And I love that we’re talking about this because every business I’ve ever worked with that has overlooked these steps in the beginning has had to spend more time and more money and more energy backtracking to redo the things that were not done properly.

So my hope is that if you’re listening to this, you will not get in that position. It is never too late to start creating systems. And just like April said, it is not at face value, super sexy to talk about, but it is super sexy when you get weeks of your life back. So, yeah. So I have sort of a top five systems that I like to focus in on whenever talking about like getting started with systems,

mind you, there are a million systems in the world and I totally understand that, like can be really overwhelming. So I always just suggest starting with these five. And if I feel like too much, start with one, like just do one at a time because it’s going to be better than nothing. Okay. So let me make sure you guys heard this before.

She says this. When you walk away from this show commit to start with one, if this is an area you need to grow. So sometimes when we hear all five, it is overwhelming, but Brittany is going to download you on what they are. So I’m really excited about this. Okay. What are they? Yeah. So quick overview of the five systems I like to hone in on are a task management and project management system.

So this is where you can keep all of your ideas. So instead of having 12,000 places to look for things, it’s all in one place, an SOP standard operating procedure creation system. So you may or may not have heard of SOP before. And if you have heard of them, it may be in a corporate setting or it may just be like,

sure, I’ve heard of it, but I don’t know what to do with it. How do I create them? Having SOP are important, but you need actually know how to create them. So having a system for creating new SOP is on an ongoing basis is going to be huge. The third system is a content planning and repurposing system. Let’s be real,

pretty much all of us are marketing through social media. So we probably need to have a system there so that we’re not having to spend hours every single day typing up a last-minute caption just to get it off the door. Right then the fourth is a client management system. This one is huge, huge, huge, I’m such a huge fan of white glove experience and really kind of going above and beyond with the client experience because we want everyone in our sphere to feel really valued and a huge way you can do that is with your client management system.

And then the fifth and final is email marketing. And if you’re like, well, maybe I don’t have a list. This is fifth for a reason. It is very important of course, but you don’t have to start with this one if it’s not the easiest one for you to dive into, but we can keep it super simple. Maybe you have an automated welcome sequence or some sort of automated email marketing in place.

But even if you just have some sort of system for showing up regularly in your email marketing, like a task for yourself to write a new email once a month and send that out, it’s so much better than nothing, and you’re still going, nurturing your audience chat. Okay. So let me state those again for our listeners. And then we’re going to move on.

We’re going to dive into a couple of those today. So the five systems you recommend people have in place to start our task management, SLPs and a process for actually creating SOP and an SOP. If you’re listening in stands for standard operating procedures for any of you guys that didn’t know that number three is a system for content planning. Number four is the system for client management and number five,

it’s a system for email marketing. Is that right? That’s right. Okay. Let’s kind of pivot in. Let’s just focus in actually on those first two things tax management and SOP is here on this podcast. So when we’re talking about task management, there are so many things that businesses are doing on a regular basis. And oftentimes companies that are looking to scale,

you have just very few people doing all the things, talk to us about how you recommend and how you really kind of lasso all of these things that are happening in order to get them into one place. Yeah. So I think the biggest thing is like, you know, there are first of all, so many ideas in our brain at any given time.

And even if we just think about the ideas alone, not even the to-dos, it’s like you could have a million dollar idea, but if you write it on a sticky note and forget it exists, there goes your million dollars. Right? So I’m a huge advocate for getting things in one place. So initially, I mean, I would start with hunting down all the things you have all over the place.

If you’ve got just tasks and ideas and to do’s everywhere, get them all streamlined in one place from there, you can probably then start diving into breaking things into categories. And again, this can be really overwhelming. And like a lot of times people are like, well, I just have one big list. What do you mean I need categories, but we can structure things very strategically when we are intentional about it.

So if you zoom out of the day-to-day of your business and actually look at everything from a bird’s eye view and look at all of the tasks on your list, look at everything that’s popping up. Do you want assessment of what do I, and if I have team members, my team do on a daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, so on and so forth basis.

And what maybe aren’t we doing that needs to be done more regularly and even seeing like what tasks have popped up that are not recurring tasks, but you’re noticing them coming up more and more often that can really help guide you and figuring out what the departments of your business really are. So being able to identify it, doesn’t have to be like 18 departments.

You don’t have to have a whole marketing team to have a department for that. When I say departments, I’m really, especially for small business owners, mostly honing in on the fact that like, there really are still segments of our business, where if we were to scale to a much larger level, we’d likely be outsourcing those two different team members. Yeah.

And that’s usually where most of our listeners are. They’re like really ready to the point they want to scale. They have all these things that are happening. And many of them have even really started building their teams. But yet they’re not exactly sure. Also with that being said, many of our listeners are to this point where they also have a, just a ton of,

VA’s doing a couple little things for them at once. So as they’re listening to this, I’m guessing you’re the expert here in this process. You also really recommend that even all these little pieces, even if it’s somebody who’s only working a couple hours a month doing a task for you that you develop SOP for that as well. Correct. 100% a gauge that I like to use is like,

okay, if you were to take on 10 clients tomorrow, would you be ready? Yeah. My business mentor talking more says that all the time. He’s like, you know, it doesn’t matter if we get you all these clients in here, he’s like, you know, it can be like, it’s like a fire hose. If you do not have these systems in place,

like don’t go out and grow. Right. Oh, that’s so good. That is such a great analogy. Oh my gosh. So you’re just going to lose them. All right. And that’s why when companies come to us and they’re like, we want to develop our signature offer. We want our signature courses or masterminds. We’re like, okay, are you going to be able to handle it?

Because if you can’t then literally everything. That’s like an overflow out of the top and you know, let’s make sure your stuff is in place. And so I love this conversation we’re having. So in the process and behind the scenes, you were sharing how you guys go about doing this. You have a software that you love, and I’m just going to say out loud,

you know, Kelly Buckner, our director of operations for our company is going to geek out when she hears this episode. Because I think that what you’re talking about is like right along the lines of something that she would love to look into more. So talk to us about how you go about this process for people. And, and also, I mean, they are in a million different places.

All these things are in a million different places. Let’s talk about simplifying software for a minute. Yeah, absolutely. So a lot of entrepreneurs are, and you know, we’re in 18 different softwares when in reality there’s probably one or two that could replace the bulk of them. And I think, you know, at the end of the day, maybe you’re going to pay more for one software,

but then you’re going to be able to let go of three others. And it’s so worth it. Now, if you’re using six softwares and it’s like, you know, you don’t have any problems and it’s working well for you and future casting. You’re not going to have any problems. Great. If it’s not working or if it is working, you don’t need to necessarily change it.

But if you’re starting to grow and you’re ready to scale, and you’re like, you know what, being in all this software is just really not working for me. Then. I mean, something that my business does all the time is like helping businesses get streamlined into less software or at least suffer. That makes more sense for them. And so one of the things that we do is we utilize click up and this is where we use like our task management and our project management.

But also we use this as like the one-stop for the whole business. And we do this with our own business, as well as for our client’s businesses. Because if you’re listening, I can almost guarantee if you don’t have some sort of system in place, you’ve probably got your Google docs, a hundred different docs or folders in your drive. You’ve got your handwritten notes,

sticky notes, your whiteboard, your mirror, that you’re writing on your, your, everything, just everything notes on your phone. You’ve got your, your 18 journals on your desk. Like it’s just all over the place. And so being able to create an atmosphere where it doesn’t feel like, oh God, another place I have to look every day and instead positioning it in your mind.

And also in the way you structure it as the only place you need to go and look at things every day, it really is a game changer because instead of waking up, you know, three hours into your slumber, remembering that you forgot to do three tasks that are like really important, and now you’re going to be panicking about it. You can have one place to put them all as soon as they pop into your head and then literally forget about it.

Like you can just forget about it and come back to it later. Yeah. I love that. And that’s so important for entrepreneurs like me too. Not officially, but pretty officially have ADHD. And so this process of going through and understand like the tasks, changing task management, having things in one place is, is really, really, really important.

And another thing you said just triggered something that I like to tell businesses all the time. And this is what Brittany is talking about. This is why this is important. I like to say, you know, how would you carry your business today? If you were already a millionaire, you’d already have these systems in place, and you’re never going to be there until you have these systems in place.

This is the bottleneck. And this is so important. And you know, we’re not saying you have to use one software or another, like you can do it whatever way works for you. But the reality is, is simplified systems scale. They do simplified system scale. And so this is so incredibly important. Okay? So in this process you’re going through and people have all their ideas and they’re bringing their,

all their ideas together, taken all their sticky notes and their pieces of paper. And they’re getting it. Like you guys use click up for this. How do you recognize, are there like certain departments of a business that are standard or typical for, you know, service-based businesses and online entrepreneurs where you tend to group together type of department. So you sort of,

our listeners can kind of at least clarify their mind and start heading in one direction of how to organize their stuff. Yeah. Such good question. So some like standard departments that we like to utilize are like your headquarters, right? So for us, at least in here, we house various things like our capacity so that anyone on the team can come in and see what we’re working on.

Like what big package, but also what’s coming. We have like the next several months booked out and we can all see it and be prepared. And then also if I’m on a sales call, I know what’s available and what’s not I’m meeting notes, go in there, employee onboarding various things like that. Team resources go in there. So like SOP is our brand kit,

affiliate links, testimonials our team agreement. So we have like, all the team has come together and agree. Like this is our way of working so we can all reference that. And then another department is operations. So you’re going to have your recurring operations more than likely that may be broken down into various things like social media. So Instagram, Facebook,

LinkedIn, so on and so forth. Maybe your email marketing can go and hear your metrics management. So if you’re needing to check on your numbers weekly, the list, of course. Yeah. Right. I mean, I’m thinking in my mind, I’m like podcast processes, like for us, you know, podcast processes, you know, PR speaking,

client management. So as you guys are listening to Brittany talk, just think about like the grouping of repetitive tasks that you’re doing in your business and start to figure out what falls under each one. And then take an opportunity to understand that for each one of these, you need to develop these standard operating procedures, which brings me to the next question. So we hear this all the time and I’ll be really honest with you.

Especially somebody that’s like always in all directions. I own four companies. I have three kids. I’m always on an airplane somewhere when somebody tells me and it’s okay if you have to tell me this, but let’s just keep it real here. When somebody tells me that I have to sit down and document every single thing that I’m doing in some capacity or some way for like a week straight,

first of all, I’ve never, ever, ever done that. I can’t think of anything worse than doing that. And so what I ended up doing, and this is why, if you’ve also listened to the show before, I’m like not the best person to work for. I mean, I have an amazing team, thank God. But you know,

it, it’s kind of hard. So it literally, I’m not kidding. You it’s taken me 25 years to get through. And so when I go down and I document like an SOP, it is usually like in a scrub, like we’re working on a project like that day. That is my work I’m going to do. But going through my everyday,

you know, week just kind of documenting my time and managing my time and stuff. You couldn’t actually, I’m being so honest. You’re going to like school me here. Probably like you couldn’t pay me to do that for my own company. Like I am Wade. I’m like all off in a role. Is there any other way to do it? Yeah,

totally. Okay. Good. Cause that way sucks. Right? At the end of the day, it’s like we’re busy and the thought of creating a whole system and process and documenting the SOP, Internet’s going to take me three hours longer than if I would just do it all myself and then never outsource it. Right. Right. But of course in the long run,

we know that’s not true, but it doesn’t make it any to do in the moment. So I do have a philosophy that I like to follow a system. I like to follow with creating these because most business owners are very similar to you. Like I can’t say that I have a lot of fun sitting down and creating all of SOP for my business.

And so if you don’t like it, then that’s yeah. Then they really are tough work. Okay. Right. And any, you don’t have to do it alone. And it’s actually to be so much easier than we think. So here’s what I like to do. And here’s what I tell people to do. Start identifying what needs to be documented.

Right? So obviously your recurring tasks, easiest thing to start with, you know, it’s going to happen on a recurring basis. So start there. And once you’ve identified, this needs an SOP, take a loom screen recording. The next time you do the task, you can literally do the task, the exact same way you would without documenting anything,

but screen record it and talk through what you’re doing as you’re going. And then if you have a strategic and like, well put together template for the written SOP, you can then give the loom or whatever kind of screen recording. You utilize to another team member. You can give it to somebody else and they can build out the SOP, the written version.

They can include the video version in there. They can plug it into whatever. You know, if you’re using a task management software, get it in the right places, create templates within that. If you want, it can get really nice and crazy robust, but it doesn’t have to. And even better when you do it that way, you now have a video,

an audio with your video and a written. And so no matter what kind of way somebody learns on your team, you’re meeting them where they’re at. Okay. Thank you. So I do that. I do LUME recordings and then you’re like Dropbox fanatics, and then I’ll put it in Dropbox. But I really thought that I was like duck taping the process together.

And then, you know, we can get them transcribed through our Searchie and everything that we do. So thank you for saying that because I literally is like, this is just the way I work and it’s just the way it’s going to be. And this is the way I work and I just, I’m never going to change me. So I hope this works out for y’all,

which, which it has. I mean, I have an amazing team, but in the back of my mind, I’m always like, you suck at doing this because you’re not doing it the way it’s supposed to be, but I know I would never, ever like literally over my dead body, am I going to sit down and write down my steps that I am doing?

So, yay. I feel a little redeemed here on this show and then Kelly in the process, like she does this as well. And so like listening to the podcast, you guys all know like what we really like struggle with behind the scenes. We try to share it all with you. This is one of those things that I haven’t really liked so much.

Okay. So in that process, you know, documenting it in whatever way that works. I also do audio recordings on my phone. So I do audio as well too. And that has seemed to work, you know, to upload them for certain files as well for my team and our team Dropbox folder, I should say, hopefully that’s acceptable, but it does work.

Okay. So after somebody has, you know, really documented these processes, let’s go back and let’s kind of circle back and let’s talk about the importance of simplified software. Share with us more about click up, why you guys use that, why this is your chosen spot to do this in really why, of all the things out there, as, you know,

there’s a million there’s Monday and Salesforce and all these other things, like why is this your go-to? And so our listeners is, is there processing can think, oh, well maybe I should check that out. Yeah. Great question. So let’s tie it in with SOP is right. If you create a hundred SLPs and they’re sitting in a Google drive that nobody knows exists,

what’s the point, right? Versus if we can pull them in to a software, like click up, or if you’re using something else, you know, whatever you’re using, bring it into one place so that someone can super easily search the name of what they’re looking for, or go to the SOP folder or list and look through it, what they need to find.

And you can even from there, so like in click up, you can create like a template of tasks essentially. So you could also turn your SLPs into templates if it’s like things that need to be tasked out. So if you’re onboarding a new team member, for example, that can be a template. Every time you onboard a new team member, you duplicate the template,

you assign things out and boom, like you’re good to go. Okay. So this is making my mind totally gone in a different direction, which I won’t on this show, but I also teach entrepreneurs how to license and scale their content programs and systems. And every single one of them has a different place where they build those systems. And so what I’m hearing you say is it click up,

could possibly be a place for those of you guys that this is really advanced scaling. But those of you guys who are listening to this show who are licensing your courses, your content, you’re creating a certification program. All of these mixed level scaling could use a software like this to really streamline the distribution of your processes and templates a hundred percent. And you can even like,

you can like sell templates. You can share templates. I mean, you can do so much with it. And the reason that I really love click up above all the other platforms, I’ve, haven’t been in all of them, but I’ve been in many of them. And what I tend to find is kind of twofold. One click up is 10 steps ahead.

Of many of the other platforms, other platforms are coming out with a lot of the things click up has, but they’ve had it for months. So why not choose the software that is going to be 10 steps ahead. And two, it has a very, very, very customizable interface. The aesthetic of it. You can look at it in so many ways and customize fields and can do it everything in your own brand colors.

I mean, there’s so many ways to go about it. So I, I love it. I it’s just the, in my opinion, I clearly am a nerd about this platform, but I’m a huge fan. I’ve been in so many different ones and it just has proved to be the best and has the most robust options for what we need. Okay.

This is, I really love this episode. Thank you so much for everything you’re pouring into us. Okay. Before we wrap this up, I do have to say, I love the aesthetic side women entrepreneurs. We really like this side. Like, I really love the fact that I can change the picture on the back of my Trello board. I mean the stupid stuff like that makes me really happy.

So I love the fact that it does offer that option as well. And I appreciate you sharing this resource so much here. You guys, as you’re listening, we’ll make sure that we are going to share Brittany’s affiliate link to click up with you so you guys can go and play with it and try it out. There are three different words I would love for you to,

this is the circle back from the beginning, define for us as we close up this show. And I think that the clarity and the definition of each one of these, whether whoever’s listening is new or established is going to be very, very helpful. Can you please define the difference between a platform, a system and automation for any of our listeners that aren’t crystal clear on these saints?

Absolutely. And it’s really common to not be crystal clear on this because some of these buzz words right there, total buzzwords are used interchangeably when they shouldn’t be. And so it’s confusing for most people. And so what I have found is that if you’re not clear on what each of those are, it can be really difficult to know what you need or ask for help or find the right resources.

So I’m really passionate about helping find clarity throughout these. So let’s start from, you know, a platform. So a platform is like a click up, right? Click up is a platform. Or of course there are other platforms like, you know, later first scheduling on Instagram or depths auto active campaign. There’s so many, right, but having a platform does not mean you have a system.

It’s really how you utilize the platform that you can create systems within a platform being signed up on click up does not mean you have a system being signed up on any software does not necessarily mean you have a system. You can create systems within the platforms. Like we create systems all throughout clicker and they can go hand in hand, but they are different things.

So a system is something that can actually be documented, right? A system is something we can put into an SOP that we can duplicate and do over and over again. And then an automation of course, is something that is going to be automatic. But again, it’s different. Not all of your systems are going to be automated. Some of your systems are not going to be automated and that it can still be a system.

It doesn’t have to be automated to be a system and you can house. So an example here too, all three of these things can go hand in hand is within click up. There are automations. So you can have the platform I’m just using click up as an example here, you have to pay me to say this, but wish they were. So you could use click up as your platform.

You could house your content creation system in here, and you can have automations in here as well to move things accordingly. So they can all go hand in hand. They are very different things though. And so I think being able to define those is really, really helpful. And being able to talk about things. Yeah, I love it. I wrote down that quote,

having a platform does not mean you have a system. And I think that is so powerful and that’s really a great way to wrap up today’s show. Of course my like business coaching minus went crazy. Now I actually want you to reach out, to click up and have them sponsor a room on clubhouse in pay you to talk about it. Like, let’s get this right.

So click up, we’re going to tag you in this and you need to be, listen, you need to hit Brittany up, sponsor her clubhouse rooms because it’s, it’s good for everybody. So, all right, well, I just really appreciate your expertise so much. And we are going to be live in clubhouse on June. What did we say?

I think it was June the night at 12 o’clock Eastern time in the club that goes with this podcast. So this podcast club is called the sweet life entrepreneurs club. Search it up on clubhouse, hit me up, hit Brittany up, like send us a DM. If you want to know where the club is because Brittany sent me coming in live and we’re gonna be taking your questions from today’s show.

And this episode is going to drop on Monday. You have two days to listen to this and come in and let Brittany roll up her sleeves with you and help you guys get your SLPs and systems in place, you know, answering platform questions, whatever it is, we are here to serve and support you. Not just listen to this show, but to implement the show and put it into action.

So now you have a couple of, you have a resource as well, and I’m going to make sure all the things that we’re talking about here in the show notes for you guys. So what is a free resource you have for our listeners? Yes. I have a pretty doozy guide. It’s called five systems to take your business from scattered to scaling.

And it goes a little more in depth into all five of the systems we touched on at the beginning of this episode. And then also I actually include in the guide my own SOP templates. So there you go. Yeah. I’m so glad. Oh my gosh. An SOP template. Okay. So all of the show notes are going to be found@sweetlifeco.com like on the podcast.

And this is episode number 230, and everything’s going to be in there for you as well. But we want to see you guys in clubhouse, even you, Android users are getting invites now. So we want to see you guys in clubhouse. And if you need an invite, hit me up on Instagram. We have actually a lot of club invites they’re releasing to us.

So we’re excited. You can RSVP for this event and we’ll get you an invite to that, Brittany, thank you so much for your time. I’d love to everything we’ve talked about and clearly appreciate you confirm me. I’m not totally crazy about the way I’m supposed to be doing things and just really appreciate all your expertise, how clearly you explained things and those you guys who are listening,

please follow Brittany, pay her and follow and just thanking her for her expertise in Korean and tossed bang. It’s great. Thank you. I appreciate you. Thank you. Have a lot of fun.

Episode 229: Creating Your Strategic Financial Roadmap For Your Business – with April Beach and Arnesha Bobo

Arnesha Bobo SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Check out CFO for Women’s Small Business Resources

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for small business owners who are looking to scale but they’re missing the strategic foundational plan. 

Summary:

When it comes to entrepreneurship, people just start working. But, sooner or later when the time comes to scale, 60% of businesses realize they are missing a strategic financial plan and the foundations needed to move forward. Today’s guest expert Arnesha Bobo, Founder of CFOForWomen.com breaks down her Smart Financial Roadmap and the first 3 steps to building your strategic plan in detail. 
 
If you don’t know your numbers, don’t know how to analyze KPIs and you want your business to grow,  this is an ideal business coaching episode to get your foundation in place.  You’ll be surprised that the first steps actually have nothing to do with your numbers at all. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Have 3 clear steps to start creating a clear financial plan
  2. Understand how vision and core values must be part of your financial plan
  3. Be aware of the 4 numbers you should know every month in your company

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate This week on episode number 229 of the suite life entrepreneur podcast. We are talking with Arnesha Bobo about how to create strategic financial plan for your business. Now, this episode is incredibly important because she actually says it’s 60% of businesses come to her.

 

Who’ve already been in business for an extended period of time and never have a strategic financial plan. So in this episode, Arnesha breaks down everything that you need to know, and the first three steps to create your strategic financial plan. So the reality is as entrepreneurs, we just kind of get in there and start doing the work, doing the business,

 

selling the service and miss a lot of foundational steps. But when it’s time to scale your business, or when it’s time to get funding, when it’s time to apply to be a member of, of some sort of a, a board or an organization, people are going to want to see your numbers and you need to see your numbers in order to continue to be profitable.

 

And then this is the episode where we dive in and help you really start building that out. And so that, you know, the process that you get to go through in order to fully take control of your numbers and your business. So let me give you an indication here of who this amazing woman is. First of all, yes, I met her on clubhouse.

 

I know don’t laugh at me. We are going to be going live in clubhouse on Wednesday that this show airs again. This is episode number 229, and that is going to be Wednesday, June 2nd, 2021, 12 o’clock Eastern time. Join us in clubhouse because what we’re talking about here, I understand that you might have some questions. So it’s really important that we are then taking this from just a podcast,

 

this one way conversation and giving you an opportunity to really workshop with our Neesha, to get your questions answered. And so Wednesday, June 2nd, join us at 12 o’clock Eastern. Let me give you an idea of who this amazing woman is. She tells her story. So I’m going to summarize this here, but our niche as a small business CFO in strategic planner,

 

she works with women, led organizations who are ready to gain visibility in their finances and build a smart growth strategy together with her clients. She focuses on three key areas, capital structure, profitability, and growth planning. She is absolutely amazing. I know that you’re going to love her. And I’m so excited to invite you to tune into this episode. Again,

 

as we always say, all the show notes can be found by going to Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number 229. So all these links, everything that we’re talking about here are going to be waiting for you on tap. And if you’re a new listener to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, thank you so much for coming. I’m April beach, founder of the suite life company.

 

And I am absolutely stoked to have an opportunity to welcome you on this show. This show we’ve been named top 50 moms in podcast, but the show isn’t just for moms, all of you are welcome here. And we deliver a business strategies and trainings that other coaches charge thousands for. As a matter of fact, this podcast is part of one of the giving missions of our company.

 

And we’re pouring into you week after week for four and a half years straight so that you know that you can take the business trainings and strategies that you hear here, here on here, here, here, here on this show, and truly implement them and take them to the bank. So thank you so much for tuning in. Thank you for being a subscriber of this show.

 

And I appreciate you so very much. Now let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. All right, friends. We are joined by my new clubhouse friend. Yes. I know another new amazing club friend that I have met. And so grateful for clubhouse are Nisha Bobo. And she is here because of the fact that she has been in clubhouse rooms with me,

 

literally drilling down on what women need to know about their money. She is absolutely amazing. She’s a CFO for women. I can’t wait for you to meet her. And today on the show, we’re talking about creating a strategic financial roadmap for your business. And our Nisha is going to walk you through the steps in order to do that. So, or Nisha,

 

thank you so much for coming to the show. Thank you for spending time with me here and all the time that we’ve spent together on clubhouse. And tell us a little bit about you and what you do. Yes, absolutely. I help women become better leaders in their business by improving their decision-making women are the fastest growing demographic of business owner. Yet they are the least paid.

 

They’re not growing in other industries. And most importantly, they’re not getting access to funding that they need to help either grow their business or expand in other markets. So I help women. We’re all things, money with all things, money. I love that. Okay. So reminds me. I was actually in a meeting a week ago with an author of a book it’s about the new entrepreneurship and he was talking about women and minorities and immigrants as well coming in,

 

and that they don’t have funding, but this gentleman who funds a lot of regular business was saying, they’re looking at ways to create new programs to do that. So just decide now, but it was very interesting to hear and just triggered me to say that because I do think that the funding hopefully is coming around, but like what we’re going to talk about today,

 

there’s a lot of things that every business owner needs to do to get their ducks in a row before anybody will even pay attention to fund them. And those are the things you’re going to share with us today, but tell us a little bit about you and you know, really how you got into this, why you started your company and your, your journey about getting yes,

 

absolutely. I have a 14 year corporate accounting career. So I’ve worked with very large companies. I’ve managed multi-billion dollar portfolios. And when I first started my company, I was at a nine to five or so I was a part-time entrepreneur, like many businesses starting out. So I would, you know, work my full time job, my nine to five.

 

And then I would go home and work on my business, five to nine, how I became a consultant. I actually work with the procurement department for some corporations. And if you are familiar with the procurement department, that’s the department you go through as a business owner to get corporate contracts. So you have to go through a procurement process, you have to register your company with them.

 

You have to submit financial information, you have to apply. And then you start bidding on different contracts that they have. So you can do this at a corporate level, government level, city, state, and federal, but I was at the corporate level and I noticed a lot of businesses did not qualify to do business with these corporations because their business head,

 

no proper foundation. So they were not set up correctly. They didn’t have access to financial information because they only met with their tax accountant once a year. So I found myself a lot of days working with business owners to set their foundation up just so they could do business with that corporation. I am not a gatekeeper. If there’s an opportunity for me to help you come on and come on,

 

but I want to make sure that everything is done correctly. So that’s how I started my business is helping other small businesses get into these corporations to do business with them. And then it started to grow from there. I later joined a national organization for women. It’s called<inaudible> the national association of women business owners. And I joined to become a better business owner because I had that corporate mindset and everything was structured,

 

but I wanted to learn how to be a business owner. So I joined this organization, you know, attended some events, was able to do a couple of reasons, patients or answer questions that event. And I caught the eye of the president at no idea that she had watched me or she, you know, I was on her radar. Well,

 

she asked me to join the board. And as I actually, yeah, I joined the board as a financial secretary. So I was responsible for doing all of the financial reporting for the organization at our chapter level. And I started working with a lot of female owned businesses. So that’s how I, you know, that’s why my core are women because I was able to help them birth.

 

And I’m a woman. I love women. I love to see women win mommies, aunties, everybody. I want all women to win because I coming from corporate America and just seeing the huge disparities between men and women, the earnings, all of that, I was like, oh no, any opportunity I can help women. I’m going to do that.

 

So that’s how I kind of got started. And I actually left the organization because relocated to Atlanta. So I’m in Atlanta, Georgia, the home of entrepreneurship. And I actually joined another business organization. It’s called the Atlanta black chambers. It’s a chamber dedicated to helping black businesses grow coffee. I have the executive director of course started. So, you know,

 

do a lot of great, amazing things. Patients with the chamber got into leadership. So I chaired a couple of committees. I co-chaired another counting the financial services committee at one event. One of my chamber members actually invited me to speak at an event because she was a program manager for a city accelerator. And I was able to get a contract with the city.

 

So I got my first contract sole source. I didn’t have to go through a bidding process. And that’s one of the longest standing contracts that I have. So now I teach a financial consulting to new and small businesses here. Wow. That is an amazing story. I mean, your story is just amazing. There’s so many things that people can take away from that story alone.

 

And I think that like, it is remarkable. You are clearly very good at what you do, but I love the part of it where you just did it and people recognized it because you did the work and people recognize you for just like being true, doing your skill, doing the work and connecting important into others. Yes. Thank you. If I was building a personal brand and didn’t know that I was building a personal brand.

 

Yeah. You had no idea. That is so amazing. That is so cool. Congratulations to you. And I hope our listeners are like, okay, like I can do this. Like there, isn’t always some big, huge, hidden strategy behind it. It’s just leading with what you know, doing good work and pouring into people and you get recognized and you get elevated.

 

You get brought up. Yes. We could just end the podcast. This is today’s lesson, boys and girls. Oh my gosh. Okay. So you currently teach businesses on a regular basis. How to get their financial Jackson row, how to get their foundation in place. You do it on clubhouse all the time. If you guys are not following our Nishawn clubhouse,

 

please make sure you do that. Is it our Nisha Bobo? Yes. We’ll make sure that’s in the show notes for you guys as well. Plus of course our Nisha is going to be going live with us in our suite life podcast, clubhouse room though, week this show drops and you get to connect with her even more directly and bring your business questions.

 

So that’s just a side note, those of our listeners that know that, and can’t wait to have this conversation in a live setting. So you can get a chance to really workshop with our listeners too. So what we’re talking about today is really creating a roadmap for your business. And you have a method, you have a way that you bring businesses through this and it’s so important.

 

And when you explained it to me, kind of behind the scenes, before we started recording, I was like, oh yeah. Oh yeah, that’s really, really good. So today you’re going to guide us through really the first three steps of that process of that business roadmap. So why don’t you go ahead and get us started here for those of our listeners.

 

You guys should have a pen and paper, please make sure you’re taking notes or if you’re driving or at the gym or wherever, you know, you can always come back and replay this. So what is the first thing businesses should do in order to really start creating a great foundation? Thank you. Yes. So the very first step is creating a solid foundation.

 

I work with hundreds of business owners a year and they, most of them just get into it. They just get into business. You just started doing it. There was no business plan. There was no page today. Your business is not registered. You don’t know which state you’re at should pay taxes. And like they’re all over the place. So I’m going to help you right now,

 

create a foundation, a solid foundation. You need a business plan or some type of strategic plan, right? We’re known in our industry for strategic planning. That’s our jam. We do strategic planning from the top to the bottom of your organization. I have a top down approach. You need a plan. The very first step of creating your foundation, whether you are a new business established business,

 

you’ve been in business 15 years, every single year, you should have a plan. And that plan should start with your vision. What is your vision for your company for this year short term and long term, right? Where do you want to grow this year? What do you want to accomplish this year? What do you want to improve this year?

 

What do you want to be this year? What is your vision? Create a vision and stick to it because you are the leader of your organization and your team is going to follow you in your leadership style. They need to understand your vision. They need to understand where you’re trying to go. I had a meeting this morning with my marketing strategies that I just hired.

 

And I sent her my strategic plan and she was like, oh my God, I’ve never had this happen before. Right. Never had a strategic plan. It lists our goals, our objectives, everything. I want her to have clear direction on what I need her to do for my company. I absolutely love that. Okay. I totally geek out on that whole entire thing.

 

As you know, like we do strategic planning when it comes to drill out Venus suite of offers. And we were talking about this behind the scenes too, but like the whole financial side of it is so big and there’s so much more of a process that people don’t even talk about. And I’m not an expert in that I don’t, you know, build out their,

 

their financial plans. And so that’s why, like, I’m just geeking out on the whole strategic plan thing. So let me ask you a question here. And this is, I think a lot of our listeners, we have businesses that are scaling, who are listeners. We have brand new businesses when we are talking about guilt or like, this is a problem.

 

Like when is it usually with, and sadly, this is the case. Although it shouldn’t be entrepreneurs, aren’t very proactive on the things that, you know, we really just don’t want to do that. Isn’t fun. It doesn’t feel like we’re creating anything. So obviously they need to do this in the very beginning. Every business should be doing this in the very beginning,

 

but honestly, how many businesses do you guys have coming at you that have been in business for a long time? And they don’t have any of this? I’ll say about 60% because, and the reason why they don’t have it in a place, like I said, when they start off, it just started doing business. There isn’t a roadmap in place.

 

You just started doing business because you are good at it. Or you don’t really think it through or plan it out. And typically when you start to hurt in business or something goes wrong or not making the money yourselves or not increasing in your conversion rates are low. There’s a problem somewhere. And you need to just pause, pause so we can figure out what’s not working where the issues are and create a plan to fix that issue or implement some type of solution that will fix that issue.

 

But if we don’t know what the problem, if you don’t have visibility on the problem, and you’re just trying to figure it out, that you’re going to continue to build yourself in a hole. So you need to just stop and figure out what’s going wrong. I’ll use myself as an example. I struggled with creating content because as an accountant, when I first started my business,

 

I sounded really technical. My language was very technical and my content was not combining. I hired a content strategist. I was like, because look, I have tried Facebook. I’ve tried Pinterest, I’ve tried this. I’ve tried that. And I’m just not seeing the conversions or the view. I’m making the money. That’s not the problem. It’s the view.

 

And she was like, oh, this is the issue. And this is the issue. But I had to hire an expert to tell me where the issue was. And I was like, oh, okay. So now we have a map in place. Now she’s like this. We start here to create this and you create this. And this builds on that.

 

And then boom, there’s that content static every over, like over the next, maybe seven days, I saw a drastic improvement on our views. I was like, okay, thank you. I love that. Okay. So you guys are listening. If you haven’t done this yet, like, don’t feel bad. Don’t feel guilty, but it’s probably time to stop.

 

If you don’t have this financial foundation as our Nisha is saying and place, all right. So after this strategic plan is created, what comes next? What’s step number two, that people should really start diving in to understanding. So step number one is creating the foundation, solidifying your vision. After you create your vision, you also need to create core values and smart goals.

 

Your core values. You know, this is how your compass is what your company believes in. This is what you support. And this is how you pretty much operate. We have six core values in our company, and I always work with a business to create them when we’re going through the strategic planning process. So step one, creating a foundation, eat a vision,

 

core values, and smart goals, right? And a lot of times with the goal planning every year, every January, we all get excited. We’re going to create these 15 goals and we want to achieve all these things. You have to structure your goals and organize them, right? You don’t need 10 goals. Maybe you just need three, three short term,

 

three long term. That’s six that’s enough for the last year, the entire year. So creating those goals is enough, right? So step one, foundation, step two. We’re going to get into business performance. You need to analyze and assess your business. So once we solidify your vision with your company, the next step is I’m going to do a full,

 

I’m going to analyze your business top to bottom. What’s not working in operations. What’s not working in finance. What’s not working with you. Hiring people. I’m looking for missing processes. Do you have a hiring process in place? Because if you don’t, you’re probably not compliant with the state you’re operating in, right? Do you have a business budget in place?

 

Do you understand how much money you’re projected to make? How much are predicted to spend and your contribution margins? Do you understand your profit margin? So we get into some KPI reporting. I’m a numbers person. So I’m going straight for processes and then numbers. So making sure you have bird’s eye view and business owners, they typically only want to know how much money they may,

 

how much is left over and how much they only taxes. There are so many other moving it’s telling me this. I’m fine. Just tell me the rest I’ll be on. I’ll be on a beach somewhere. Yeah. Just give me those three things and we’re good. Oh my gosh. Those three things are, there are still other factors that you need to understand total income,

 

right? What are your top revenue performing items? If you offer, if you have a full product landscape by April, you work with businesses to build out their product suite. So business owners need to know what are their top performing, you know, products or startups. Don’t just dump everything in sales, right? That you need to see everything listed out expenses.

 

What are your top expenses, right? How much of your expenses contribute to your labor? What are your labor margins? If you have a team, how much is your team costing you? Right. I know for a fact on a 70, 30, no product that I released is going to cost me more than 30% of their product so that I can remain 70% profitable.

 

That’s how we build our service landscape. I’m not reducing my total projected income or increasing additional costs. Say that again. That was so powerful. Can you say that again? Cause I want to make sure our listeners did not just pass that up. Okay. So listen to this financial structure for your products. Okay. So what is your, what is your,

 

when are your numbers right? 70 30. So that means out of a hundred percent, it only costs me 30% to produce my services so that I walk away 70% profitable. That’s a very small conversation around pricing, which that’s a whole different conversation, but you need to understand your profit margins going in. How much is it going to cost you to produce this product or service?

 

How profitable do you want to walk away be? So I know every time we create something, whether it’s a bootcamp, a group coaching program, authoring a book, whatever it is, we’re going to walk away. So many percent profitable. If I cannot do that, I need to restructure the cost. Amen. Yes. And this is a thing,

 

and I was actually speaking to a client about this this week. And we talk about it all the time. Like in your clubhouse rooms, I was in there and you were talking about this. The thing is, is that when we’re, most of our listeners obviously are online, businesses are offline going online. And so what I tend to see is that they purchase so much software and they have no idea how much money they’re spending on an ongoing basis as well,

 

and what they actually need to use to produce that particular offer or a product. And so this whole entire conversation is, is just so helpful. So thank you again for being here, talking my best today on the show. Okay. So know your numbers and like down and dirty, what are the numbers that people need to know? So knowing your total revenue,

 

knowing your total income, how much money did you make, even if you use a lot of payment gateways, like, Hey, Pao, Stripe, square, collectively, you need to know your total income, right? You need to know number two, your total expenses, how much money are you spending? Like you just mentioned, April people use all of these tools.

 

We downsized all the time. I have what’s called shared services. So if we are creating digital products or consulting services, I want to utilize the same system. So I can just do a percentage allocation across the board. I’m not going to implement a ton of systems because that affects my profit margin. So total expenses, total income, and your bottom line.

 

The difference between your total income and total revenue is your bottom line. Are you operating at a net loss or are you operating at a profit? You need to monitor that every single month because that’s going to affect you at tax time or when it’s time to seek capital when it’s time to grow. When it’s time to have the bit management conversation where you want to apply for funding,

 

you need to understand your bottom line and all the factors that positively or negatively impact your bottom line. Yes. And a lot of businesses right now have also spoken to clients about this. As far as that, the relief loan, like the COVID relief loan. Like if you don’t have these numbers and you don’t know if there’s been a loss or a decrease or whatever,

 

then you know, they aren’t there. Aren’t qualifying for some of this really powerful cash injection that they can get it. They weren’t in 2020, they can get into their business. So, so important. And then KPIs, can you really like dumb that down? Explain that. So people really understand how to look for this in their own business. Yes.

 

KPIs are key performance indicators. So these, there are ratios to help you analyze areas of your business. Like your have revenue KPIs, you have labor KPIs, you have production KPIs. So when I say KPIs like they’re in ratio form, so you’re just taking numbers and providing them over to percentages. My favorite is revenue growth. How is your revenue growing period to period when,

 

I mean, period, every single month is your revenue growing month, month, month, per quarter, or a month to a year. So how is your revenue growing while your a monthly recurring revenue, each department of your business is going to have their own KPIs? So you have financial KPIs, which I monitor. You have operational, you have logistics depending on the nature of your business,

 

traffic to conversion. So there are different types of numbers. It depends on your operations, you know, marketing, they’re going to look at visits to conversions or visits to sales, to figure out what’s working. What’s not working in this particular marketing strategy or marketing campaign. So just understanding how to analyze your revenue and your income, or all of your numbers for your business in a percentage capacity.

 

And don’t worry has a guide. We’re going to make sure that you have so that you can really start diving in this and make sure that you guys are taking action. As you know, here in the show, like we’re going to give you the step-by-steps business trainings here, things you can look for, but then, you know, it’s your job to go and implement this.

 

And so our Neesha has a guide. That’s going to really start walking you through that process. We’ll make sure that you have a link to download after we’re done chatting here. Okay. And then what is this third step that you recommend businesses go through? The third step is creating a long-term plan. So once you have you slip out of your foundation,

 

you’ve created a operational plan for the year. It’s time to think long-term and long-term in the, the mains of everything, right? Capital are you, do you have the right capital structure? Do you have the right money in place? You have access to excess capital like lines of credit and business credit. Are you able to grow that you have debt in place?

 

Are you able to properly manage your debt? One of my clients incurred a lot of debt over the last few years. So we put together a very aggressive bit management plan to reduce their bit because it was affecting her bottom line. So you had this heavy umbrella of debt over your business. And if you’re in the rat race every single day. So being able to create opportunities to reduce that debt without hurting,

 

you know, operations, too much team, your team and operations capacity planning, what is your team doing now? What can I do better in the future? And how long can they do it? Right. We have a lot of technology that’s coming down the pipeline. A lot of AI, what can be automated in your business for us? We actually started out as a bookkeeping firm.

 

So we started out providing bookkeeping services and we’re quickly able to scale up to CFO services because a lot of bookkeeping services offer automated bookkeeping. So we’re doing the day to day, that can be done automatically. You don’t have to pay a lot of money for that, but the strategy and the planning you’re going to spend money on because a computer can’t tell you that you have to have somebody to sit down and read through the numbers with you and read through your operations and fill in that.

 

So number three is definitely planning for the loan term. Wow. What a powerful thing. I mean, that must feel so good for businesses to have you go in there now probably virtually and be able to help them unpack what they want and hand them a strategic plan to get that. I mean, just like for a second, you guys listening, like imagine what that would feel like to you to have somebody like our Neesha come in there and unpack all of this for you and what you’d walk away with.

 

And no, I don’t get like commissioned for making sure. She’s just saying, you know, like imagine how much that would take off your plate of wondering what you’re missing. See, here’s the thing I find that most business owners worry so much about the things they don’t know that they’re missing. They don’t even know specifically what they’re worried about, but they know that they don’t know enough about certain things that they don’t know enough about.

 

And they know that they’re there in sometimes business owners, even clients of ours, who’ve been in business for years and years. It’s like, they’re waiting for the other shoe to drop. And that is no way to run a business, especially creating a business. That’s going to skill you into the future. So I love everything that you’re saying. And it’s so incredibly important that businesses go through this process.

 

And after they figure out their long-term plan, you guys are Nisha has a full guide. That’s going to go into detail, but just really, really like top level. What are the next couple steps that people go through in this process? The next step will be assessing your tech deck. So what is what tech interviews is using? You know, do you have outdated processes?

 

Do you have outdated systems? A lot of times we found that companies that have smaller team, they have a team size. That’s unnecessary because too many people are doing too many manual things. There’s no automation in place. There’s no, there aren’t any sequences set up to trigger this action. When you have poor outdated processes, you have unhappy employees, you have a lot of manual work.

 

That’s costing you a lot of billable hours for your company. And most importantly, you have people doing a job that could be automated. I was an unhappy employee in one of my corporate dives because the tech was just so old and it was so manual. And I was just, this is, I felt like I wasn’t living up to my potential because I was trying to figure out how to automate this process instead of doing the actual job.

 

And you don’t want unhappy employees, you want people that are happy to do the work for you to help you in your organization. And they can help take things to the next level. Asset protection is another one, making sure your intellectual property is protected. I just had a meeting with my attorney because we were talking about some programs I want to roll out.

 

And she was like, make sure you send the prelim over to me so I can look at it to make sure it’s part of our IP deck. So making sure that your IP is protected and then last but not least for my small businesses tax planning, please, please, please free tax plan. That’s why no longer a number is important. You should not wait until tax season to know your numbers,

 

especially in a year like this. When we had an administration shift, we are in a pandemic there a particular way. Things have to be calculated. Are you ahead of the game? Are you being reactive or are you being proactive? I would prefer for you to be proactive when it comes to the pre-tax planning phase. So those would be the remainder of the steps in the rule.

 

Wow. Okay. So today we talked about creating a strategic financial roadmap for businesses and you are the founder of CFO for women and everything was so informative today. You’re always just giving so much not, you know, we say that I’m also giving so much value. Well, yes, it was incredible value. But today I just appreciate you so much.

 

And you do this in clubhouse as well because you really, really dialed it down to the tactics. It’s not just all about idea or strategy or what needs to be done, but it’s going through the tactics. And so I appreciate your time so much on the show today and how can people find you? And we’re going to make sure the links to your download are in the show notes as well.

 

So if you’re driving, you can’t write this down. No worries guys, but how can people really connect with you more? Absolutely. You can always find us on Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter at CFL for women. Those are the handles for those three platforms and I’m on clubhouse ads. Our mission speaks up there every Monday at 3:00 PM. I am also there some Tuesday evenings hanging out with April,

 

but I’m always there. I’m just slide in my DMS. If you have any questions, I’ll make sure you get access to the right resource. If you are in the city of Atlanta and you are a new or established business, but you need some additional support, you can contact the urban league, the entrepreneurship center and register for one of our free accelerated programs.

 

This is about $20,000 worth of free training for you and your business. I am one of the coaches for their program. So please come out and receive the assistance. That’s why you can find me. Wow. Yeah. Luckily Blog that goes out every first, Monday of the month, it’s called your bottom line. So you can go to www.cfoforwomen.com and click on blog.

 

It’ll take you straight to our blog. So we upload a blog every single month to help you get access to resources and strategies for your amazing, amazing, thank you so much for being a guest on the show. And this is Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 229. So everything that our Nisha just said, and you weren’t able to jot that down will also be found@sweetlifeco.com

 

click on the podcast. And this is episode two 29, and don’t forget to join us. Live in clubhouse under the sweet left entrepreneur’s club on Wednesday, the week this show drops, I’m looking at my calendar right now. I think we said, that’s going to be June 2nd, Wednesday, June 2nd, at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And Arnesha and I are going to be in there taking this conversation a bit further and strategically there to make sure you guys are getting your questions answered.

 

So thank you so much for joining us Arnesha. I appreciate your time and expertise. Thank you so much for having me

Episode 227: How To Build or Join A Clubhouse Moderator Team – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to understand how to use Clubhouse to grow your brand and business.

Summary:

On this week’s show we’re diving into how to grow on Clubhouse through Moderator Teams. Clubhouse is the ultimate collaboration platform. It’s a powerful place to build brand awareness (as we talked about last week) and generate revenue, but Clubhouse is unlike other platforms so how you approach your audience is through intention, giving and collaboration. This episode will show you how to get started. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know how to find your clients on clubhouse
  2. Know how to create collaborations on clubhouse
  3. Understand how to bring value to those you connect with and serve

Resources Mentioned:

 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate April beach here, founder of the suite led company and host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. And this is yet another week of business training and coaching. You can take to the bank today. We are continuing our conversation,

 

actually, an ongoing conversation that we’ve been having about clubhouse. And I’ll be honest, about five minutes before I’m sitting down here to record this show for you. I was just in over my head with eighth grade science and trying to help my son with science and wow. I had no idea what I was doing. And so it really feels good to be able to come and record a podcast in an area where I do feel like I know exactly what I’m doing so I can pour into you.

 

It is very humbling having teenagers and you can’t do their math or their science. I’m just saying that for the record, just a little behind the scenes here in the beach house, or you, they use so much for tuning in this week. This again is episode number 227. And this is what you can expect from hanging out with here with me here on today’s show.

 

First of all, this is for those of you guys in every single stage of my suite life business roadmap. And that is phase one through five. If you don’t know, you can go take a very simple quiz right now by visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz and find out exactly what stage and phase of business you’re in and get a curated, customized checklist of exactly what you should be working on right now to get to the next level.

 

So this is for those of you in any phase, and I want to make sure that, you know, this is a good show for you to tune into it is for those of you who want to understand how to use clubhouse to grow your business and brand. Now on this week’s show, we’re diving into how to grow your clubhouse moderator team very specifically,

 

and talking about clubhouse in general, it’s truly the ultimate collaboration platform, and it’s a powerful place to build brand awareness. As we talked about a last week show. So tune in to episode number 226, if you haven’t listened to that one yet, and clubhouse is a really powerful place to generate revenue. And I also shared our stats and our numbers just within the first couple of weeks of participating on clubhouse in last week show.

 

But clubhouse is really not like any other social media platform out there. So I know that businesses are having trouble understanding really how to approach it, how to grow your audience. And so that is what we’re talking about on today’s show. At the end of this episode, you will know how to find your clients on clubhouse. You will understand and know how to create collaborations with other business and leaders on clubhouse.

 

And you will understand how to create a moderator team or join a moderator team, and really how to approach other people to create amazing collaborations that are good for you. Good for them, and good for the people who are in your room, listening and getting help from you. So if you’re ready for that, then we’re going to go ahead and dive in here.

 

And also, if you haven’t yet, please follow me on clubhouse in raise your hand, wave your hand and say, Hey, April, I’m a listener to your podcast. And I would love to welcome you on any of my stages. And of course, if you were not yet in our club, we actually have a couple of clubs. That first one is sweet life entrepreneurs.

 

You can just search sweet life entrepreneurs under clubs in clubhouse and join our club. That is an extension of what we talk about here on the podcast. So I would love to workshop with you and every single week at 12 o’clock Eastern time on Wednesday. So Wednesday 12 o’clock Eastern time, we host the sweet life podcast live room, and that is where we take your questions and workshop with you and give you extra support based on the podcast topic of the week.

 

So if you want more help and you have questions about how to join and build moderator teams, make sure you are joining me in clubhouse this week on Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And I’ll be there waiting for you to support you in doing that. All right. Are you ready? Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. All the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

click on podcast. And this is episode number 227. I give a little bit of background information before we really dive into moderator teams. For those of you that are unfamiliar with actually how to use clubhouse. So, first of all, if you haven’t dove into clubhouse, or if you’ve been in there, talk to a lot of businesses that have tapped in there,

 

and they’re just like, I just really don’t see how to use it. Like I don’t get it, like just bunch of people talking to each other. So here are some foundational steps to get started. First of all, you want to curate the content that you see and clubhouse helps you to do that by selecting topics, you can go into clubhouse and you can select topics that interest you.

 

So that is step number one. If you have not done that, you can search clubhouse by topics and you can also search people and clubs by typing in certain key words. So if you are a speaking coach and you don’t how to use clubhouse yet, go ahead and type in public speaking or speaking trainings, and you’ll be able to join conversations on top of that.

 

You can also start following other people on clubhouse and clubhouse. We’ll give you some suggestions to do that. Now, once you get onto clubhouse, my first recommendation is just to start by observing, start by joining rooms, listening to rooms, listen to rooms of all kinds, not just in your area of business. Listen to how people, moderate rooms listen to the,

 

the culture that is being created in certain rooms in certain spaces and just chill and listen, you can take clubhouse with you on the go to the gym and the car, everybody multitasks on clubhouse. So first of all, step number one is curating the content you see, secondly, if you follow me and if you follow our clubs that like the Sweetlife life entrepreneur club or my second club called the wave makers club,

 

you’re going to be able to see who else is part of that club. It’s a, you’re going to be able to see a list of other like-minded people that’s already curated right there for you. So you could just simply go to sweet life entrepreneurs club and fall other members of the club. And that’s a really great way to get started. So step number one is curating the content you see,

 

start observing and follow people that have similar interests to you or serve a similar audience. Step number two is really connecting follow people. You want to connect more with off of clubhouse and on to Instagram. And this is something that I talked about last week, more in depth about taking your clients off of clubhouse. And so I’m not going to go in depth right now,

 

but I just want to share with you how this works in a really great way. So when you’re connected with somebody and you’re listening to them, speak on clubhouse, or you’re looking at their profile, they should have a link to their Instagram account. Some people use Twitter, but most people use Instagram. And so you can tap on that and you’ll still stay in clubhouse,

 

but your phone will open up another window, opening up Instagram directly to that person’s profile. And so if you heard somebody that said something that just really moved you, or if it’s somebody that you roll and want to connect with more, go ahead and follow them on Instagram, make a few comments on some of their posts and send them a direct message and say something to the effect of like,

 

I’ve heard John clubhouse. And I like what you said about XYZ. So start building relationships and start building great collaborations and friendships and, you know, really start complimenting and connecting with people. Just be really specific. I get so many messages on clubhouse. Some of them are just like, Hey bro, I saw you in clubhouse, which I love getting those,

 

but the best ones that I really stop and I’m able to respond to is when somebody says, Hey, April, I heard you on clubhouse today talking about this. And I just wanted to say that that helped me so much. Those are the messages where then I’ll respond back and I’ll be like, okay, great. I’m so glad that helped. Why,

 

how did that help? Why did that help? And then I can build more of a relationship. So, you know, try to be specific about the messages you’re sending to people in Instagram, from clubhouse. So this is just some foundational information about relationship building and how clubhouse works. Now, seven number three. First, I want to talk about joining other moderator teams.

 

Okay. So if you see a room and you go to a room and you just really love this room, you’ll start to notice it. Usually some of the same people are moderating again and again, you’ll start to recognize faces. And so those are what we call moderator teams. You’ll also see the way that teams work together. Whereas some of the hosts may leave for a period of time and they’ll really intentionally say,

 

Hey, listen, you know, Lindsey’s going to take over or Sarah is gonna take over. And so the moderator teams that are good moderator teams do a good job, communicating the fact that they are a team. And so when you’re in rooms and you see rooms that you want to be part of and you’re thinking, wow, I really could lend a lot of value to this.

 

Then talk about the opportunity of joining their moderator team. And here are my tips to do that. First of all, all of the hosts and all of the moderators, be respectful, follow the hosts and the moderators of the rooms that you want to speak up and raise your hand in. And just really a big advocate for that, that if you were going into a room and contributing in somebody else’s space,

 

that you should be following the host or the moderators that you know, at least those that you want to connect with, and those that invited you up on stage to speak. So that’s really step number one, step number two is follow their club. Make sure you are following the club of the moderator teams that you want to join or be a part of,

 

and then raise your hand to speak. Okay, here’s something I want to say about this. Don’t just join a room immediately, raise your hand to speak. Just like chill for a sec. Like feel the vibe in the room, listen to the conversation that’s already happening. Cause as soon as you’re brought up in stage rooms, run where you’ll either sit there for a really long time before you have an opportunity to speak,

 

or you could be brought up on stage and just be like fun right then. And somebody is expecting you to speak. So you really don’t want to be in a position where you come in a room, raise your hand to speak. And you’re like, Oh shit. Like what are we talking about? That’s really, really disrespectful. So just stay there for a minute,

 

get the vibe of the room and make sure that you can in fact lend some value to that room. Or if you have a question, please do not hesitate to raise your hand, clubhouses the place to ask questions. I know that there are some rooms that are really intimidating to ask questions for, or ask questions in. And I just want to encourage you to be bold,

 

speak up and ask what you want to ask. I also want to let you know that all of the rooms hosted under my clubs are really safe, great places to speak. Our moderator teams are amazing, and we really want you to always come into our clubs and raise your hand and ask any question that really applies to what we’re speaking about or how we can serve you.

 

Just a little side note. There, there are amazing clubs that have amazing welcoming moderator teams, obviously in addition to mine. But I do understand that sometimes it can be a little intimidating. So step number three, and talking about joining other moderator teams is raise your hand and ask to speak and add value to that room without selling. So if somebody is talking about a topic that is perhaps in your area of expertise or paired with collaborates well with your area of expertise and you want to lend to it,

 

raise your hand, ask to go up on stage when you’re invited to go up on stage, ask if you can contribute some value to the room. So first of all, you want to, you want to ask and be respectful for the moderators and just say, is it okay if I contribute some value based on a question perhaps somebody else had and don’t dine in dash,

 

okay. I called this like dining in dashi. Okay. When you go into a room and you’re up on stage, especially if it is a room comprised of moderators, and you’re really interested in joining their moderator team, stay there, like be present, show your commitment to the room and respect for the conversation and for those hosting that room. And of course for those people that are being served in that space.

 

So if you’re really trying to join a moderator team, I highly recommend that you intentionally be there. Like I say this all the time to my kids. And sometimes my students might business. Students is like this term be here. Now there’s a lot of multitasking. Like I just mentioned happening on clubhouse. You can be at the gym, you can be driving a car.

 

Most of us are, but still be mindful and present to the room that you’re in to be respectful of that space in stay, be present, continue to land value if you’re invited to do so and just stay as long as you are allowed to stay showing your commitment to that space and always lending with value, never leading with selling. You say that again,

 

always lending value, never leading with selling. In fact, when you’re joining a room where it’s another moderator team, you should never come up and pitch your own stuff. Period. You should only be lending value to that space unless somebody says to you, Hey, would you like to tell us what you do? You know, really who you serve and what programs are or what services you have available right now.

 

I mean, this is common sense. I think it’s common sense. You guys, you would be blown away by how many people, this actually is not common sense for, but be respectful. That’s all I’m saying is just chill. Be present, be supportive and be respectful. And then what you’re going to do is make sure you’re following all the moderators and the hosts in that room and ping the moderators off the platform and on Instagram and ask them,

 

compliment them, say, Hey, I love your rooms. I come every single week. You know, I’m showing up here consistently. I would love to add value. This is my areas of expertise or these are my superpowers. If you believe I add or could add value to your room, would you please consider allowing me to join your moderator team?

 

It just a very respectful, but it is important to ask because clubhouse is a busy place. And if you don’t ask for what you need, it’s going to be hard to get it. And so be bold, be respectful, show up to the room on a regular basis and then ask, in most cases you don’t want to just show up to a room.

 

You’ve never seen anybody before and ask them to join their mod team. They’re going to want to see you consistently and know that you’re trustworthy. When somebody adds you to their moderator team, they’re trusting you to serve their people. And that’s a great deal of trust and it’s direct representation of them and their club and their brand. So that’s how to join other moderator teams currently.

 

And I say currently, because clubhouses fluid, you guys, they are constantly updating this platform by the time this comes out, you know, we’ll have DMS in clubhouse and I don’t know, there’s no predicting, but I just want to make sure that you know, that the fundamentals we’re talking about here are going to apply based on however, the technology evolves.

 

And then the next thing I want to share with you, the final thing is how to create your own team, how to create your moderator team. So step number one is create your own club. You can create a club after you’ve been trusted by clubhouse. And that’s usually just a couple of days. You’ve kind of lost some lost some warning flags a year,

 

a newbie, but I would wait a little bit to create a club and make sure that you know, how your club is going to fit in amongst the other clubs and the value you’re going to bring to your space and how you’re different. So you can create your club. You want to brand it well, and just follow the steps that clubhouse has put before to create your club rules and club description.

 

And you also can put tags in your club about what the general topics that your club speaks to. Step. Number two is to establish a set schedule. You want to show up regularly. As a matter of fact, when I first joined clubhouse, we had to host regular rooms for at least three weeks in a row. In order for clubhouse to consider us launching the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club.

 

Now anybody can go in there and anybody can create a club, but it took us literally weeks and weeks of backlogs of proving that we were worthy in order to create a club. So you don’t have to go through all that. But I do recommend that you create a club and create a set schedule of when you’re going to show up every single week so that you can train your audience.

 

You can train your people. And not that you can’t change that schedule, but you want to start out with something set and something consistent. So plan your room schedule and your room content. What are you talking about? Name your rooms, really cool, catchy names. You know, open-ended questions for people to join that they know that they can contribute in your spaces.

 

And of course in all things, make sure that aligns with your brand and really how you want to establish your club as a leader and your company leading in a certain area of conversation. And then the next step is reach out to others and invite moderators who align with your brand and your voice and your mission to help co moderate rooms with you. Now,

 

there are a couple different strategies about how to go about doing this and they aren’t right or wrong. I’m just going to share with you the strategies and then you can choose what’s best for you. Strategy one is to find other people that do pretty much the same thing you do, other therapists or other fitness coaches, other van, life travelers, other surfers,

 

other speaking coaches, other graphic designers. So that’s step number one is finding other people that do the same thing as you and collaborating. I have hosted rooms in clubhouse with people that do very, very similar services to what we provide here in the suite company. And it’s so cool to be able to collaborate with them because still the people in that room,

 

they’re going to choose who they resonate with more. It’s not a competition in this space. So however you speak and show up. If you invite people to do the similar thing, some people are going to love you. And some people just aren’t and then that’s okay. Some people are going to want to work in your programs and some people are going to choose,

 

you know, the other moderator and that’s okay, too. So option number one is finding people who do pretty much what you do. Option. Number two is define those who provide different services and different areas of expertise, but who reached the same audience. So let me say that again, other businesses that serve the same audience, but they don’t do what you do.

 

And that’s the dream team that we have formed in our wave makers club. We have literally a business dream team of moderators and each person. And there’s usually a few people that have an area of expertise that are similar to each others, but we have created an entire complete pie. There are many pieces to a complete business, profitable impact business pie from Instagram strategy to how to use IgE TV.

 

You know, I have different experts that are on our moderator team, but one person talks about reels. One person talks about hashtags and of course, you know, marketing and branding and website development, but also leadership speakers and people that can come to how to delegate well, how to grow your teams. And so we curate a really amazing moderator team in that way that we go and we search because we know what the people who come to our rooms want and need,

 

and you can do the same thing. So whatever you do ask yourself, what are other things in my clients really, really need that we may not directly provide? How can I curate a team around like that dream team approach for our listeners in our rooms, that we can really curate a space where people want to come back to because they know that they are getting helped mindfully intentionally getting helped.

 

And then the last step, and this is just a logistical last step for you. I could do a whole I’d should, and we’ll do a whole episode on this is just to know, to create a back channel for your moderator team. You know, back channels are created primarily on Instagram, but also in text strings and WhatsApp. And so bring all the moderators who’ve agreed to moderate for you and your rooms into one place.

 

So you can communicate in the back channel while the room is happening live. I have had to numerous times send messages to my moderator T and saying, I’m so sorry, my dog won’t stop barking. Can somebody else emcee the room right now? Or I’m so sorry. I have to go potty, which like you got to go pee sometimes when you’re on clubhouse stages for hours and hours,

 

or I’m so sorry, I’m walking out of the grocery store, you know, having this back channel, sorry guys. I’m just keeping it real. That’s what I do. You know, having this back channel, just make sure your mic is on mute if you go pie. Okay. I mean this back channel and I’m communicating with your moderator team is really an amazing way to create a cohesive group of people that show up every single week.

 

And a couple of just insider tips that I do with my mob team. I usually present a question and the topic. So my moderator teams know what we’re talking about before every room. So they in their mind can start strategizing. They don’t just kind of show up to a room and be like, Hey, whatever. They already know how they can start strategizing and how they can help people in the room.

 

They also know how that topic can help their businesses grow. You know, our moderator teams they’re just to grow our company. You know, we love to position our moderators to help their businesses grow. It’s really a win-win win for everybody. It’s a win for us. It’s win for our moderator teams. And most importantly, it’s a win for the people that join our rooms.

 

So in summary, we have certainly talked about a lot today. This is how to build or join clubhouse, moderator teams, moderator dream teams. And that is a term that we use in clubhouse. That’s actually a term that we use in our business. We have business dream teams for our clients as well. And I’m so happy to be able to have an opportunity to talk to you today and to share these strategies with you.

 

If you would like more help on this, please join me on Wednesday at 12 o’clock and our suite life podcast live room under the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club. And we are here to pour into you again, this is episode number 227 at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. And all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 227 and next week in episode number 228,

 

we have Ashley Wilkerson who is an absolute clubhouse powerhouse as a guest on the show. You just wait, you are in for a treat. She breaks down her entire methodology on how she helps women build a pink print to achieve your dreams. It’s amazing. And I can’t wait for you to hear her speak. Thanks so much for tuning in and being a faithful listener of the show.

 

Take a screenshot of this and tag me at April beach life on Instagram. And I will message you directly with the link to join our rooms this week so that you and I can personally Connect be awesome. I’ll talk to you again next time. Bye bye for now.

Episode 226: How To Use Clubhouse To Grow Your Business – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to understand Clubhouse.

Summary:

Clubhouse is a social audio app that enables conversations. It’s a great place to show your expertise by lending valuable information to live conversations. Clubhouse is also a great place to learn from others, network, build your brand, curate collaborations and simply connect with like-minded people with similar interests. Clubhouse is also a perfect place to find your ideal clients, and this is what we’re discussing on today’s show. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to increase brand awareness on Clubhouse
  2. Understand how to write your Clubhouse bio as a multi-passionate entrepreneur
  3. Know how to funnel people off Clubhouse and into your business

Resources Mentioned:

 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. I’m so excited to have another conversation with you about clubhouse. In today’s episode, we’re talking about how to use clubhouse to grow your business. And I’m going to give you some examples of how you can dive in on the app,

 

whether you’re building a personal brand or a company brand, or whether you’re just not exactly sure what direction and what positioning you want to take professionally using the clubhouse app. So today this is what we’re going to cover. We are going to cover the fact that clubhouse is the place to be. I am not joking you the place to be, to build your personal and business brand,

 

to connect with amazing people and really how to understand how you can use this app. It’s a great place to show your expertise by lending valuable information to live conversations. But I also know, and fully understand that it’s kind of confusing for some businesses, depending on what niche you’re in, or maybe it’s even a little overwhelming. Now, even though the app is still in beta mode,

 

beta testing at the time I recorded this episode for you, you know, you go in there sometimes and you’re in rooms with couple thousand people. That can be a little intimidating. So I’m here to help you onboard. This is an extension of the last podcast episode we did for you. Episode number two Oh nine, if you have not yet listened to episode number two Oh nine,

 

about how to get started on clubhouse. Take just a second. Go listen to that episode first and then come back here. This is episode 226. So if you’ve not listened to two Oh nine and you’re just getting started from scratch on clubhouse, go listen to two Oh nine first and then come back and reconnect with me here. I will be here waiting for you.

 

Those of you guys who are ready to dive in more and know how to use clubhouse to build your business, to increase sales. This is what you can expect at the end of today’s episode. You can expect to understand how to increase your brand awareness on clubhouse, understand how to write your clubhouse bio, especially for those of you guys that are multi-passionate entrepreneurs.

 

We’re going to dive into that and just jam on that a little bit. So I can give you some direction and clarity, and you’re going to know how to funnel people off of clubhouse and into your business. This podcast episode is for those of you in any phase of my sweet life business roadmap, that start to scale up system that tells you what phase of business you’re in.

 

So regardless of where you are, this is a great episode for those of you in every phase of business growth and development, all the show notes and everything we’re talking about today, of course can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode two 26. And before we dive into the meat and potatoes here, I have a very special bonus to this episode.

 

If you have not grabbed it yet, it is the ultimate guide to choose the online business model. That is right for you. It’s an amazing guide. There’s over 15 pages in there that break out the difference between memberships and courses and masterminds. And I break out and explain to you how watching each one of those will affect your life. What the lifestyle side of it looks like.

 

So if you haven’t yet grabbed it, definitely pause this episode and very simply just go to April beach.com forward slash guide. And you’re going to get taken directly to the page where you can download that and access that right away. So it’s a really special bonus episode that is with today’s show. So if you’re ready to know how to grow your business by using clubhouse,

 

let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. Okay. So let’s first start talking about what is clubhouse, right. Again, if you haven’t listened to episode number two Oh nine, please go do so. Otherwise let’s keep going. Clubhouse is a social audio app that enables conversations. It’s a great place. And I mean, a great place to show your expertise by lending valuable information to live conversations is also an incredible place to learn from others network,

 

build your brand curate collaborations, and simply connect with other people that are like-minded. They have similar interests as you do. And clubhouse is also a perfect place to find your ideal clients. And this is what we’re talking about on today’s show. So let’s go ahead and do just a little teeny recap of episode two Oh nine, to make sure that we are all on the same level base information of what we’re talking about.

 

So the thing with clubhouse is clubhouse enables human level conversations, human connection. It is a place to have actual real life, real time live conversations. So I want you to imagine being on clubhouse as if you have gone to an in-person networking event and you’re having amazing conversations, you’re sharing what you do. You’re listening from other people who are sharing their magic.

 

Usually there’s probably somebody who is the host of that networking event. And they’re kind of orchestrating that event. That is what it’s like to be in a clubhouse room. You show up to this networking event. There’s one person who’s usually the primary host of that particular one room. And they have other people that are there helping them moderate. They are leaders in creating the great networking environment.

 

That is what it’s like being on clubhouse. It’s an excellent way to build relationships with people you have never met before. And it is rare time right now at the recording of this show, where I was in a room last week, listening to MC hammer. And there was only 50 people in that room. So there’s an amazing opportunity to really connect with people in a very real level.

 

And I understand if you’re listening to this and it might feel a little frustrating if you aren’t on clubhouse yet, even if you’re, you know, especially if you’re an Android user, but we do have great news to you that they are rolling out beta testing for Android right now. So all of us are going to get to hang out there together on clubhouse very,

 

very soon. So when we’re talking about clubhouse, I want you to understand that clubhouse creates an instant warm connection with you and somebody else. You have just had a conversation with somebody else, or somebody just listened to you speak. That is a very important thing as a business leader or an expert. We want the opportunity to get in front of people that we can serve and help.

 

And that’s what clubhouse does. So today I’m going to share three different tips, three different steps to build your business on clubhouse. And I’m going to do them in somewhat of a sequential order. So first I want you to do one thing and then the next, and then the next, and I’m also going to show you the flow of how we get people off the clubhouse app in,

 

into your business. How do we take them from that company to a client? Cause that’s what, that’s what you’re here for in this episode. So I want to make sure you know, that this is how I’m going to take you through this today. So step number one, what’s talk about your clubhouse, bio unwell, like other social media platforms,

 

where you really can’t say much about yourself. Clubhouse gives you generous space to share your expertise, who you help, what your intentions are for being there on the app. And your bio gives other people an opportunity to connect with you right there in your bio. You have a generous space of information and the top two lines are the most important part of that.

 

Because as nobody’s looking at your bio, they’re only able to see a short preview. It’s like, it’s almost similar to the same thing. We call it above the fold on a website there’s above the fold on your clubhouse bio. And it’s just first couple of lines. Not only that, those first couple of lines are also searchable. So what you put in there is very important for how you want people to find you and what you want them to know about you and getting them to trigger whether or not they want to keep reading on to read your bio more as an example,

 

the top couple of lines in my bio, the very first three words, our online business strategist. And so when you search me and clubhouse, I’m coming up all the way at the top when you search online business strategists, because I’ve been really yes, pun intended strategic about those words. That’s how I want to be found because that is what I do.

 

And so, as you’re writing your bio, I want you to know that it is really a piece of it content. So I want you to treat it accordingly. And I want you to go through outline what you do on the top and give people some really fun, special things to know about you. Also in the top couple, you know, lines of my bio currently in there,

 

it says lifelong lifestyle entrepreneur. That’s something that’s unique about me and a little bit different. And so I also include that in the top part of my bio. So your bio is a generous piece of space and you need to use it accordingly. It is truly a piece of content. Now, one of the questions that I often get actually all the time in clubhouse rooms is how do I share my bio?

 

If I have a lot of things going on, if I have a ton of different things that I’m working on and a ton of different things I’ve done, you know, what do I, what do I put in my out? Well, let me give you an example between my husband and myself, we own four different companies and I’m a nonprofit founder and I’m a mom of boys and I’m an author.

 

And, and, and you’re the same way. And I’m a podcast host. And so you want to be very good about using that space. Now here’s tip number one. You want to choose the primary business or service that you want to be known for. We’re on clubhouse, both here in your bio and how you show up speaking in rooms. That’d be very clear about what you do and who you help primarily,

 

but clubhouse is an amazing opportunity to share multiple things that you’ve done. Share your street, credibility, share the projects that you’re working on and share other fun things about you. So, as an example, in my clubhouse bio, you’ll find my expertise on top and some interesting, kind of funny quirky facts about me. You’ll find a statement of the exact problem that I solve and who I solve it for.

 

And some further street, credibility press different ways to connect with me, but also in my bio, you’ll find a list of funny things. Like I love taking fermented mushrooms and I’ve lived on my own since I was 13 years old. Those are the things that you’ll find. And so your bio should be a place where you can establish your expertise, but also a place where you can list other things that are very special about you that make you human.

 

And that is why this is such a powerful opportunity that clubhouse gives you. So please don’t overlook, creating an amazing bio. And with this said, I’m going to put a link in the show notes for this episode. My friend Mario Armstrong is like the bio King. He’s the one that taught me how to write my bio. And he has an amazing bio and furthermore,

 

she’s always updating it. So with that being said, I’m going to put a link to Mario Armstrong, and I want you to follow him on clubhouse. If you’re on the app and you are there already, or soon as you get on clubhouse, because he will always have this top notch example of how you write your bio on this app and create connections.

 

I also learned something very powerful from him that didn’t come from me. So I want to make sure, you know, it came from him and I’m just sharing it with you on today’s show. One of the things that he does it recommends for people to do is if you have very, very different companies, you run very, very different things that he actually writes up his bio and a note pad on his phone in when he enters different rooms,

 

he can very quickly copy and paste and change out his bios, according to the room that he is in. So that is a great tip from him. I have not done that. I’ll be honest. I have not personally done that, but I have, I know that he does that and I know that other people do that. So I wanted to share that tip with you on this show as well.

 

So step number one is updating your clubhouse bio step number two, connect your Instagram to it. And it should be your business. Instagram, if you have a personal Instagram, but yet you have a business clubhouse works in tandem with Instagram. So it highly recommends you connect your business Instagram. Or if you don’t have one, upgrade your Instagram to a business account conversations that happen on clubhouse,

 

get taken off clubhouse and they become conversations that happen on Instagram or Twitter. I’m going to talk and dive into the Instagram aspect of it because most people use Instagram and connection with clubhouse. Currently. Now this is what is important about this. When somebody meets you or hears you speak on clubhouse, or maybe they just are standing next to you in a room and you aren’t even speaking on a stage and they,

 

because there’s nothing else for them to look at, see your amazing profile picture, click on it. And then they go and they click from your bio. There’s a direct LinkedIn. They’re going to check you out. One of the things that’s important is your Instagram should back up what you say in your clubhouse bio. And it should back up what you speak about on clubhouse stages.

 

Your Instagram is an extension of who you are and how you show up on the clubhouse app. So what happens when you do this well is your Instagram starts to grow as well because people will follow you on Instagram from clubhouse. So it’s very important that you understand that the conversations that happen on clubhouse, then get taken off the app on to Instagram. And here are some tips of how you convert people from clubhouse.

 

Even when you’re speaking live on the stage, send them over to their Instagram, to book or buy for you from you. One of the most important things that you can do if, and when you are a hosting room in have an opportunity to share how to work with you is to give very clear instructions on what people should do. I’ve seen it done a million different ways that are not clear.

 

And I want you to know the clear way to do it. As you were speaking on stage, I want you to give clear instructions to what somebody should do when they get to your Instagram account. You don’t want to just say, Oh yeah, just shoot me a message on Instagram, because then what we’re asking somebody’s brain to do is come up with what they want to say in that message to you instead,

 

make it very, very easy. I want you to come up with one key word and I want you to say, and if you were here in this room and you would like to connect with me more regarding what we’re talking about, or if you would like to download the piece of content, the lead magnet that I’m talking about, or read the article,

 

or, you know, join my, my event that I’m having. We’re going to talk about that here in just a sec, pick one word. So in rooms that I’m in, when I’m talking about how to create your suite of offers, I will say DM me the word guide right now, go to my Instagram. As I’m speaking, as we’re hanging out here in this clubhouse room and very simply DME,

 

the word guide, just one word, and I will send you the link on how you can grab my guide, see how easy that works. Instead of me saying, Hey, by the way, go send me a message and then I’ll send you the guide. So we want to make it super simple for them. Another tip that many people do as well is instead of sending you a DM,

 

they make a comment on your first post on Instagram. So if you want to increase the SEO in your Instagram and have people comment on your Instagram posts, you can very simply say to them, go to the first picture on my Instagram profile in DME, the word guide, and I will ping you directly and send you the link. So there’s a couple of different ways to go about doing that.

 

It’s very important that you connect your Instagram to clubhouse in that you have a system, a very clear system with very clear instructions. So people don’t even have to think you’ve made it so easy for them. And you’ve picked one key word, and that’s how we get them from the clubhouse app into a relationship with you. And then here is step number three,

 

step number three is answering the question. What happens next? How do I then get them from Instagram to a converted client? And so here are these tips. First one is have an open next step call to immediately available. Here’s some examples of what that could be. Number one, you can have an online scheduler, always sitting ready and waiting in the bio in the link tree or associate tab or link on your website where you share links from Instagram.

 

Totally ready to go. So there’s always a way to get people then from Instagram to have a conversation with you, you also should have links in your bio that lead to buying now or register now or download now. So the things that you’re talking about in your clubhouse rooms, you want to make sure they’re also live links in your Instagram for people to connect and grab right away.

 

You can say, and I will say it’s worked really, really well and beautifully for our followers. Who’ve taken off clubhouse into our Instagram is I do say sometimes, Hey, just go to the link in my bio and you can download this guide so they don’t have to DM me. And oftentimes I will actually get two different calls to action. Both of those have been very successful for us.

 

And so I wanted to make sure that I am sharing that with you. I will tell you, and you’ve, you’ve hung out here with me for a long time till the end of the show. So I want to tell you something and it’s a secret, but not so secret. In our first 11 days on clubhouse, we invoiced out $27,000 in business coaching.

 

And that’s really important to know, because I want you to know that what I’m telling you in today’s episode is not just me pulling this out of, you know, where this is, how we’ve built so many amazing relationships on club house, and started to be able to work with so many more clients that we would never have been able to reach. If it wasn’t through showing about then typically giving first and building relationships with the right people,

 

knowing who you serve is a very important part of enabling your leverage on this app, being true to who you are, understanding how to communicate the end results you provide. And if you do that, I promise you it will pay off in your business. And I want to see that happen to, for you, to you and for you. So just to recap today,

 

we talked about how to grow your business, your clubhouse, this isn’t some big funnel strategy. It’s common sense. That’s why it’s worked for us in so many people because it’s natural, it’s authentic. And it’s just common sense. If somebody loves what you have to say in a room they’re of course going to want to connect with you more in this as a process in which we do it.

 

So number one is making sure your bio is amazing. It’s very clear what you do, but also share some unique and funny and quirky things about you. That show that you are a human number two, make sure your Instagram is connected. And how do you communicate going to Instagram? Make sure you have a strategy of, of a word of a keyword that you can say when you’re speaking in rooms to have somebody download your lead magnet,

 

or they could perhaps just share the word to type the word schedule. And then the third thing is a conversion that happens in the next step. The third step is off Instagram. How do you get people then off Instagram and into a sales call with you into a webinar funnel or a live event? What does that next step of taking them off Instagram so that they can connect with you deeper and become a lifelong client?

 

If you’ve done a good job of building out your client journey services and a raving fan. And that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. Thank you so much for hanging out with me. I absolutely love connecting with you as you know, thanks for being a faithful listener, especially those of you guys. Who’ve been listening to this show for over four and a half years.

 

And if you aren’t yet following me on clubhouse, I want to connect with you. I am very simply found it at April beach. And of course we have two brand new, amazing clubs that I want you to connect with. First of all, we have our podcast club, which is sweet life entrepreneurs and every single Wednesday at noon, Eastern time,

 

I host a room where we are rolling up our sleeves and talking about all these strategies. So if you’re listening to this live and you’re a subscriber to the show, join me at noon Eastern on Wednesday, and we will roll up our sleeves and help you work on your clubhouse strategy with you. Also, if you’ve never spoken in a clubhouse room before,

 

maybe you’re a little nervous to come to stage. Those are the rooms we host and that’s why I make a safe space for you. So please plan to join me on Wednesday. I can’t wait to get to know you. And then the other club that we have is our wave makers club wave makers is all about designing transformational, predictable measurable online services,

 

signature programs, and a suite of offers for high profit and deep purpose. Tuesday nights. Currently we are hosting wave makers rooms. So make sure you’re also following the wave makers club so that you can get access to those rooms. And I will, of course share all of this in the show notes for today, it’s show, which can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 226 and left talking to you have an awesome day and I’ll talk to you on clubhouse.

Episode 223: How To Create A Transformational Online Course – with April Beach

Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™ with April Beach

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs who are launching online courses.

Summary:

Launching an online course isn’t enough. In fact, the sale of on-demand online courses fell by 13.4 billion dollars because people are weary of buying another course they’ll never finish, the material is not good, or they don’t receive the outcome they had hoped. 
 
For entrepreneurs and businesses looking to scale, online courses are still a powerful tool, but how to curate your content and deliver a transformation to your participants will determine whether your course is a huge hit or a huge fail.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the basics of Transformational Course Design™
  2. Be able to assess your current course for needed change
  3. Have 4 steps to take action if you’re building an online course right now

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach to the show. I’m April beach host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast and founder of the Sweetlife company. Thanks for joining me again on another episode where you can take what we deliver to the bank.

 

This show is known for delivering new business trainings and coaching that other businesses and coaches charge thousands for. So thank you so much for tuning in with us before we get started today. And we’re about to talk all about online courses, which I know is a popular topic for so many of you. I want to make sure that you know how you can connect further with us here on the podcast.

 

Delivering information is one thing, but then you usually have questions or you want to know maybe how this applies in your business. So if you are on clubhouse every single week on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock, we host a room and this room is all about the podcast topic of the week. And I take your specific questions on what we talked about on this week show.

 

So if you’re listening right now to episode number 223, and you want to know all about how to launch a transformational online course, you’re listening to this podcast, and then you want to workshop with me and ask your questions. That is where you can find me totally free every single Wednesday on clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time. In order to find that room,

 

you just need to follow me on clubhouse and I can be found at April beach, super simple. So let’s take this podcast from where we are now over to clubhouse, and I’m happy to have a deeper conversation with you and give you support in this area. So who is this episode for this episode is for those of you guys that are in the business launch or scale phase,

 

and you’re thinking about doing so with an online course. So here are a couple of important things to note launching an online course isn’t enough. All right. In fact, the sale of on-demand online courses in free courses actually dropped the consumption of them has dropped over the last couple of years. And that’s because so many people are weary of buying another course or,

 

or even spending their time on a free course. And they understand the material they’re getting really isn’t good, or it isn’t transformational. And they aren’t really getting the outcome that they had hoped that they would receive. So if you are, which you are listening to me here, an entrepreneur or a business, and you’re looking to scale online courses are still really a powerful way to do that.

 

In fact, we help most of our clients watch online courses, but how you curate your content and deliver a transformation to your students, to your clients will determine whether or not your course is a huge hit or a huge fail. And so that’s what we’re talking about today on the show. At the end of this episode, you’re going to understand the basics of transformational course creation and design.

 

You’re going to be able to assess your current courses and whether or not you need to make changes. And you’re going to have four steps to take action if you’re building an online course right now. So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into the show and all of the show notes and everything we have here for you can be found by going to sweet life co.com

 

Okay. So let’s first dive in and talk about what is a transformational course. A transformational course is an online course that delivers measurable transformational results, where your students, your, your clients actually are able to understand what you have taught them and actually practice and put it into action. Instead of so a lot of course, creators, actually, most of them just teach you how to kind of outline your content in benchmarks and basic reverse engineering.

 

You need to do much more of that. If you want to scale your business and become an undisputed leader in your space by creating a transformational online course. So that’s why this is so important. The problem is more content is not better. You know, nobody needs more content. Nobody is out there saying, please inundate me with more content. I know I’m not.

 

And I’m sure you’re not either your students and your clients and the people that are going to go through your course. They just need a transformation. And that transformation could be a micro transformation, or it could be a major transformational outcome for them. So in able to do that, or being able to do that as a course, creator means that you need to understand how to design your course,

 

that includes delivering a transformational measurable result in the end. And according to canto.com content overload is when too many different blog posts and articles and ideas and suggestions cover one specific area. And I know that as entrepreneurs, that you’re struggling with that if you’re talking about something that so many other people are talking about in that same area, it is a huge issue for your business.

 

And it has a couple of negative effects for one, it creates a vast quantity of material covering this one topic, and it makes a really hard for you to stand out. Another problem is that it turns off a potential audience and they don’t want to shift through endless content to find the one thing they’re looking to achieve. And you can read that article.

 

We’ll go ahead and put that link to that article in the show notes for you guys on our website. And so as an entrepreneur, I know you’re struggling with this. I know that you need to understand how to stand out, how to become known, how to become, like what I call undisputed leader. And I talked to hundreds of entrepreneurs every single month that are asking,

 

how do I make my course or my program or my service stand out. And it all starts with simplified transformational program design. So I want you to write those words down in your memory. If you’re driving your car to say with me transformational course or service or program design. Okay. And that’s what we’re talking about here today. That’s what we teach within the Sweetlife company.

 

If you’re looking for a resource beyond this podcast in this area. And so here are some steps I want to give you that you can walk away with though immediately so that you can take a look at your course. Step. Number one is if you already have a course, take a look at your curriculum, take a look at it. And if you’re in the process of building your online course,

 

take a look at what you’re proposing to build, and you need to be able to articulate the injuries Results so that people can expect, know what to expect fully in the end with the transformation they’re going to get from your course, not just what is the end, but what is the detailed transformation that they can expect? You don’t want to just say,

 

Oh, they’ll feel better as a parent, if you’re launching a parent coaching course, or they’ll know how to land speaking gigs, if you’re a speaking coach or they’ll know how to run or moderate a part, a clubhouse room, those are all too general. I recommend that you were able to specifically articulate and identify the transformation like this. So instead of they’ll feel better as a parent,

 

you should be able to say something about your course, like they will have crafted their parenting plan with confidence. So it’s really specific. And you’re talking about how they’re getting the transformation, or instead of they’ll know how to land a speaking gig. It’s something to the effect of, they will have completed the pitch process to land their dream stages. See it’s much more specific.

 

And it also alludes to how you’re teaching them, how to do that. And instead of launching a course that just says, Hey, you know, they’re going to know how to run a great clubhouse room. Instead. We want you to identify the transformation you’re delivering. And an example could be, they understand the guidelines of moderating inclusive clubhouse rooms. You see the difference in that.

 

So step number one is really taken a good look at your curriculum. Number one, do you actually understand the transformation that you’re giving people? Is that really, really clear to you? And if you don’t it’s okay. I don’t want you to feel like, Oh my gosh, I can’t believe, I don’t know the transformation because I literally speak with entrepreneurs all the time that are like,

 

wow, April, I’ve created this course. I bought all these other course creation programs. And I put all this content in there and laid it out. I still can’t articulate the transformation I’m giving people. So if that’s you just, first of all, know that you’re not alone. There’s a lot of people out there talking about how to teach course creation that might not even understand instructional curriculum design.

 

And so that’s not a reflection of you, and it’s certainly not a reflection of your content. So the very first thing to do is to look at the curriculum and be able to clearly identify the transformation in a detailed description. Number two, create transformational benchmarks. And so let’s talk about what I mean by this. I was just hosting a clubhouse room on this topic last week.

 

And I was asked this question and a woman said she’s had a course forever. And they were, I was so excited for her because they were going back through her course and actually understanding the importance of transformational course design they’re going back. And they were updating to redoing their course. It’s been, this killer course has made a ton of money for years.

 

And she asked me, should I measure the transformation in the whole entire course, or also, should I do it in each one of the benchmarks, each one of the modules. And here is the answer to that. Yes. As an expert, you need to understand, to be able to articulate the sub transformations within each benchmark of your course, or of your service,

 

or really this applies to any single business model. We teach transformational program development and design that applies to mastermind creation, membership creation. This can apply to a one hour coaching call with somebody. This can apply to any way that you deliver your content right now in this podcast, we’re just talking specifically about course creation. So step number two is create transformations within each one of your benchmarks and take a look and make sure that you understand them,

 

that you can articulate in a detailed way, the sub transformations within each one of your modules or benchmarks as well. And number three is to curate content the way people learn. Okay, this is really, really important understanding. The more content does not equal a better course or a program. We talked about that in the beginning, right? So your responsibility is to actually remove the content that does not directly apply to the end result that you are giving.

 

That is step number one, take a look at your course, or if you’re in the process of building the course, take a look at it and say, okay, what doesn’t actually have to be in here to deliver the transformation that I’m guaranteeing people, but there’s even more than that. As an entrepreneur, I understand that you’re not an instructional design expert or a scientific learning expert,

 

but if you’re offering a course, you have to curate curriculum with transformational program or service or coaching design. This is how you lead people to amazing results. And this is how you become an undisputed leader in your space. So I want you to understand this. Most people believe that repeated exposure to material, right? So going over the things that you teach them in each module and rereading it and practicing it and memorizing it is like the best way to get people Results.

 

But according to the McGraw center for teaching and learning at Princeton university, this is super time consuming and it’s actually less effective. Instead. They recommend making, learning difficult in strategic and desirable ways to enhance retention, retrieval and transfer of knowledge. Let me see, say that all again. You’re probably going like, Whoa, Whoa, you’re talking about Princeton university,

 

April, I’m a nutritionist or I’m a marketing coach, or, you know, whatever it is is totally doesn’t apply to me, but yet it does as course creators. It is important that we understand instructional design, especially if you are building your company and scaling your business with creating a product that gives people results and they have to go through a process of learning.

 

Let me say that again. A lot of course, creators<inaudible> course creators out there, put a bunch of content in a course, lay it out in a time in line and then give people homework for each benchmark. That is true. Really not the way to get people Results in your program. And what we find is just going over their notes or rereading the things that you’ve done isn’t necessarily the way to do it.

 

In fact, to this study by Princeton university, they actually recommend understanding and absorbing some of your content in your program and intentionally making it difficult, but doing so in desirable ways, creating challenges within your course that people want to overcome. They want to do. And it’s not super easy, but let’s go ahead and dive a little bit more into this because you might just be like,

 

totally tuning me out at this point, which I really hope you’re not because again, as a course creator or somebody that wants to offer a course, it’s important that you understand this in the process of building your curriculum. So does it irritable difficulties? So let’s kind of dive into that. What does that actually mean? Desirable difficulties is a term that Dr.

 

Robert York from UCLA came up with over 20 years and refers to conditions of learning that create challenges for the learners and even slow down some of the rate of learning. But in the end, they actually enhance the long-term retention of the knowledge and the skills that you’re giving that. So tell us, okay, this is, this is very instructional design and scientific learning,

 

and I totally get it. You’re like, okay, April, I’m not offering it MBA. I’m like just teaching somebody how to get more YouTube fans or whatever it may be. I totally totally get it. But you are a course creator and bringing your clients also known as your students from one place to another in knowledge or skill is what you’re promising them.

 

Right? And therefore you should include some measure of desirable difficulties. And again, what is that? So let’s take a look at your course either you’ve created a course or you’re thinking about creating a course. It desirable difficulty is placing a challenges, certain number of challenges and everybody’s program is different within your course, that they’re ready for non a challenge at every single week or every single module,

 

but really great challenges that your clients are ready to face. And by doing so, they get excited about doing it. They want to do it. They want to take what you’ve been teaching them and delivering to them over the past couple of weeks or months or however long or your program is. And they want to put it into action. It’s hard.

 

It’s really, really hard, but it’s the best kind of hard because they know that doing it is for sure. What’s going to raise them from where they are to the next level of where they want to be with you. Here’s an example of this at my company, at the Sweetlife life company, we have a program that’s called your signature offer, and we teach small businesses and entrepreneurs how to develop industry leading online courses.

 

We have taught this for over 13 years, as a matter of fact, way back when in 2008, we launched an online course on how to create online courses like before the whole entire online world was talking about it. And here is why the process of curating your curriculum and building courses in a way that embraces what you are capable of as an expert,

 

as far as scientific learning. But it also levels up your customer’s outcome. Your clients not only retention in your program, but the Results in your program. That’s how we build leading entrepreneurs and businesses. And we teach a process in my program called your signature offer. That actually takes your thoughts out of your mind and your expertise and puts them into a process that creates what we call transformational program design.

 

It is really hard work, but by the time we actually teach that in my, your signature offer program, people are ready for that. And so they’ve gone through the places in the benchmarks where they’re like, okay, bring it on. I am so amped up for this. I’m totally Agra, ready to grow. It’s going to be great work.

 

This is good, important work, because they’re ready for it. If we huge challenges for them throughout the whole entire program, they would never do it. If we created no challenges for them throughout the program, they would learn nothing and they’d have no transformation. So I always loved kind of showing you guys behind the scenes on our company and how we do things.

 

So let’s take that example and let’s look at your course or your program that you’re creating or that you’ve already launched. Do you have desirable levels of difficulty that are strategically placed that cause challenges that enhanced the outcome and the transformation people are getting within your course, if you don’t, then it’s time to take a look at that. And if you feel like you’re actually having a panic attack right now,

 

and you’re like, Oh my gosh, I don’t even know where to start then cruise over to signature offer.com and you can join one of my next white boarding sessions. I do these white boarding sessions for free all the time. And we’ll whiteboard out your course together. Or like I said, join me on clubhouse at noon on Wednesday, the week this show drops and we’ll,

 

we’ll be diving into this together. And here’s some things I want for you to consider as we’re wrapping up this really important episode here on the show. Number one, understand that action is part of your client’s learning process, but how are you going to implement that action? What is the difference between them taking action? And you just giving them work to say you gave them work,

 

or frankly you giving them no work because you just wanted your course easy to get through. Where is the measure there based on the transformation that you are promising they’ll receive from your course, number two, create challenges at the right points within your program, not just to create these challenges, but understand when and where people are ready to be challenged. And of course,

 

number three, which is how we started out this show, cut the content and focus on the transformation and the output of the process that you are teaching more content is not better. And if you take anything away from this episode, because I know we talked about a lot, number one is to simplify the content within your course, don’t overload people with more and more and more content.

 

Instead, look at the content within your course or your program and ask yourself, how am I going to make this transformational it, every single touch point within what I’m delivering to my clients. If you want to take your course, you want your course to take the lead in your space. You’re going to need to design it like a leader designs courses.

 

And this applies to mini courses, signature courses, and frankly, any program that requires learning and implementation based on the information that you teach. So we talked about a lot of things today, today in episode number 222 here on this wheat life entrepreneurial business podcast, we were talking about how to launch a transformational online course. This again is for those of you guys who are just starting to scale your business with online courses,

 

whether you have had a course for years like the woman I was speaking to in clubhouse, or you’re just now trying to tap into the power of scaling your business. Your online courses understand that launching a course alone is not enough. Also understand that the completion of online courses has fallen so much, that you have to understand how to engineer your curriculum in order to get people transformational,

 

measurable, predictable results, and the resources we have for you. Again, our join me in clubhouse. Let’s have a conversation about this. I’m happy to dive in, roll up my sleeves and link arms with you in our regular weekly clubhouse room on Wednesdays at noon. Again, follow me at April beach and we’ll dive in with this together. Or I want you to also check out signature offer.com

 

if you, to the place where you’re ready to take the lead in your industry. And you want to make sure that the courses that you’re developing are transformational industry, leading courses. That is where you get the steps to do it again. That signature offer.com and all of the show notes from this episode here can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. And I kind of geeked out on the research for this one.

 

So in those show notes, there’s a couple of really important resources. We have actually put the Princeton resource in there for you as well, as well as I’m putting a link to how to create strategic levels of difficulty from Dr. Robert Bjork here in the show notes as well. So if you want to dive in deeper to that, I’ve made sure all of these resources are here for you.

 

All right, you guys, thanks so much for tuning into the show. I can’t wait to talk to you again next week on a, another podcast that delivers a business coach. You can take to the bank. You guys have an awesome week. Bye for now.

Episode 222: How To Safeguard Your Content with Copyright Protection – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 14, 12:00 Eastern time Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

Those who want to know how to file for and use copyright protection. 

Summary:

In this episode we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course or content creator, and you have work that is not protected, this is an urgent episode for you. We dive into who needs copyright protection, what you must be careful to do when hiring help to create works for you, and how to start the process of protecting your work. 
 
This is part 2 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 1 we dove into Trademark protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you have work that needs to be protected
  2. Understand how to own the work that others create for you
  3. Have the first steps to file for copyright protection today

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back. So the show April beach here, host of this show and founder of this wheat life company. I’m so glad that you’ve joined us again. This is part two of a two part series that we’re doing with our special guests,

 

Francesca Whitesburg. Last week, we dove in to trademarking protection who needs trademarking, the difference between word marketing and design marking. And so if you miss that, please pause this show, go back and start with last week of that is an area of need in your business. That was episode number 221. And today this is episode number 222. This episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business development in that stage is connected to our start to scale up system.

 

If you don’t know what phase of business development you’re in, we have an amazing, powerful, free resource for you where you can take a short assessment and get the exact stage and phase of business development you’re in and get a complete list of what you should be working on right now. And you can get that short assessment and access all of those tools by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

forward slash quiz. If you haven’t done that, or if it’s been a while, since you’ve tested where you are in your business growth phase, I highly recommend you tap into that amazing resource. Now let’s talk about what we can expect from today’s show. So this episode is for those of you who want to know how to step into the process of protecting your creative work through filing for copyright protection,

 

our guest is absolutely hands down amazing. She has done work for our company and many of our clients, and I’m so pleased that she agreed to be on this show. Today, we are talking with the trademarking attorney, Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course creator,

 

if you’re a content creator, if you have work that you have actually built, brought to life in tangible form and you have not protected it yet, we need you to be very careful. That is your creative work. That is your genius, and you need to protect it so nobody else can take it from you. And so we’re talking about how to go about that in today’s show clearly a very important show for our audience.

 

Now, the end of this episode, you’re going to know if you have work that needs to be protected. You’re going to know the process of going through the first steps to filing for protection. And you’re going to understand a few other very important things like how to own the work that others create for you. Other independent contractors, and even how to avoid getting into trouble when using protected material from other businesses within your marketing.

 

There’s so many important things that we discuss on today’s show. And so I’m so glad that you’re here and you’re not missing it. So let’s talk about our guest. If you did not hear her amazing introduction last week, let me give you an introduction. Francesca Whitesburg is an award winning intellectual property law attorney specializing in trademarks brands and copyrights. She advises Tom businesses,

 

brands, entrepreneurs, professionals, talent, startups, and individuals. Francesca has experienced working at various in-house global luxury brands. She has also worked in the world’s largest law firm today. She’s a partner at an IP law firm, Loza and Loza and creates content on her Instagram. And she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram. She’s absolutely amazing.

 

So I’m very glad that you’re here, power packed episode. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of this show notes and the resources that we’re discussing can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and simply click on podcast. And this is episode number two 22. Also, we have one more important bonus. So Mark your calendar. If you are on clubhouse,

 

we invite you to join Francesca and me in our regular Wednesday room on Wednesday, April the 14th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Now, what does that mean? That means you get to jump into a clubhouse room and you get to ask Francesca your copyright questions, your direct business questions. That’s what we love clubhouse. And we actually use clubhouses our community extension to this podcast now.

 

So we have a regular room. We host every single Wednesday at noon. You are invited to join us there this week on April, the 14th, Francesca is going to be there taking your copywriting questions as an extension from this podcast episode. So it’s an amazing opportunity of course, completely free and a chance for you to really get your business legal questions answered.

 

If you’d like to join this room, here are the steps to do that. Visit me on Instagram at April beach life. And you can click on the link in my bio and simply follow me on clubhouse and follow our club on clubhouse. When you do that, you’re going to have notifications and with clubs house, when your notifications are on, that gives you access to these very special rooms.

 

So very simply follow me on clubhouse. And I can be found at, at April beach on clubhouse, where you can go to my Instagram at April beach life on Instagram. And both of those opportunities will give you a chance to follow me there or giving you notifications in access to Francesca. So that’s our special bonus with today’s episode. And I know that’s going to be so powerful for so many of you who really do have important business questions you need answered right now.

 

So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episodes. Welcome back to another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I am joined again by my very favorite person this year, Francesca Whitesburg. She is here diving in with everything legal for you to protect your content, your intellectual property. And this is actually part two of a two part podcast episode we did last week.

 

We dove all into trademarking. So if you miss last week, pause this, go back to episode two 21 and start with that one and then come back here and join us. If you listened to last week, let’s get ready to go. We have so much to cover today and you are going to gain so much knowledge by this wonderful woman who is here just strictly to pour into you to protect your intellectual property.

 

So welcome back to the show. Francesca, thank you so much for me. Thank you for having me April. I’m excited to talk about copyrights. Yeah. Okay. So actually let’s go ahead and dive right in. So really what is copywriting for anybody who is absolutely brand new at this? They know they need to know what it is, but they don’t even have a baseline starting point.

 

Yeah, of course. So copyright is a form of intellectual property protection that the text creative works that can be your videos, your photos, your courses, the layout of their website, your podcasts. It covers anything that you’ve created. That’s fixed in a tangible media. So it can’t be like an idea in your head gotta be written down, actually like manifested in the real,

 

but once it’s out there, it’s protected automatically under copyright law. Okay. So let’s take a step back. I know we talked about it extensively in last week’s episode, but can you just give a general description to our listeners in what is intellectual property, Of course, intellectual property, which is IP, which we refer to as refers to creations of the mind.

 

They’re your invention. Anything that’s proprietary that you can upload your photos, your grants, your slogans, trade secrets. These are all things that you have created that either you or your business owns. I like to say you have your IP toolbox. And then in that tool box, there’s different tools you can use like patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets.

 

So good. Okay. So incredibly foundational, but yet so many businesses aren’t aware of that. All right. So my next question for you, and I know our listeners, especially those who listened to last week are automatically asking this question right now. What is the difference between a copyright protection and trademarking? Yes. Trademarks really protect source identifiers. So Sweetlife when you read that name,

 

you know, that that’s April beaches programs, she’s offering her consulting services April. You’ve seen, created a full brand around that. And also it’s your company name too, but to consumers, we know that that’s April. So that word tells people that if you get consulting from this person, it’s April, who’s behind it. The same thing. When you see Coca-Cola or burger King,

 

you go to a McDonald’s in Spain, you’re in a know that it’s the same person who’s behind that. That’s the function of a trademark. Now a copyright is a very different tool, but they can overlap. So copyright extends to any creative expressions. So if you have a really unique logo that went along with sweet life, I it’s like a little like circle with some interesting artwork in there that you use.

 

And when I, anyone one sees that I think April, but also it’s very detailed. It’s original. That can also be protected by copyright. So if you are working with IP counsel, a good lawyer is going to advise you holistically and really tell you all the tools that you can use to protect your intellectual property from different angles. Okay. Fascinating.

 

And so for our listeners, do they need to register their works for copyright protection? So copyrights are similar to trademarks in that they are granted automatically. As soon as you create something you posted online, put it, like we said, in the fixed medium, then you have protection. However, if someone is using your work in an unauthorized manner, that your permission,

 

right. To actually get them to stop in the United States, you need a registration certificate. So I like to say, you know, you could send them a letter, you can send them a DM telling them to take it down. Cause it’s, you know, using your copyrighted material. But with that, without a registration, it’s like waving an empty gun.

 

You’re really not gonna have any teeth behind it. Got it. Okay. And so let’s kind of just pause here because I want to get back into content around courses and really big written works that many of our listeners do, but let’s just kind of take a jog for a second and talk about a couple of areas where people tend to run into trouble and they have absolutely no idea when they’re using other people’s works.

 

So the first one is photography and using somebody else’s photography within your business, what do people need to know in relation to copyright? Anytime you use photos taken from the internet or anyone else’s photos, technically you need permission and you can get yourself into a lot of trouble if you use it even on just a random post or you’re using it for something more visible,

 

even mental, a lot of trouble. And so the way that you get around it is you either use photos and images that you’ve taken yourself, or you can purchase the rights to some of these images. That’s where you can use database as like Getty images to buy a license, to use those infants for certain purposes. Yeah. And I think that the,

 

you know, so many new businesses and actually even established businesses that are just trying to scale online, just kind of starting to get their Instagram out there. They don’t realize that grabbing another photo out there, you know, there is a license, but behind that and that you have to be within your legal rights to use that. And so just wanted to make sure that we were discussing that here on the show as well,

 

because I, I know that people have ran into problems with that in the past. Another kind of side question for you here, going back to our listeners original piece of work, their course that they’re creating the content that they’re delivering within their coaching programs or their mastermind, or they’re teaching their intellectual property, their methods, their signature programs, right. With some of our listeners hire other people to create parts of their work for them.

 

What do they need to know and be careful about when they’re doing that? Yeah, that’s a great point April. So when you hire someone to create whether it’s a logo with design web design, anytime you’re paying someone to build software or whatever it is, if they’re not an employee within the scope of employment, paying them a salary or hourly, or the bank benefits,

 

then technically they are the owner of the intellectual property. So you need a written assignment called an assignment for what an assignment means is a transfer of rights. So that person needs to sign a document that says all the intellectual property created around this program. And it’s more detailed than that, but I give all that copyright and all that property is transferred to two and you’re comfortable.

 

It’s very critical, especially if you’re going to pay a lot of money, really need to get this in writing because otherwise they own what you thought you paid for and they can continue to use themselves, or they can give it away to other people and competitors. Yeah. Imagine that nightmare hiring somebody to, you know, create something for you and your course or your program.

 

And then it’s not actually yours. So important. So thank you so much for discussing that. And that assignment is, is really incredibly important. And, you know, I know that the majority of our listeners, their teams that they have are actually independent contractors. So this is completely something that is critical for them to be aware of is this assignment within their independent contractor agreements.

 

And that’s why working with an expert like you to make sure it is, it says exactly what they used to say is so incredibly. Okay. So let’s go back to this process of protecting copyright. So another side question for you when our listeners are using the notation on the bottom of their slides or their PDFs or delivering, or their written work, and they have the little copyright protection and then they have the gear on there and then their ownership,

 

why is that important? And what is the correct way? If there is a correct way just to enter into that sort of, Yeah, you, you hit the nail on the head, you see the copyright symbol, which will say do it in an emoji you’re on like on your phone. And then you put either your name or your company’s name.

 

Whoever’s really claiming rights to that ID. And then the year, and what that does April is that’s putting third parties on notice it’s again, reminding people, Hey, this is my copyright. This is protectable information. If you use it without my authorization, it’s illegal. So don’t do it. We’ll do it. The only way that you can really get them to stop is if you file that registration.

 

Got it. Okay. And so I know that we get that question all the time. Clearly if I don’t answer it because I’m not an attorney and I know that so many of our users are wondering that, you know, they see that when can I use it? How do I use it? Especially those that have multiple years listed on that listing and in exactly how to go about doing that.

 

And so does the year usually reflect the original work or does the year cover when it is currently being protected in that listing on it? It could vary, right? So like sometimes it’s like people open up a book, you’ll see the original publication copyright notice, but then they’ll be the most current version. But for our purposes, I think it’s fine to do it.

 

Like, let’s say you had to create your website in 2020, you can have 20, 20 is the date, but then if you make changes to it, which you’re going to just keep updating, updating the year. Okay. So many, I already know that these are questions people listening or are having, okay. So now let’s go back to kind of the center of what we’re talking about here today for our listeners,

 

how do they start the process of protecting their intellectual property, their content course program outlines, where do they begin with this process? Yeah. I’d love the way you put it April, because you implicitly said, how do they protect what they already have? Everyone already has IP. It’s just a matter of understanding, which are your most important assets and how you go about protecting them.

 

So I actually offer an Ikea audit where I will look at websites, social media pages, courses, some of my clients give me access to their, you know, their subscription-based or whatever, log in to see their forces. I do a very holistic review. And then we will go get on the phone and do a 30 minute call to discuss what their most important assets are or we could talk about,

 

okay, here’s the name of your operating vendor? Have you thought about three markets that’s going to filing for that copyrights? Do you have your independent contractor agreement language? We’ll kind of go through and just do like a checklist, like as if I literally am doing an audit on your seat and make sure you have everything there. I recommend that as a starting point,

 

and there’s also an IP audit and I can action plan, which is like the deluxe version of that, which is going to really do a deep dive. And then we come up with eight phase one plan, which is your first three to six months on what filings to do. And then also the next like six to 12 plus months for the next round of filings,

 

because everyone has so much great content. That’s great IP. It gets a little overwhelming to think, Oh, I have to do everything. The reality is that you don’t, you stage it out. And if you have a plan strategy about it, it’s really not going to be that expensive. It’ll be way more expensive than the end. If you don’t do this.

 

And if you try to do deal with cease and desist letters or sending this letters as they arise. Yeah. Nightmare. So once somebody submits their work for copyright protection, each time they update it, do they need to resubmit that Great question. So anytime you modify a work that it becomes a new popular, it’s a new work. So I would say as long as the modification is substantially similar to the original work,

 

then you can rely on that. But if it’s very different and using that a lot publicly, it’s probably worth at least running it by an IP lawyer to come up with a strategy. Okay. So much great information, Francesca, thank you so much for being our guest again here on the show and joining us in clubhouse rooms where we talk about this.

 

There’s so many places where people can connect with you. You know, we highly recommend that people take up the opportunity to go through an IP audit. And what I love about why I have you on this show is that you understand the way service-based online entrepreneurs work and you understand what they’re creating and you understand courses and masterminds and signature programs, and you understand all these things.

 

And so it’s hard, frankly, to find an expert like you, that fully understands the assets that our listeners are creating. So thank you so much for being on the show and being an amazing resource and the best place for people to connect with you is through your Instagram. Is that correct? Yes. I have a link in my bio. It’s my counselee.

 

I’m happy to get on a 15 minute call just to hear about your business And to discuss if you want to do an IP audit or if you just want to Connect. Yeah. Great. All of you guys should take her up on that. It’s a very, I know it’s crazy. It’s totally free. So you can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and we will make sure that a link to that of course is in our show notes as well.

 

So it’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And what is your clubhouse handle the trademark at the trademark attorney on clubhouse as well? Of course. Thank you so much for being here again and being our guest expert this week. I know that everybody really needed to hear a way, the things we’ve been talking about the last two weeks on the show. So certainly appreciate your time.

 

Absolutely. Thanks April. Thank you so much for sticking around with us. What an amazing episode Francesca is a super genius and perfectly in line with what our listeners and our clients need. If you would like to work with Francesca, if you would like to just take her up on her opportunity to connect with her for a free IP audit, please visit Francesca directly by visiting at the trademark attorney on Instagram.

 

So for handle is the trademark attorney on Instagram and the trademark attorney on clubhouse. She can be found at both of those places. Thank you so much for tuning into the show. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about, and all these links can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. You guys have an awesome day. Bye bye for now.

Episode 221: How To Protect Your Business by Trademarking – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Bonus – Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 7 & 9, 12:00 Eastern time. Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

As you name your business, programs, courses or creative work, you want people to recognize them as your brand, and it’s important that you know how to protect your creations so that others can’t use it. 

Summary:

In this episode, we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company name, tag lines and creative work including your courses, branded programs and more. In this jam-packed powerful episode, we’re diving into; Who needs trademark protection? How much it costs? How to check if the name you want to use is available? How to block someone from using your trademark and more. 
 
This is part 1 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 2 we dive into Copyright protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you need to file for trademark protection
  2. Understand the difference between word and design marks
  3. Know where to start in your protection process

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome to episode two. You one here, we’re diving into an important topic today, and that’s how to protect your business through the process of trademarking. And there are so many questions around trademarking.

 

We get this all the time in our business programs, especially in my year signature offer business program, where people are really coming in and branding their method, branding their industry, leading signature programs. And so there are always questions around how do I protect the name of what I’m creating? And so I invited today’s guests to come in, pour into you.

 

And this is what we can expect by spending time together here today. First of all, this episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business growth and development. Now, this really aligns with one of the tools here that we give away completely free with the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And that is a self-assessment where you can find out exactly what stage of business you are in.

 

And you can take this self-assessment by simply visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. So when we’re talking about who this particular podcast episode is for this episode happens to be for any of you wherever you fall in the phase of business development. Because if you haven’t protected your intellectual property yet through trademarking, then this is an important topic to pay attention to. So as you go through the process of naming your business and your programs and your courses and your creative work,

 

you want people to recognize that they’re yours, they’re your brand. It’s an important part of building your business, a recognizable brand. And so in this episode, we’re talking to trademark attorney Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company, name, your tagline, to your creative work, including your courses, your branded programs,

 

and more, this is a jam packed episode. And she talks about powerful things in here that every single business owner needs to know. And then we’re diving into who needs a trademark protection. How much does it cost? How to check if the name that you want is available, how to block someone who could be using your trademark or infringing upon your trademark.

 

And there’s so many different things we’re going to dive into. So I’m going to go ahead and get right over to the episode. However, I want to make sure that you know, that this is part one of two episodes where we have Francesca on the show. And so next week we’re talking all about copyright protection and today is all about trademark. At the end of this episode,

 

you will know if you need to file for trademark protection, you will understand the difference between a wordmark and a design Mark, and you’ll know where to start in your protection process. Everything we’re talking about here can be found@theshownotesbyvisitingusatsweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 221. And one last thing we are going to be live with has got on clubhouse the Wednesday that this show drops.

 

So that will be Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. So if you were not following me yet on clubhouse at April beach, and you want to connect with Francesca in, take your questions from this episode to her, live in clubhouse, then make sure that you join us. And you can simply do that by following me at April beach on clubhouse and turn on the little bell for the notifications.

 

And you will get notified when we’re going live, which will give you access to Francesca. It will give you access to this room. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> Hi everybody. I am so excited to be joined by Francesca Wittenberg, who has been instrumental in helping our business, make sure that everything that we have is our ducks in a row.

 

If you will say, and she’s here joining me on the podcast today, talking about quite a few very important legal foundations that you really need to have a no for your business. And so Francesco, welcome to the show. Thank you so much for being here. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself in UHIN, who you serve and really how you got to where you are right now,

 

professionally. Thank you so much, April. I’m super excited to be here. My name is Francesca Pittsburgh. I go by the trademark attorney on Instagram and I’m an IP lawyer. We’re going to talk about what IP is, but basically I help creators businesses, anyone who has created something using their intellectual creativity and especially people who are trying to monetize that I help,

 

whether it’s trademarks, copyrights, helping businesses get started to monetize and protect what they created is what I do. And I service really a variety of industries. I have fashion experience, story brands, online businesses in particular, and navigating how to protect content and all of the assets that you’ve created online. That’s really been my niche for the past year or two.

 

And, you know, I got started by going to law school. I had no idea what intellectual property was like most people. And I thought it was so amazing how, what you create are your real assets. These are real things that you can command. You can protect, you can sell. So I really fell in love with that. And also helping businesses get off the ground.

 

I feel like I’m able to kind of give back really help people launch. And so I got into it. I worked at a small IP boutique. I also had experience working in the legal departments at Prada and Tory Burch and the international jewelry brand from there. I really got the bug and I just wanted to learn everything in anything about intellectual property, in whatever industry.

 

And then I worked at the world’s biggest law firm called Dentons. I worked in Manhattan and Brock center for a little bit over three years, and then I made a big change. Yeah. I mean a big change becoming a partner at an IP boutique firm, meaning we only do intellectual property from start to finish like firms located in LA, but I’m based in New York and New Jersey.

 

I can service clients everywhere. And since September, I’ve just been really hitting the ground, running, helping a lot of online businesses, connecting on clubhouse, meeting people like you April. So I’m super excited to share my knowledge with everyone today. I’m so excited that you’re here and you know what? You do this super hyper niche area of serving online businesses.

 

I mean, you help our listeners protect their ideas and protect their services and their programs and their courses and their actual digital products, which is absolutely right on. And I know that there are so many people in this business space that are creating content that are creating different assets and what we call IP that have no idea, even the first step on, on how to protect that.

 

So let’s go ahead and start there. What actually is IP? What is intellectual property? Sure. So intellectual property refers to creations of the mind. They are inventions designs, creative works, brands, slogans, or anything that you’ve created kind of creatively. And so the law is divided up into certain categories and I like to call it, you know,

 

you have your IP toolbox. So there’s certain tools that you can use to protect whatever it is that you created or your business there’s patents, which protects inventions. Sometimes it protects certain ways of doing things processes, and it also sometimes protects designs. If it meets certain thresholds, then there’s trade secrets, which kind of works in tandem with aunts. If you’re not eligible for a patent may be able to protect confidential and secret information that is proprietary to your business so long as you’ve kept it private and you haven’t publicly disclosed it.

 

Then what we’re really going to focus on today is trademarks and copyrights. Trademarks are your brands. They are the symbols. And the names that you have created to tell that this is my business. I April beach am the owner of your signature offer. I upgraded this course, and that is my protectable content. The function of trademarks are to point to the source.

 

And then there’s copyright. Copyright is the creative regime. It really extends to creative, works such as content photos, certain texts, if it’s eligible videos, website layout. So, you know, just by saying that alone, there are so many different tools that you can use to protect an online business. And so we can talk about that. Wow.

 

Okay. So in, this is exactly why, I mean, just in that definition that you just gave, you talked about four really important areas that our listeners can and should be possibly if they qualify, protecting what they have created and what they plan to create. And I really want to dive specifically into trademarks today and we’re going to have Francesca back on the show.

 

Everybody don’t worry, and we’re going to be diving into other things as well. But I think this is really the most important place to start out. You know, just in my, your signature offer master class, we were having this kind of behind the scenes conversation about this. And even those students of mine that have been in business for over a decade are just almost like in this panic mode when this conversation came up because they realized they might not have done things correctly.

 

And so that’s why I’m really excited to dive into trademarking today. So first of all, I understand that there are two types of different trademarks that you can protect. Is it like a design Mark and a word Mark? Can you explain what those two different types of, of marks are to our, Yeah, I get asked all the time I have a brand name and I have a logo,

 

which one should I file for what’s protectable? And the short answer is that the word market itself, if you file an application with the government, just for the word in standard characters, that will automatically protect the name and any siloization. So if you go to re rebrand and change your logo, if you have a wordmark registration, that’ll extend any specializations colors,

 

whatever format. So we do searches for the word. And if that’s available, I usually say, go for the word Mark, but you’re right, that sometimes clients will have, let’s say it’s not just a script, right? Let’s say that they came up with a unique character or some sort of interesting artwork that they have in a circle next to the word,

 

a good example of this is target, right? You know, target has the word target and red, and then you’ll see the bullseye above that bullseye they use as a trademark. So they could file for the word target without a stylization and be protected. They can also file just for the bullseye, which is the design element, and that will be protected or they can file for a lockup version,

 

which includes the word and the design. So there are a variety of ways and it really is case by case specific, but more importantly, it’s about budget. And I always tell clients, start with your corny for your forklifts and services, because it can get very expensive. And also as a point of strategy, it may not be worth filing for every single variation of the bark.

 

Just start with your core name and your core goods or services. Okay. And who needs to file trademark protection? Let’s kind of really cover some basics like who needs it. You know, what’s funny is that if you were asking this question 10, 15 years ago, the answer different, it used to be fortune 500 companies had trademark lawyers and they were the ones Coca-Cola Pepsi,

 

big brands were the ones registering trademarks that has completely shifted with online businesses. And I think we need to take a step back and explain an important concept April that you and I have discussed. So in the United States, trademark rights are based on use. So I’m sure all of you have one point or another. Someone has said to you, Oh, you don’t need a trademark right now.

 

You don’t need to file the trademark. You have rights just based on use, just continue to use the problem with that is, like I said, 15, 20, 30 years ago, that wasn’t really an issue because you were a store in one particular market in one city, right. Or your restaurant, or you were consulting in one area in person.

 

So it didn’t matter. Really. If someone was using the same name, you’re in New Jersey and someone’s using it in LA necessarily. So the law as it States is you have Commonwealth rights. Your rights are limited to that, to where you’re actually using who you’re servicing with online businesses that has caused to be blunt chaos, because how do you prove where your servicing clients by being on Instagram online,

 

you know, having websites that technically target and market, not only all 50 States, but even outside the us. So the way that you get around those issues is by filing the application with the government, having a registration gives you a presumption of rights in all 50 States. So that way, if someone is using your name, all you have to do is send them that piece of paper.

 

That’s triplicate of registration and show them that you’re the owner and they should in theory. Got it. So many questions that, and I’m obviously, you know, I’m bringing questions from clients that I, that I know have been asking as well. So let’s kind of start back at the beginning. If there’s somebody who’s listening to this and they have program that they’ve named,

 

let’s say it’s best business, one, two, three, or whatever that they have been using for a long period of time. What are their first steps as of now versus somebody who hasn’t even, who’s coming up with a new name, let’s start with the established people that are saying, Hey, listen, my company name isn’t registered my program, or my course name or my mastermind name,

 

isn’t registered. What should those people that are already have an existing piece of work that they own do at this point in time? Yeah. And I think it comes back again to budgeting and understanding that a little bit of money can go a long way if you’re strategic about it. What I like to do differently, I think than most lawyers is clients come to me and say,

 

Oh, for test that I want to file for this. I say, let’s take a step back. We can definitely file. But did you protect your brand name, your core name? I have clients that come and say, Oh, this slogan, I want to protect it’s brand new and it’s new. No one’s using it. So what I do is I do an IP audit for a lot of clients,

 

but when they come to me, I say, let’s just take a step back. Let’s look at all of your websites, all of your courses, and let’s figure out what’s the most important instead of you deciding or someone telling you which trademark to file let’s think strategically and say, what are your most core names, your core content and connection with your core services?

 

Because it gets very expensive very quickly. So I would tell people who are using, and they haven’t had anything registered to really, you know, touch base. I’m happy to do this, to discuss and do the IP audit, but you can also do it yourself and just think like, what are the core names that I’m using and for what particular services,

 

and then get those on file. Yes. Maybe you came up with like a super cool name slogan that you’re using, but are you really going to be using that in six months to a year versus I would say the name that you’re operating under, that may be the first starting point. So I would say, you know, either check in with an IP attorney who can do that with you,

 

for you, or think about it and then get those on file. Okay. And let’s make sure that you guys don’t have to wait until the end of this. If you want to connect with Francesca for that IP audit, find her on Instagram at the trademark attorney. And she actually has a link in her bio on Instagram. You can just schedule a call with her.

 

So we’re making it really easy for you. It’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And plus she has amazing videos and things on there that you guys will love. And you can schedule a call to set up that IP on it. Okay. So for those people that are listening and they’re new in business, and they’re just trying to, they’re thinking, wow,

 

I really want to name my company. This, what are their first steps? You know, let’s actually talk about how to search the U S PTO. What is that process and is, Yeah. So the first thing is to come up with a name, if you’re just getting started, I would say, come up with names that try to not be so descriptive because as business owners and content creators,

 

we want to express to our viewers what exactly it is that we’re offering. But unfortunately that falls on the lower end of protection. On the trademark scale, the really strong trademarks are the ones that are either made up terms like Google or terms that have nothing to do with the product that you’re selling, like Apple computers. Then there’s this sweet spot that a lot of marketing people like,

 

like April, you do this really well. You will find names that kind of hint at what you’re doing, but don’t literally describe like your signature offer. So those are the sweet spot they’re called suggestive marks. But anything like weaker than that is, is a little bit more descriptive in there. You can still get them as trademarks. They’re just a lot harder to protect and enforce,

 

meaning other people may be able to use them. And then when you go to create a brand that you’re about to invest a lot of money in, you know, you need to think about these things. So the more made up the less related to the actual things that you offer the stronger and the better. Okay. So for those people that are like,

 

okay, this is what I want to do. How do they go search and see if somebody already has that trademark registered? Yeah. So let’s say you came up with an awesome name. The first thing to do is go check on the U S T o.com. That is the government website. The government has a database of registered and pending trademarks. You can plug in the Mark,

 

but unfortunately it’s not very user-friendly. For example, if you put in the Mark, it really may only give you either the exact spelling, maybe with a space, but it really is very limited. It’s going to look for the exact Mark. So if you did work with the trademark where like, for example, I have special software where I plug in the Mark,

 

I plug in the goods and services and then with its AI software, it’ll pull up marks that are medically similar. Maybe they have a translation and a foreign language, and all of those can be potential issues that you’re not going to find yourself. However, for your due diligence. The first thing to do is for you to check on usp.gov, because maybe there is a dead hit,

 

and you’ll find that there, the next thing to do, though, it’s not enough just to look on you as PTO, because there could be people who are using the Mark that may not have a registration. As I mentioned before, trademark rights are based on use. So it’s really important to see who’s using and who can raise a potential objection. You check Google,

 

check, Instagram, check all those platforms, and then if it looks good, that’s when you go and you work with a trademark attorney. Okay. Okay, great. So you do your due diligence, you know, go, you know, was us pto.gov, not.com. It’s not geo OB do that check and then Google the heck out of it as well.

 

And I, I think that that is so important. I know that, you know, some people go, Oh, they’ll just search it and they’ll be like, Oh great, it’s available because it’s not popping up. And that is absolutely nowhere near enough. And then I can speak for experience. You guys, who are listening that I have had Francesca put our trademark names in her AI system and crazy things that there’s no way I ever could have found pop up.

 

So it is definitely an important investment to make. If, if you were in the process of growing your company and you have IP that you want to protect. And so I think that’s really an important thing. So any other last words today, when we’re talking about trademarking moving forward or any other things that our listeners need to know that are often missed,

 

maybe common questions, basically, what am I not asking that I should be asking you? Yeah. Number one, we’re in the middle of a, of a pandemic and a financial downturn. So you’re going to have a lot of people who may not want, or may not have the deans to file trademarks. So I will tell you there’s things you can do to try and protect your name,

 

even without a registration start using those TM symbols. And you may not know what that is. So a TM symbol, now that I’ve mentioned that you’re going to see them everywhere. It means that people are claiming rights to a name or design as a trademark. They’re saying I’ve created this. And when people look at it, it points to me means that’s my website,

 

it’s my services, whatever it is. So you came up with a slogan, or if you have your brand name that isn’t yet registered, put the little TM in the upper right hand corner. And what that does is that puts third parties on notice. So if you have another person to get the Google search went on and found your website, they’re going to see immediately,

 

Oh, this person is claiming trademark rights. I better back off. So that’s an extra element that you can do. It’s not as strong as a registration clearly because your rights are only limited to where you’re using until you get it on file. But at least it’s something. And I would say, think about budgeting for that registration, for some of your four names.

 

It may sound expensive. And I think it’s worth quoting. You know, you’re going to get people who are gonna do this cheaper, and you’re going to find people who are gonna do it more expensive, but my firm has a fixed fee package with a trademark search and the government and the filing. And it’s 1250, you know, that’s a deal,

 

it’s a deal. And I’m just thinking like the cost to respond, who would demand letter or to send a demand letter is that amount. So to get that on file, to kind of not have to worry, think about maybe budgeting that as part of your business process. Yeah. And I will say about, Oh gosh, it’s been about 12 years.

 

We filed a registration for a program that we were licensing to healthcare. And this was 12 years ago. And I think I paid, you know, well over 2,500 for somebody to just file that registration for me. So this is 12 years later, grand Jessica’s team. This is a deal. You guys it’s like the deal of a lifetime and it protects you.

 

And it really covers you. So we love that. So all of you who are listening, if you’re in this place, whether you’re new and you are just coming up with names of really, frankly, especially for those of you guys who have content, you have IP, you have things that you haven’t protected yet. You haven’t done your due diligence.

 

I don’t want you to lose those Francesca. Doesn’t want you to lose those. And so if you have questions about this, I highly recommend that you hit Francesca up for an IP audit. Again, she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and she will, of course be back here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast, again as well. And we’re going to be diving into copywriting next time,

 

which I know so many of our listeners have questions about protecting, like what actually is that? And so I’m excited to talk about that the next time that you are on the show. Thank you so much for being here and for all of your wisdom and pouring into our listeners. Thank you April. Thanks everyone.<inaudible> Wow. What an amazing episode.

 

Thank you so much for hanging out with us today. Again, join us live on clubhouse. You can follow me at April beach, turn on the little bell for notifications and you’ll get exclusive access to this room where Francesca will be here this week on Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Taking your questions based on what we talked about on today’s show.

 

And don’t forget to connect with Francesca directly for her IP audit, which is a very important thing. It’s totally free. I don’t know anybody who shouldn’t take this opportunity up. She is absolutely a gifted expert at what she does. You can visit Francesca at the trademark attorney and she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and on clubhouse. And on Instagram,

 

you can just very simply click the link and schedule a direct free complimentary consultation to get your intellectual property audit started. All right, again, this is episode one of a two part episode. Next week, episode number 222. We’re coming back with Francesca again, talking all about how to protect your creative works through copyright protection. All right, you guys have an awesome day.

 

It’s so great to chat with you and thanks again for tuning into this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast.

Episode 218: Entrepreneur Sleep: How To Thrive As A Peak Performer – with April Beach and Mollie McGlocklin

Mollie McGlocklin SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs Club on Clubhouse to join an upcoming room with Mollie and April

Who This Episode is Great For:

If you’re a sleepless entrepreneur, this show is for you.

Summary:

Sleep is affecting our businesses. Whether good, or bad, your sleep is connected to your company’s performance in some capacity. And, beyond that… our health and livelihood as humans.  But we all know that, right? 
 
If you’re like me – You have no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know!  But this episode is different. Sleep expert, Mollie McGlocklin dives into tracking your sleep with tech, understanding Heart Rate Variability HRV, and simple small-steps you can do each day to work with your Circadian Rhythm. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know how your Circadian Rhythm affects peak performance
  2. Know how to read the date from your wearable sleep technology
  3. And have basic things you can do tomorrow morning towards more productive and healthy sleep

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 218. And I’m April beach, your host founder of the suite Life company. And I am so glad to be talking to you again, usually on this show,

 

we’re talking about scale strategies, online, offer creation, how to create your courses or your mastermind and funnels and marketing. But we are all about building a business to give you the life that you want. And so that requires a holistic view on strategies for both business and life. And so I love doing shows like the ones that we were doing today.

 

And let me be completely clear with you about why this show really hits home for me. About two weeks ago, I landed in Philadelphia from Denver for a weekend to visit my oldest son who plays lacrosse for the university of Delaware. And I was on my laptop. The whole entire time got out of the airport, got in the rental car, turned on clubhouse,

 

and I was really tired. You guys, I had just gotten to this point where I had been going, going, going, by the way, I thrive on going, going, going, but I turn on clubhouse and I was browsing through the rooms of what I should listen to. And there was a room that popped up regarding sleep and it really hit home for me because I knew that this is something that I do not do well in this area.

 

Now a little bit more behind the scenes. I don’t like sleeping. I love being awake. I do really well from 10:00 PM to 1:00 AM. You know, the world falls away, everything’s silent. And that’s when I really thrive as a creator, frankly. And so I would much rather be awake living life than be sleeping. And that’s the way I’ve been my whole entire life,

 

but it’s really taken a toll on me and let’s even go a little bit deeper in transparency behind the scenes. What I used to think when people talked about, Oh, you know, I hit quote unquote, that wall. These are the things that I thought, Oh, you’re going to love me. Or you are totally going to hate me and never listened to this podcast.

 

Again, here’s the honest truth. When I heard anybody say or tell their stories about how they got like super tired and hit a wall. These were the things that went through my head, keeping it real. I thought I am stronger than those people. I thought that will never happen to me. And I thought I am born to thrive in like this balls to the wall type of a life.

 

It’s always how I have been. I love living like this. These people just aren’t built like me. Okay. Talk about really, really judgmental. And that’s when things like hit us on the face because it is in the face because that’s exactly what happened to me in over the last couple of months, I have gotten completely exhausted. The second part of this and why this episode is so important to me personally right now is that I lost my father to dementia.

 

And I realized that the way my brain is functioning is not the same way. It was 10 to 12 years ago. And for whatever obvious reasons that is, you know, age, maybe being one of them, I’m not taking care of my brain. And it is one of my greatest assets. And so when I heard our guests today speak on this clubhouse room about sleep.

 

I knew that I personally needed for her to come in here and deliver some insane wisdom to me as a CEO, as a business owner. And I believe that there are some of you guys out there that need to hear this message and what she’s talking about as well. Now here’s the deal. If you’re like me, you haven’t seriously, no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know that you aren’t doing right?

 

But this episode is different. Our guest today is going to dive into tracking your sleep and understanding technology behind sleep trackers. And she’s talking about simple steps, okay? Simple things that you can do. You know, we’re not going to come in here in this show saying you got to get sleep, but that’s not at all with this show is about,

 

which is why I personally appreciate this episode so much. So let me introduce you to who our guest expert is today. Molly McLaughlin is a creator of sleep as a skill, a company that optimizes people’s sleep through a unique blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change. She created this company from her own experience when she literally has had not slept well her entire life,

 

she had massive, poor sleep habits. And all of a sudden she found herself in for months. She dealt with insomnia in her background is in behavioral change. And so she went down this rabbit hole to figure out like, what is going on with these disturbances in my sleep. And she really went in a way that did not include sleep AIDS. And because of her experience,

 

now this company was born and she is an absolute expert at helping you know, how to really get the sleep that you need and understand sleep. And that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So at the end of this episode, you will know how your circadian rhythm affects your peak performance. You will know how to read the data from your wearable technology,

 

which was super cool because I wear sleep technology, but frankly, I really didn’t understand how to read the data. And so that is very cool. We’re talking about this on today’s show as well. And you’re going to walk away with some basic things you can do. First thing tomorrow morning to move towards more productive sleep in more healthy sleep. So here are the background notes,

 

everything we’re talking about, including a link to join the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club in clubhouse, where Molly and I are going to be going live. And she’s going to be chatting with you about your Entrepreneur sleep and peak performance questions can be found by visiting the show notes for this episode. There’s a lot of things in here and even more tools that Molly’s given you.

 

So if you want to know more about, we’re talking about Connect with Molly further, be part of this conversation and frankly learn right alongside me, visit Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. So let’s go ahead and dive in with Molly.<inaudible> All right. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast.

 

I am so excited to be joined by my guest today. I’m actually found her on clubhouse. Many of you know, who’ve been listening that I am bingeing clubhouse and can’t get enough of it. And this is exactly why, because I get to dive into spaces that I never would have been able to before in find people like Molly. How do you say your last name off?

 

Yes. Perfect McLaughlin. Absolutely. Yes, I know. Is it phonetic? Is it not? Yes. And find people like Molly McLaughlin. I am so excited to welcome you here on this show. Can you introduce everybody to your area of expertise in super power? And just give us a little bit of background before we dive into what we’re talking about today.

 

Absolutely. Thank you so much for having me here. This has already been a pleasure. I can’t wait to get into more with you. I am the creator of a company called sleep is a skill that helps people optimize their sleep through a blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change, and a little bit background on me and why I’m so obsessed with the topic of sleep and why it’s totally changed.

 

My life is that for so many years, I did everything not to do for your sleep. You know, every article you read what to do. I was doing the opposite in a lot of ways, but it really didn’t think it was much of a problem. I didn’t think much of it at all. Living in Manhattan as an entrepreneur, burning the candle at both ends stressed to the max.

 

And I just thought of my sleep as a lot of labels. I thought of it as I’m a night owl, I’m a short sleeper. I’m not the greatest sleeper. Oh, it must be in my jeans. That’s just how it is for me. And, and you know, a number of different things, but didn’t think of it as something that I would have much of a say of how to transform.

 

And I didn’t correlate when I was starting to get more and more sick at different things, you know, just getting run down anxious. I had guessed straight as I had shingles. I had a number of things that were just indicators, right. That you are stressed and things are not working. So, so yeah, and then it was not until I went through my own period of insomnia while traveling internationally.

 

So in different countries, you know, not speaking the same language and I cannot sleep. And it was really a lot of the entrepreneurship part of it that, you know, our businesses weren’t ready to be taken on the road yet. My fiance and I, and how it manifested was suddenly I can’t sleep. And the amount of anxiety that was happening during that period,

 

I went to the doctors in Croatia, got, you know, with Google translate and leave with their version of Ambien. And in that moment, kind of like, what is the game plan here am. I’m supposed to just take something like this for the rest of my life, that doesn’t align with my identity of who I think of myself and yet I’m desperate to sleep.

 

So what do I do? So what ended up happening was really just getting up under this area, going really down the rabbit hole of what it would take from a, what I learned to chronobiology and circadian rhythm perspective to transform my sleep. And then from that place, it really just snowballed into like podcasts, newsletters, courses, all of the things.

 

Okay. So you said so many things and we’re just going to kind of come together and pack it. But right now, I mean, your super power is helping high performers and entrepreneurs and small business owners have a healthy life and sleep. Yeah. That we all identify just like you said, I mean, I am you back in the past, right?